2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual M

In Brief ...... 1-1 Storage ...... 4-1 Climate Controls ...... 8-1 Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Storage Compartments ...... 4-1 Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Initial Drive Information ...... 1-3 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Air Vents ...... 8-12 Vehicle Features ...... 1-14 Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Performance and Driving and Operating ...... 9-1 Maintenance ...... 1-19 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving Information ...... 9-2 Controls ...... 5-2 Starting and Operating ...... 9-15 Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Warning Lights, Gages, and Engine Exhaust ...... 9-21 Keys and Locks ...... 2-2 Indicators ...... 5-11 Automatic Transmission ...... 9-22 Doors ...... 2-9 Information Displays ...... 5-24 Drive Systems ...... 9-25 Vehicle Security...... 2-13 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-33 Brakes ...... 9-26 Exterior Mirrors ...... 2-16 Vehicle Personalization ...... 5-42 Ride Control Systems ...... 9-28 Interior Mirrors ...... 2-18 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-49 Cruise Control ...... 9-30 Windows ...... 2-19 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-32 Roof ...... 2-22 Lighting ...... 6-1 Fuel ...... 9-38 Exterior Lighting ...... 6-1 Towing...... 9-43 Seats and Restraints ...... 3-1 Interior Lighting ...... 6-5 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-54 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Lighting Features ...... 6-6 Front Seats ...... 3-3 Vehicle Care ...... 10-1 Rear Seats ...... 3-9 Infotainment System ...... 7-1 General Information ...... 10-2 Safety Belts ...... 3-14 Introduction ...... 7-1 Vehicle Checks ...... 10-4 Airbag System ...... 3-29 Radio ...... 7-6 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-27 Child Restraints ...... 3-44 Audio Players ...... 7-12 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Rear Seat Infotainment ...... 7-35 Electrical System ...... 10-30 Phone ...... 7-45 Wheels and Tires ...... 10-37 2010 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual M

Jump Starting ...... 10-78 Towing...... 10-83 Appearance Care ...... 10-86 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 General Information ...... 11-1 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts ...... 11-7 Maintenance Records ...... 11-9 Technical Data ...... 12-1 Vehicle Identification ...... 12-1 Vehicle Data ...... 12-2 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy...... 13-14 Index ...... i-1 Introduction iii

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens the features found on your vehicle. A French language copy of this For vehicles first sold in Canada, manual can be obtained from your substitute the name “General dealer/retailer or from: SATURN, the SATURN Emblem, Motors of Canada Limited” for On peut obtenir un exemplaire de and the name OUTLOOK are Saturn Corporation wherever it ce guide en français auprès du registered trademarks of Saturn appears in this manual. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS Keep this manual in the vehicle for suivante: and GM are registered trademarks quick reference. of General Motors Corporation. Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 This manual describes features that Detroit, MI 48207 may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are 1-800-551-4123 options that you did not purchase or Numéro de poste 6438 de langue due to changes subsequent to the française printing of this owner manual. www.helminc.com

Using this Manual Symbols { WARNING To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or manual and the page number where information relating to a specific it can be found. Notice: This means there is component, control, message, gage, something that could result in or indicator. property or vehicle damage. This Danger, Warnings, and M : This symbol is shown when would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual Cautions vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or Warning messages found on vehicle information. labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when reduce them. you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or Danger indicates a hazard with a information. high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. A circle with a slash through it is a Warning or Caution indicates a safety symbol which means “Do hazard that could result in injury or Not,”“Do not do this” or “Do not let death. this happen.” Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature } : Power Here are some additional symbols O : Exterior Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start that may be found on the vehicle # and what they mean. For more : Fog Lamps > : Safety Belt Reminders information on the symbol, refer to . : Fuel Gage 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor the index. + : Fuses F : Traction Control : Airbag Readiness Light 9 i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam M : Windshield Washer Fluid # : Air Conditioning Changer ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) j : LATCH System Child g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls Restraints or OnStar® * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp $ : Brake System Warning Light : : Oil Pressure " : Charging System I : Cruise Control vi Introduction

2 NOTES In Brief 1-1

Exterior Lighting ...... 1-11 In Brief Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-11 Climate Controls ...... 1-12 Instrument Panel Vehicle Features Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Radio(s) ...... 1-14 Satellite Radio ...... 1-15 Initial Drive Information Portable Audio Devices ...... 1-15 Initial Drive Information ...... 1-3 Bluetooth® ...... 1-15 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16 System ...... 1-4 Navigation System ...... 1-16 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-4 Driver Information Door Locks ...... 1-5 Center (DIC) ...... 1-16 Liftgate ...... 1-5 Cruise Control ...... 1-17 Windows ...... 1-6 Storage Compartments ...... 1-17 Seat Adjustment ...... 1-6 Power Outlets ...... 1-18 Second Row Seats ...... 1-7 Sunroof ...... 1-18 Third Row Seats ...... 1-7 Heated Seats ...... 1-7 Performance and Maintenance Heated and Ventilated StabiliTrak® ...... 1-19 Seats ...... 1-8 Tire Pressure Monitor ...... 1-19 Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8 Tire Sealant and Safety Belt ...... 1-8 Compressor Kit ...... 1-19 Sensing System for Passenger Engine Oil Life System ...... 1-20 Airbag ...... 1-8 Driving for Better Fuel Mirror Adjustment ...... 1-9 Economy ...... 1-20 Steering Wheel Roadside Assistance Adjustment ...... 1-10 Program ...... 1-21 Interior Lighting ...... 1-10 OnStar® ...... 1-21 1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑12. K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Initial Drive page 5 2. B. Turn and Lane-Change Signals ‑ Information on page 6‑4. L. Horn on page 5‑5. C. Instrument Cluster on M. Steering Wheel Controls on This section provides a brief overview about some of the page 5‑12. page 5‑3. important features that may or may D. Driver Information Center (DIC) N. Hazard Warning Flashers on not be on your specific vehicle. Buttons. See Driver Information page 6‑4. For more detailed information, refer Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) O. Center Console Shift Lever. See on page 5 24 or Driver to each of the features which can be ‑ “Console Shift Lever” under Information Center (DIC) found later in this owner manual. Shifting Into Park on page 9‑19. (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30. P. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑6. E. Instrument Panel Storage on page 4‑1. Q. Power Outlets on page 5‑9. F. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑6. R. Heated Front Seats on Navigation/Radio System (If page 3‑8. Equipped). See Navigation S. Climate Control Systems on System manual. page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic G. Exterior Lamp Controls on Climate Control System on page 6‑1. page 8‑4 (If Equipped). H. Hood Release. See Hood on T. Passenger Airbag Status page 10‑5. Indicator on page 5‑16. I. Instrument Panel Illumination U. Glove Box on page 4‑1. Control on page 6‑5. J. Cruise Control on page 9‑30. 1-4 In Brief

Remote Keyless Entry To open or close the liftgate, press When the vehicle starts, the parking (RKE) System and hold & until the liftgate lamps will turn on and remain on as begins to move. long as the engine is running. The The RKE transmitter is used to doors will be locked and the climate remotely lock and unlock the doors Press L and release to locate the control system may come on. from up to 60 m (195 feet) away vehicle. The engine will continue to run for from the vehicle. Press L and hold for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a three seconds to sound the panic 10-minute time extension. Remote alarm. start can be extended only once. Press L again to cancel the panic Canceling a Remote Start alarm. To cancel a remote start: See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . Aim the RKE transmitter at the System Operation on page 2‑3. vehicle and press and hold / until the parking lamps turn off. Remote Vehicle Start . Turn on the hazard warning Starting the Vehicle flashers. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the . Turn the ignition switch on and then off. Press K to unlock the driver door. vehicle. Press K again within five seconds 2. Press Q . See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5. to unlock all remaining doors. 3. Immediately after completing Press Q to lock all doors. Step 2, press and hold / until the parking lamps flash. Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized. In Brief 1-5

Door Locks Liftgate To lock or unlock a door manually: To open the liftgate the vehicle must be in P (Park). Press the touchpad . From the inside use the door lock knob on the window sill. under the liftgate handle. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull . From the outside turn the key strap as an aid. toward the front or rear of the Power Liftgate vehicle, or press the Q or " button on the Remote Keyless On vehicles with a power liftgate, Entry (RKE) transmitter. the vehicle must be in P (Park) to operate it. Power Door Locks . Press and hold the liftgate . Press the liftgate button on the On vehicles with power door locks, button & on the Remote center console. the controls are located on the front doors. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. . Press the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate handle. " (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors. For more information see Liftgate on page 2‑9. Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. See: . Power Door Locks on page 2‑7 1-6 In Brief

Windows Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the control (A) forward or Manual Seats rearward. 1. Pull the handle under the seat to Raise or lower the entire seat by unlock the seat. moving the control (A) up or down. 2. Slide the seat to the desired See Power Seat Adjustment on position and release the handle. page 3‑3. Try to move the seat to be sure it is To raise or recline the seatback, tilt locked in place. the top of the control (B) forward or rearward. Power Seats See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑6. Press the front or rear of the On vehicles with power windows, control (C) to increase or decrease the switches are on the driver door lumbar support. armrest. Each passenger door has a switch that controls only that See Lumbar Adjustment on window. page 3‑5. Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up to raise it. For more information, see Power Windows on page 2‑20. A. Power Seat Adjustment Control B. Reclining Seatbacks C. Lumbar Adjustment In Brief 1-7

Second Row Seats Third Row Seats Heated Seats The third row seats can be folded Heated Front Seats forward or removed. The heated seat controls are located on the center console. The engine must be running to operate them. I : Press to turn on the heated seatback. J : Press to turn on or off the heated seat and seatback. For more information see Heated Front Seats on page 3‑8. To access the third row, pull the sliding seat lever forward so that the seat cushion folds and the entire Pull up on the release lever located seat slides forward. on the back of the seat and push See Rear Seats on page 3‑9. the seatback forward. For detailed procedures see Third Row Seats on page 3‑11. 1-8 In Brief

Heated and Ventilated Safety Belt Sensing System for Seats Passenger Airbag On vehicles with this feature, the controls are on the front doors near the handle. H : Press to ventilate the seat. z : Press to heat the seat. For more information see Heated United States and Ventilated Front Seats on page 3‑8. Head Restraint Adjustment Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use Do not drive until the head restraints safety belts properly. for all occupants are installed and Canada . Safety Belts on page 3 14. adjusted properly. ‑ The passenger sensing system will For more information see Head . How to Wear Safety Belts turn off the right front passenger Restraints on page 3‑2. Properly on page 3‑18. frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbag, . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑23. seat-mounted side impact airbags, . Lower Anchors and Tethers for and roof-rail airbags are not affected Children (LATCH System) on by the passenger sensing system. page 3‑52. The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is In Brief 1-9 started. See Passenger Sensing Controls for the outside power Interior Mirror System on page 3 37 for more mirrors are located on the driver ‑ If equipped, a manual inside information. door armrest. rearview mirror can be adjusted so 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the that the driver can see behind the Mirror Adjustment driver or passenger side mirror. vehicle more clearly. Hold the mirror Exterior Mirrors 2. Press one of the four arrows in the center to move it up or down located on the control pad to and side to side. Use the day/night adjust the mirror. adjustment to help prevent glare from the headlamps behind you. 3. Press either (A) or (B) again to Move the lever located at the base deselect the mirror. of the mirror, to the right for Folding Mirrors nighttime use and to the left for daytime use. For vehicles with outside power foldaway mirrors: For vehicles with an automatic dimming rearview mirror, the mirror 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out will move automatically to reduce to the driving position. the glare from the headlamps of the 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to vehicle behind. The dimming feature the folded position. comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the ignition is If equipped, manually fold the turned to start. mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic See Automatic Dimming Rearview car wash. To fold, push the mirror Mirror on page 2‑18. toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward to return it to the original position. 1-10 In Brief

Steering Wheel Power Tilt Wheel Interior Lighting Adjustment Dome Lamps The dome lamps are located in the overhead console and above the rear seat passengers. The dome lamps automatically come on when a door is opened, unless the dome lamp override button is pressed in. To manually turn them on, turn the instrument panel brightness control clockwise to the farthest position. For vehicles with the power tilt and Dome Lamp Override telescope wheel, the control is on The adjustment lever is located on the left side of the steering column. The dome lamp override button is the left side of the steering column. next to the exterior lamps control. . Push the control up or down to 1. Pull the lever down to adjust the tilt the steering wheel up E: Press the button in and the steering wheel. or down. dome lamps remain off when a door 2. Move the steering wheel up or is opened. Press the button again to . Push the control forward or return it to the extended position so down or backward or forward rearward to move the steering into a comfortable position. that the dome lamps come on when wheel toward the front or rear of a door is opened. 3. Pull the lever up to lock the the vehicle. steering wheel in place. See Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 5‑2. In Brief 1-11

Reading Lamps O : Turns the automatic light Windshield Wiper/Washer control on or off. Press the button near each lamp to The windshield wiper/washer lever turn them on or off. AUTO : Automatic operation of the is located on the left side of the For more information, see: headlamps at normal brightness and steering column. other exterior lamps. . Dome Lamps on page 6‑5. ;: Manual operation of the parking . Instrument Panel Illumination lamps and other exterior lamps, Control on page 6‑5. except the headlamps. Exterior Lighting 2: Manual operation of the headlamps and other exterior lamps. # (If Equipped): Push the fog lamp button in to turn on the fog lamps. For more information, see: . Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6‑1. Turn the band with the wiper symbol . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ to control the windshield wipers. Automatic Headlamp System on 8 : Use for a single wiping cycle. page 6‑3. 9 : Turns the wipers off. . Delayed Headlamps on page 6‑3. The exterior lamps control is on the instrument panel to the left of the . Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. steering wheel. 1-12 In Brief

6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn the Climate Controls band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. 1 : Slow wipes. 2 : Fast wipes. Windshield Washer J : Press the button at the end of the turn signal/lane change lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 5‑5. A. Fan Control E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) B. Temperature Control F. Air Recirculation C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger D. Air Conditioning In Brief 1-13

See Climate Control Systems on page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8‑4 (If Equipped). For more information about the rear climate control, see Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) on page 8‑10 or Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11.

A. Fan Control H. Display B. AUTO I. Power (On/Off) C. Defrost J. Rear Window Defogger D. Air Recirculation K. Air Conditioning E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) L. PASS (Passenger) F. Air Delivery Mode Control M. Passenger Side Temperature G. Driver Side Temperature Control Control 1-14 In Brief

Vehicle Features 4 : Change the display between the radio station frequency and the Radio(s) time, if equipped. While the ignition is off, press 4 to display the time. For more information about these and other radio features, see Operation on page 7‑2. Storing a Favorite Station A maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations. Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑6. O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped. decrease the volume. f : Select radio stations. © ¨ : Seek or scan stations. In Brief 1-15

Setting the Clock Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices To set the time and date for the Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite This vehicle may have an auxiliary radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port: Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite input located on the radio faceplate 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ Radio subscription can receive XM and a USB port located in the center ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then programming. console. External devices such as ® press O , to turn the radio on. iPod , laptop computers, MP3 XM Satellite Radio Service players, CD changers, USB storage 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, XM is a satellite radio service that is device, etc. can be connected to the MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, based in the 48 contiguous United auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) month, day, and year). States and 10 Canadian provinces. input jack or the USB port XM Satellite Radio has a wide depending on the audio system. 3. Press the pushbutton located variety of programming and under any one of the labels to be See Auxiliary Devices on commercial-free music, page 7‑33. changed. coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality 4. To increase or decrease the time sound. A fee is required to receive Bluetooth® or date, turn f clockwise or the XM service. For more counter-clockwise. information, contact XM at in the The in-vehicle Bluetooth system U.S. and Canada. allows users with a For detailed instructions on setting For more information refer to: Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to the clock for the vehicles specific make and receive hands-free calls audio system, see Clock on . www.xmradio.com or call using the vehicle’s audio system, page 5‑8. 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). microphone and controls. . www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada). See Satellite Radio on page 7‑7. 1-16 In Brief

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone b g : Press to silence the vehicle throughout the United States and must be paired with the in-vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn Canada. After a destination has Bluetooth system before it can be the sound on. Press and hold longer been set, the system provides used in the vehicle. Not all phones than two seconds to interact with turn-by-turn instructions for reaching will support all functions. OnStar® or Bluetooth systems. the destination. In addition, the system can help locate a variety of See Bluetooth on page 7‑45. + e − e : Increases or decreases points of interest (POI), such as Steering Wheel Controls volume. banks, airports, restaurants, c : Press to reject an incoming and more. call, or to end a call. See the vehicle's Navigation System SRCE : Press to switch between manual for more information. the radio, CD, and for vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear Driver Information auxiliary. Center (DIC) ¨ : Press to seek the next radio station, the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot, or to select tracks and folders on an iPod® or USB device. For more information, see Steering w / x : Press to change favorite Wheel Controls on page 5‑3. V : Press to set or reset certain radio stations, select tracks on a functions and to turn off or CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks or Navigation System acknowledge messages on the DIC. folders on an iPod® or USB device. The vehicle's navigation system provides detailed maps of most major freeways and roads In Brief 1-17

U : Press to customize the feature Cruise Control Storage Compartments settings on your vehicle. See Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42 for more information. T : Press to display the oil life, park assist on vehicles with this feature, units, tire pressure readings on vehicles with this feature, RKE transmitter programming, and compass calibration and zone setting on vehicles with this feature. 3 : Press this button to display the odometer, trip odometers, fuel T : On/Off. range, average economy, timer, fuel For vehicles with a second row used, and average speed. + RES: Press to accelerate or center console, open each area to resume speed. access the storage compartment Some vehicles do not have the inside. buttons shown, however some of SET– : Press to set speed or the menus can be viewed by using decrease speed. the trip odometer reset stem. [ : Press to cancel cruise control. See Driver Information Center (DIC) See Cruise Control on page 9‑30. (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑24 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30. 1-18 In Brief

Power Outlets The vehicle has three 12-volt accessory power outlets which can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone. The power outlets are located: . On the instrument panel below the climate controls. . At the rear of the center floor Press the buttons (B, C) on the front console. The switch to operate the front of the consoles to access the upper . In the rear cargo area. sunroof is on the headliner above and lower storage areas. the rearview mirror. To use the outlets, remove the Increase the storage area by folding cover. Vent: Press the front or rear of the the top of the console forward. Lift switch to vent or close the sunroof. See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. up on rear console handle (A) and Express-open/Express-close: pull forward. Sunroof From the closed position, press and See Floor Console Storage on release the rear or front of the page 4‑2. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or switch to express-open or ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the express-close the sunroof. sunroof and power sunshade. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) For more information see Sunroof on page 9‑17 on page 2‑22. In Brief 1-19

Performance and Tire Pressure Monitor vehicle is first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be an Maintenance This vehicle may have a Tire early indicator that your tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). pressures are getting low and the StabiliTrak® tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure. The traction control system limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor system assists with directional System can alert you about low tire control of the vehicle in difficult pressure, but it does not replace driving conditions. Both systems normal monthly tire maintenance. turn on automatically every time the The Tire Pressure Monitor System It is the driver’s responsibility to vehicle is started. alerts you when a significant maintain correct tire pressures. . To turn off the traction control reduction in pressure occurs in one See Tire Pressure Monitor System part of StabiliTrak, press and or more of your vehicle’s tires by on page 10‑44 and Tire Pressure illuminating the low tire pressure Monitor Operation on page 10 46. release 5 located on the ‑ warning light on the instrument instrument panel in front of the cluster. The warning light will remain Tire Sealant and shift lever. L illuminates and the on until the tire pressure is appropriate DIC message is corrected. The proper tire pressures Compressor Kit displayed. See Vehicle for your vehicle are listed on the This vehicle may come with a jack Messages on page 5‑33. Tire and Loading Information label and spare tire or a tire sealant and . The StabiliTrak system located on the driver side center compressor kit. The kit can be used remains on. pillar (B pillar). See Vehicle Load to seal small punctures in the tread Limits on page 9‑10. area of the tire. For more information, see StabiliTrak System on page 9‑28 You may notice during cooler See Tire Sealant and Compressor conditions that the low tire pressure Kit on page 10‑59 for complete warning light will appear when the operating information. 1-20 In Brief

Engine Oil Life System 3. If the vehicle has Driver Driving for Better Fuel Information Center (DIC) The engine oil life system calculates buttons: Press and hold the set/ Economy engine oil life based on vehicle use reset button until 100% is Driving habits can affect fuel and displays the CHANGE ENGINE displayed. Three chimes sound mileage. Here are some driving tips OIL SOON message when it is time and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL to get the best fuel economy to change the engine oil and filter. SOON message goes off. possible. The oil life system should be reset to 100% only following an oil If the vehicle does not have . Avoid fast starts and accelerate change. Driver Information Center (DIC) smoothly. buttons: Press and hold the trip . Brake gradually and avoid Resetting the Oil Life System odometer reset stem until OIL abrupt stops. 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, LIFE REMAINING shows 100%. . with the engine off. Three chimes sound and the Avoid idling the engine for long CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON periods of time. 2. If the vehicle has Driver message goes off. . Information Center (DIC) When road and weather buttons: Press the vehicle 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. conditions are appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped. information button until OIL LIFE See Engine Oil Life System on REMAINING displays. page 10‑10. . Always follow posted speed If the vehicle does not have limits or drive more slowly when Driver Information Center (DIC) conditions require. buttons: The vehicle must be in . Keep vehicle tires properly P (Park) to access this display. inflated. Press the trip odometer reset . Combine several trips into a stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING single trip. displays. In Brief 1-21

. Replace the vehicle's tires with contact Roadside Assistance, and Automatic Crash Response the same TPC Spec number relay exact location to get you the In a crash, built in sensors can molded into the tire's sidewall help you need. near the size. automatically alert an OnStar Online Owner Center advisor who is immediately . Follow recommended scheduled connected to the vehicle to see if maintenance. The Online Owner Center is a you need help. complimentary service that includes Roadside Assistance online service reminders, vehicle How OnStar Service Works maintenance tips, online owner Q : This blue button connects you Program manual, special privileges to a specially trained OnStar advisor and more. U.S.: 1-800-553-6000 to verify your account information TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 Sign up today at: and to answer questions. www.gmownercenter.com/saturn ] : Push this red emergency Canada: 1-800-268-6800 (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada). button to get priority help from As the owner of a new Saturn, you specially trained OnStar emergency are automatically enrolled in the ® OnStar advisors. Roadside Assistance program. This program provides technically trained X : Push this button for hands-free, advisors who are available 24 hours voice-activated calling and to give a day, 365 days a year, minor repair voice commands for turn-by-turn information or towing arrangements. navigation. Roadside Assistance and OnStar Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, If you have a current OnStar OnStar® uses several innovative Remote Door Unlock, Roadside subscription, press the OnStar Assistance, Turn-by-Turn Navigation button and the current GPS location technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety, and Hands-Free Calling are will be sent to an OnStar Advisor available on most vehicles. Not all who will assess your problem, security, navigation, diagnostics, and calling services. 1-22 In Brief

OnStar services are available on all area has coverage, network Location information about the vehicles. For more information see capacity and reception when the vehicle is only available if the GPS the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit service is needed, and technology satellite signals are unobstructed www.onstar.com (U.S.) or that is compatible with the OnStar and available. www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact service. Not all services are The vehicle must have a working OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR available everywhere, particularly in electrical system, including (1-888-466-7827) or TTY remote or enclosed areas, or at all adequate battery power, for the 1-877-248-2080, or press Q to times. OnStar equipment to operate. There speak with an OnStar advisor The OnStar system can record and are other problems OnStar cannot 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. transmit vehicle information. This control that may prevent OnStar For a full description of OnStar information is automatically sent to from providing OnStar service at services and system limitations, see an OnStar call center when Q is any particular time or place. Some examples are damage to important the OnStar Owner's Guide in the pressed, ] is pressed, or if the glove box. parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, airbags or ACR system deploy. This tall buildings, tunnels, weather or OnStar service is subject to the information usually includes the wireless phone network congestion. OnStar terms and conditions vehicle's GPS location and, in the included in the OnStar Subscriber event of a crash, additional OnStar Steering Wheel Information. information regarding the crash that Controls the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the OnStar service cannot work unless direction from which the vehicle was This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute the vehicle is in a place where hit). When the virtual advisor feature button that can be used to interact OnStar has an agreement with a of OnStar hands-free calling is with OnStar hands-free calling. See wireless service provider for service used, the vehicle also sends OnStar Steering Wheel Controls on in that area. OnStar service also the vehicle's GPS location so they page 5‑3 for more information. cannot work unless the vehicle is in can provide services where it is a place where the wireless service located. provider OnStar has hired for that In Brief 1-23

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more information. Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active. 1-24 In Brief

2 NOTES Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Doors Interior Mirrors Keys, Doors and Liftgate ...... 2-9 Manual Rearview Mirror ...... 2-18 Windows Automatic Dimming Rearview Vehicle Security Mirror ...... 2-18 Vehicle Security ...... 2-13 Windows Keys and Locks Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-13 Immobilizer ...... 2-14 Windows ...... 2-19 Keys ...... 2-2 Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-14 Power Windows ...... 2-20 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Sun Visors ...... 2-21 System ...... 2-2 Exterior Mirrors Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Convex Mirrors ...... 2-16 Roof System Operation ...... 2-3 Power Mirrors ...... 2-16 Sunroof ...... 2-22 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Folding Mirrors ...... 2-16 Door Locks ...... 2-7 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-17 Power Door Locks ...... 2-7 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-18 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-8 Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Safety Locks ...... 2-8 2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be Keys sure you have spare keys. If you are locked out of the vehicle, { WARNING call the Roadside Assistance Leaving children in a vehicle with Center. See Roadside Assistance the ignition key is dangerous for Program on page 13‑5. many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even Remote Keyless Entry killed. They could operate the (RKE) System power windows or other controls The key is used for the ignition and See Radio Frequency Statement on or even make the vehicle move. all door locks. page 13‑16 for information regarding The windows will function with the The key has a bar-coded key tag Part 15 of the Federal keys in the ignition and children that the dealer/retailer or qualified Communications Commission (FCC) could be seriously injured or killed locksmith can use to make new Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry if caught in the path of a closing keys. Store this information in a safe and Science Canada. window. Do not leave the keys in place, not in the vehicle. Changes or modifications to this a vehicle with children. See your dealer/retailer if a system by other than an authorized replacement key or additional key is service facility could void needed. authorization to use this equipment. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

If there is a decrease in the RKE There are other conditions which If enabled through the Driver operating range: can affect the performance of the Information Center (DIC), the transmitter. See Remote Keyless parking lamps flash once to indicate . Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2. locking has occurred. If enabled the vehicle. through the DIC, the horn sounds when is pressed again within . Q Check the location. Other five seconds. See Vehicle vehicles or objects may be Personalization (With DIC Buttons) blocking the signal. on page 5‑42 for additional . Check the transmitter's battery. information. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section. Pressing Q may arm the content theft-deterrent system. See . If the transmitter is still not Anti-Theft Alarm System on working correctly, see your page 2‑13. dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for service. K (Unlock): Press once to unlock With Remote Start and Power only the driver door. If K is pressed Remote Keyless Entry Liftgate Shown, Without Similar again within five seconds, all remaining doors unlock. The interior (RKE) System Operation / (Remote Vehicle Start): For lamps come on and stay on for vehicles with this feature, see The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 20 seconds or until the ignition is Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 5 transmitter functions work up to ‑ turned on. 60 m (195 feet) away from the for additional information. If enabled through the DIC, the vehicle. (Lock): Press to lock all the Q parking lamps flash twice to indicate doors. unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42. 2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Pressing K on the RKE transmitter Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement disarms the content theft-deterrent the Vehicle Replace the battery if the REPLACE system. See Anti-Theft Alarm Only RKE transmitters programmed BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY System on page 2‑13. to this vehicle will work. If a message displays in the DIC. & (Power Liftgate): Press and transmitter is lost or stolen, a Notice: When replacing the hold until the liftgate begins to move replacement can be purchased and battery, do not touch any of the to open or close the liftgate. The programmed through your dealer/ circuitry on the transmitter. Static taillamps flash and a chime sounds retailer. When the replacement from your body could damage the to indicate when the liftgate is transmitter is programmed to this transmitter. opening or closing. vehicle using the DIC, all remaining transmitters must also be (Vehicle Locator/Panic L reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen Alarm): Press and release to transmitters will no longer work locate the vehicle. The parking once the new transmitter is lamps flash and the horn sounds programmed. Each vehicle can three times. have up to eight transmitters Press and hold L for more than programmed to it. See “Relearn two seconds to activate the panic Remote Key” under Driver alarm. The parking lamps flash and Information Center (DIC) (With DIC the horn sounds repeatedly for Buttons) on page 5‑24 or Driver 30 seconds. The alarm turns off Information Center (DIC) (Without when the ignition is moved to ON/ DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30 for instructions on how to program RUN or is pressed again. The 1. Separate the transmitter with a L transmitters to this vehicle. ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for flat, thin object inserted into the the panic alarm to work. notch on the side. 2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

3. Insert the new battery, positive If the vehicle has the remote start When the vehicle starts the parking side facing down. Replace with a feature, the RKE transmitter lamps will turn on and remain on as CR2032 or equivalent battery. functions have an increased range long as the engine is running. The 4. Snap the transmitter back of operation. However, the range doors will be locked and the climate together. may be less while the vehicle is control system will operate running. automatically if the vehicle has the Remote Vehicle Start There are other conditions which automatic system, or at the same can affect the performance of the setting as when the vehicle was last This vehicle may have a remote transmitter, see Remote Keyless turned off. starting feature that starts the Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 If the vehicle has an automatic engine from outside of the vehicle. for additional information. climate control system and heated / (Remote Start): This button is seats, the heated seats turn on located on the RKE transmitter if the Starting the Engine Using during colder outside temperatures vehicle has remote start. Remote Start and shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. See Heated Front Laws in some communities may To start the vehicle: Seats on page 3 8 for more restrict the use of remote starters. ‑ 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the information. For example, some laws may vehicle. require a person using the remote The rear window defogger and start to have the vehicle in view 2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. heated mirrors, if the vehicle has when doing so. Check local 3. Immediately after completing them, turn on during colder outside regulations for any requirements on temperatures and turn off when the Step 2, press and hold / until remote starting of vehicles. key is turned to ON/RUN. the parking lamps flash. If the Do not use the remote start feature vehicle's lights can not be seen, After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert and turn the key if the vehicle is low on fuel. The press and hold / for at least vehicle could run out of fuel. to the ON/RUN position to drive the four seconds. vehicle. 2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

If the vehicle is left running it A maximum of two remote starts or Conditions in Which the automatically shuts off after remote start attempts are allowed Remote Start Will Not Work 10 minutes unless a time extension between ignition cycles. has been done. The vehicle cannot be started using After the vehicle's engine has been the remote start feature if the key is Extending Engine Run Time started two times using the remote in the ignition, the hood is open, or if start button, the ignition must be there is an emission control system To extend the engine run time by turned on and then back off before malfunction. 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 though 3 the remote start procedure can be while the engine is still running. The used again. The engine turns off during a remote engine run time can only be start if the coolant temperature gets extended if it is the first remote start Shutting the Engine Off After a too high or if the oil pressure since the vehicle has been driven. Remote Start gets low. Remote start can be extended To manually shut off a remote start: Vehicles that have the remote one time. vehicle start feature are shipped . Aim the RKE transmitter at the If the remote start procedure is used from the factory with the remote again before the first 10 minute time vehicle and press / until the vehicle start system enabled. The frame has ended, the first parking lamps turn off. system may be enabled or disabled 10 minutes will immediately expire . Turn on the hazard warning through the DIC if the vehicle has and the second 10 minute time flashers. DIC buttons. See “REMOTE frame will start. START” under Vehicle . Turn the ignition switch on and Personalization (With DIC Buttons) For example, if the lock button and then off. on page 5 42 for additional then the remote start buttons are ‑ information. If the vehicle does not pressed again after the vehicle has have DIC buttons, see your dealer/ been running for five minutes, retailer to enable or disable the 10 minutes are added, allowing the remote start system. engine to run for a total of 15 minutes. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

Door Locks Delayed Locking WARNING (Continued) When locking the doors with the { WARNING injuries or even death from power lock switch and a door or the heat stroke. Always lock the liftgate is open, the doors will lock Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it. five seconds after the last door is dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter closed. You will hear three chimes . Passengers, especially through an unlocked door to signal that the delayed locking children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop feature is in use. doors and fall out of a moving your vehicle. Locking your Pressing the power lock switch vehicle. When a door is doors can help prevent this twice or the lock button on the RKE locked, the handle will not from happening. transmitter twice will override the open it. The chance of being delayed locking feature and thrown out of the vehicle in a To lock or unlock a door, use the immediately lock all the doors. crash is increased if the key from the outside or the door doors are not locked. So, all lock from the inside. This feature will not operate if the passengers should wear key is in the ignition. safety belts properly and the Power Door Locks This feature can be programmed by doors should be locked using the Driver Information Center The power door lock switches are whenever the vehicle is (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK located on the front doors. “ ” driven. under Vehicle Personalization (With " . Young children who get into (Unlock): Press to unlock the DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42. unlocked vehicles may be doors. unable to get out. A child can Q (Lock): Remove the key from be overcome by extreme heat the ignition and press to lock the and can suffer permanent doors. (Continued) 2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Automatic Door Locks the key is in the ignition, all of the To set the locks, insert a key into doors will lock and then the front the slot and turn it to the horizontal Vehicles with an automatic lock/ passenger door will unlock. position. The door can only be unlock feature enable you to opened from the outside with the program the vehicle's power door Safety Locks door unlocked. To return the door to locks. This feature can be normal operation, turn the slot to the programmed through the Driver The vehicle has rear door security vertical position. Information Center (DIC). See locks to prevent passengers from Vehicle Personalization (With DIC opening the rear doors from the Buttons) on page 5‑42 for more inside. information. Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open. If the driver side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver's door is open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock. If the passenger side power door Open the rear doors to access the lock switch is pressed when the security locks on the inside edge of front passenger door is open and each door. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Doors To open the liftgate, press the WARNING (Continued) touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle. The vehicle must be . Liftgate Adjust the Climate Control in P (Park) to open the liftgate. To system to a setting that Manual Liftgate Operation close the liftgate, use the pull cup or brings in only outside air and strap. set the fan speed to the { WARNING highest setting. See Climate The liftgate has an electric latch. Control System in the Index. If the battery is disconnected or has Exhaust gases can enter the low voltage, the liftgate will not . If the vehicle is equipped with vehicle if it is driven with the open. The liftgate will resume a power liftgate, disable the operation when the battery is liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with power liftgate function. any objects that pass through the reconnected and charged. seal between the body and the For more information about If the battery is properly connected trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine carbon monoxide, see Engine and has adequate voltage, and the exhaust contains Carbon Exhaust on page 9‑21. liftgate still will not function, the Monoxide (CO) which cannot be vehicle should be taken to a dealer/ seen or smelled. It can cause To unlock the liftgate, use the power retailer for service. door lock switch or press the door unconsciousness and even death. unlock button on the Remote If the vehicle must be driven with Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: twice. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on . Close all of the windows. page 2‑3. . Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. (Continued) 2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Power Liftgate Operation WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

{ WARNING . Adjust the Climate Control You or others could be injured if system to a setting that caught in the path of the power Exhaust gases can enter the brings in only outside air and liftgate. Make sure there is no one vehicle if it is driven with the set the fan speed to the in the way of the liftgate as it is liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with highest setting. See Climate opening and closing. any objects that pass through the Control System in the Index. seal between the body and the Notice: If you open the liftgate . trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine If the vehicle is equipped with without checking for overhead exhaust contains Carbon a power liftgate, disable the obstructions such as a garage Monoxide (CO) which cannot be power liftgate function. door, you could damage the seen or smelled. It can cause For more information about liftgate or the liftgate glass. unconsciousness and even death. carbon monoxide, see Engine Always check to make sure the If the vehicle must be driven with Exhaust on page 9‑21. area above and behind the liftgate the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: is clear before opening it. The vehicle may have a power The power liftgate can be power . Close all of the windows. liftgate. The vehicle must be in opened and closed in the . Fully open the air outlets on P (Park) to use this feature. following ways: or under the instrument The taillamps will flash and a chime . panel. Press and hold the power liftgate will sound when the power liftgate button on the RKE transmitter (Continued) is used. until the liftgate starts moving. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

function will continue to completion. If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates before the power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. The power liftgate must be closed and latched before driving. If the liftgate is power opened and the support struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a Power Liftgate Button on Center Power Liftgate Button near chime will sound. The liftgate will Console Liftgate Latch stay open temporarily, then slowly close. See your dealer/retailer for . Press the liftgate button on the The liftgate can also be closed by service before using the liftgate if center console. pressing the power liftgate button this occurs. next to the liftgate latch. Press the . Press the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate handle. button a second time during liftgate Obstacle Detection Features operation to reverse the operation. Pressing the buttons or touchpad A warning chime will sound and the switch a second time while the The power liftgate may be liftgate will automatically reverse liftgate is moving reverses the temporarily disabled under extreme direction to the full closed or open direction. temperatures or under low battery position if the liftgate encounters an conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate obstacle during a power open or can still be operated manually. close cycle. After removing the If the vehicle is shifted out of obstruction, the power liftgate P (Park) while the power function is operation can be used again. in progress, the liftgate power 2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

If the liftgate comes across more Manual Operation of Power To open the liftgate, press the obstacles on the same power cycle, Liftgate touchpad on the handle on the the power function deactivates, and outside of the liftgate and lift the you must manually open or close gate open. To close the liftgate, use the liftgate. A message displays, the pull cup to lower the liftgate and LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate that close. The liftgate latch will power the liftgate is open. See Driver close. Always close the liftgate Information Center (DIC) (With DIC before driving. Buttons) on page 5‑24 or Driver If the RKE button or the power close Information Center (DIC) (Without button on the liftgate is pressed DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30 for while power operation is disabled, more information. After removing the lights will flash three times, but the obstructions, manually open the the liftgate will not move. liftgate to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully closed It is not recommended that you and latched position. The liftgate drive with the liftgate open. To change the liftgate to manual resumes normal power operation. However, if you must drive with the operation, press the switch on the liftgate open, the liftgate should be Pinch sensors are located on the center console to OFF. set to manual operation by pressing side edges of the liftgate. If an With the power liftgate disabled and the OFF switch on the center object is caught between the liftgate all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate console. and the vehicle and presses against can be manually opened and this sensor, the liftgate will reverse closed. direction and open fully. The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or closed manually. Do not force the liftgate open or closed during a power cycle. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

Vehicle Security 30 seconds. The content theft alarm goes off. The headlamps flash deterrent alarm is not armed and the horn sounds for about Vehicle theft is big business, until the security light goes off. 30 seconds, then turns off to save especially in some cities. This If the delayed locking feature is the battery power. vehicle has theft-deterrent features, active, the alarm is not activated The vehicle can be started with the however, they do not make it until all doors are closed and the correct ignition key if the alarm has impossible to steal. security light goes off. been set off. Anti-Theft Alarm System . Press Q when the driver door is To avoid setting off the alarm by accident: On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm closed. The security light comes system, to activate the system: on solid for approximately . Lock the vehicle with the door 30 seconds and then goes off. key after the doors are closed. . The content theft deterrent alarm Press Q on the Remote Keyless . is not armed until the security Unlock the door with the RKE Entry (RKE) transmitter or the transmitter. Unlocking a door any light goes off. power door lock switch when other way sets off the alarm if any door is open. The theft-deterrent system will not the system has been armed. activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle's key or the manual Press K or place the key in the door lock. ignition and turn it to START to turn off the alarm. If a locked door is opened without using the RKE transmitter, a Testing the Alarm ten second pre-alarm occurs. To test the alarm: The security light flashes. The horn chirps and the lights flash. If the key is not placed in the 1. From inside the vehicle, lower When the door is closed, the ignition and turned to START or the the driver side window and open security light stops flashing and door is not unlocked by pressing Q the driver door. stays on solid for approximately during the ten second pre-alarm, the 2. Press Q . 2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the Immobilizer Operation vehicle will be discouraged because door and wait for the security ® of the high number of electrical key light to go out. This vehicle has PASS-Key III+ codes. (Personalized Automotive Security 4. Then reach in through the System) theft-deterrent system. If the engine does not start and the window, unlock the door with the PASS-Key® III+ is a passive security light on the instrument manual door lock and open the theft-deterrent system. panel comes on when trying to start door. This should set off the the vehicle, there may be a problem alarm. The system is automatically armed with your theft-deterrent system. when the key is removed from the Turn the ignition off and try again. If the alarm does not sound when it ignition. should, but the vehicle's headlamps If the engine still does not start, and flash, check to see if the horn The system is automatically the key appears to be undamaged, works. The horn fuse may be blown. disarmed when the key is turned to try another ignition key and check To replace the fuse, see Fuses and ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit Circuit Breakers on page 10‑31. START from the LOCK/OFF Breakers on page 10‑31 for position. If the alarm does not sound or the additional information. If the engine vehicle's headlamps do not flash, You do not have to manually arm or still does not start with the other key, see your dealer/retailer for service. disarm the system. the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle does start, the first key may The security light comes on if there be faulty. See your dealer/retailer Immobilizer is a problem with arming or who can service the PASS-Key® III+ disarming the theft-deterrent See Radio Frequency Statement on to have a new key made. In an system. page 13‑16 for information regarding emergency, contact Roadside Part 15 of the Federal When the PASS-Key® III+ system Assistance. See Roadside Communications Commission (FCC) senses an incorrect key, the vehicle Assistance Program on page 13‑5. Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry does not start. Anyone using a It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ and Science Canada. trial-and-error method to start the decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

Up to 10 keys may be programmed To program the new additional key: 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if to the vehicle. The following 1 additional keys are to be procedure is for programming 1. Verify that the new key has a programmed. stamped on it. additional keys only. If all the If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or currently programmed keys are lost 2. Insert the already programmed damaged, see your dealer/retailer or or do not operate, you must see key in the ignition and start the a locksmith to have a new your dealer/retailer or a locksmith engine. If the engine does not ® key made. who can service PASS-Key III+ to start, see your dealer/retailer for have keys made and programmed service. The SERVICE THEFT to the system. DETERRENT SYSTEM message 3. After the engine has started, turn displays on the Driver Information See your dealer/retailer or a the key to LOCK/OFF, and Center (DIC) when there is a locksmith who can service remove the key. ® problem with the theft-deterrent PASS-Key III+ to get a new key system. See Anti-Theft Alarm blank that is cut exactly as the 4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the ON/RUN System Messages on page 5‑38 ignition key that operates the for additional information. system. position within five seconds of the original key being turned to Do not leave the key or device that the LOCK/OFF position. disarms or deactivates the theft The security light turns off once deterrent system in the vehicle. the key has been programmed. 2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors 3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the Convex Mirrors area behind it can be seen. 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. { WARNING

A convex mirror can make things, Folding Mirrors like other vehicles, look farther For vehicles with manual folding away than they really are. If you mirrors, fold the mirrors inward to cut too sharply into the right lane, prevent damage when going you could hit a vehicle on the through an automatic car wash. To right. Check the inside mirror or fold, push the mirror toward the glance over your shoulder before vehicle. Push the mirror outward to changing lanes. return it to the original position. Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on the driver The passenger side mirror is convex door armrest. shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from To adjust each mirror: the driver seat. 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger side mirror. 2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to adjust the mirror. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

For vehicles with outside power Resetting the Power Foldaway Automatic Dimming Feature foldaway mirrors: Mirrors The driver outside mirror adjusts for Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: the glare of the headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming . The mirrors are accidentally Rearview Mirror on page 2 18 for obstructed while folding. ‑ information on how to turn this . They are accidentally manually feature on. folded/unfolded. Turn Signal Indicator . The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds. The vehicle may have a turn signal indicator lamp that is built into the Fold and unfold the mirrors one time mirror housing. The turn signal lamp using the mirror controls to reset flashes with the use of the vehicle's them to their normal position. turn signal and hazard flashers. A popping noise may be heard The controls for power foldaway during the resetting of the power Heated Mirrors mirrors are located on the driver foldaway mirrors. This sound is door armrest. normal after a manual folding For vehicles with heated mirrors: 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out operation. < (Rear Window Defogger): to the driving position. Press to heat the mirrors. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to See “Rear Window Defogger” under the folded position. Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8‑4 for more information. 2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming If the vehicle has the memory Rearview Mirror package, the outside mirrors have a Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic park tilt feature. This feature tilts the Adjust the inside rearview mirror to dimming inside rearview mirror. outside mirrors to a preselected see clearly behind your vehicle. position when the vehicle is in Automatic dimming reduces the Hold the mirror in the center to glare from the headlamps of the R (Reverse). This allows the driver move it up or down and side to side. to view the curb for parallel parking. vehicle behind you. The dimming Use the day/night adjustment to feature comes on and the indicator The passenger and/or driver mirror help prevent glare from the light illuminates each time the returns to its original position when headlamps behind you. Move the ignition is turned to start. the vehicle is shifted out of lever to the right for nighttime use ® R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned and to the left for daytime use. Vehicles with OnStar have three off or to OFF/LOCK. ® additional control buttons for the Vehicles with OnStar have three OnStar® system. See your dealer/ This feature can be turned on or off additional control buttons located at retailer for more information about through the Driver Information the bottom of the mirror. See your OnStar® and how to subscribe to it. Center (DIC). See Vehicle dealer/retailer for more information See the OnStar® owner guide for Personalization (With DIC Buttons) about OnStar and how to subscribe ® more information about the services on page 5‑42 for more information. to it. See the OnStar owner guide OnStar® provides. for more information on the services OnStar provides. O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

The vehicle may also have a Rear Windows Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑34 for more information. { WARNING If the vehicle has RVC, the O Leaving children, helpless adults, button for turning the dimming or pets in a vehicle with the feature on or off will not be windows closed is dangerous. available. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer Cleaning the Mirror permanent injuries or even death Do not spray glass cleaner directly from heat stroke. Never leave a on the mirror. Use a soft towel child, a helpless adult, or a pet dampened with water. alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

Power Windows Express-Up/Express-Down Windows { WARNING A window with the express-up/down feature allows it to be raised or Leaving children in a vehicle with lowered without holding the switch. the keys is dangerous for many Press or pull the window switch fully reasons, children or others could and release it to activate the be badly injured or even killed. express feature. The express mode They could operate the power can be canceled by pressing or windows or other controls or even pulling the switch. make the vehicle move. The Programming the Power windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed Uplevel shown, base similar Windows if caught in the path of a closing The power window controls are If the battery on the vehicle has window. Do not leave keys in a located on each of the side doors. been recharged, disconnected, vehicle with children. The driver door also has switches or replaced, windows with the express-up feature need to be When there are children in the that control the passenger and rear windows. The power windows work reprogrammed for this feature to rear seat use the window lockout work. To program the window: button to prevent unintentional with the ignition in ACC/ operation of the windows. ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when 1. Close all doors with the ignition Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is in the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/ active. See Retained Accessory RUN position, or when Retained Power (RAP) on page 9‑17. Accessory Power (RAP) is Press the switch to lower the active. See Retained Accessory window. Pull up on the front edge of Power (RAP) on page 9‑17. the switch to raise the window. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-21

2. Press and continue to hold the Window Lockout Sun Visors window switch until the window o (Window Lockout): The window is fully open. Pull the sun visor down to block lockout switch is located with the glare. Detach the sun visor from the 3. Pull up and hold the window power window switches on the center mount and slide it along the switch to close the window. driver door armrest. This feature rod from side-to-side to cover the Continue to hold it briefly after prevents the rear windows from driver or passenger side of the front the window is fully closed. being operated, except from the window. Swing the sun visor to the 4. Repeat for each window that has driver position. Press the switch to side to cover the side window. It can the express-up feature. turn the lockout feature on or off. An be moved along the rod from indicator light will come on to show side-to-side in this position also. Anti-Pinch Feature the lockout feature is on. Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror The anti-pinch feature is on windows with the express-up The vehicle has lighted visor vanity feature. If an object is in the way of mirrors on both the driver and the window as it is express-closing, passenger sun visors. Pull the sun or in certain weather conditions like visor down and lift the mirror cover severe icing, the window will stop to turn the lamps on. and open to a factory preset position. The window functions normally once the obstruction is removed. 2-22 Keys, Doors and Windows

Roof Express-open/Express-close: From the closed position, press and release the rear of the switch to Sunroof express-open the sunroof. Press The ignition must be in ON/RUN or and release the front of the switch to ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the express-close the sunroof. sunroof and power sunshade. See The front sunshade must be opened Retained Accessory Power (RAP) and closed manually. Push up on on page 9‑17 the sunshade handle to open the The vehicle may have a sunroof sunshade. over the front seats and a rear Manual Sunshades sunroof over the second row seats. Vent: From the closed position, On a vehicle with only manual The rear sunroof does not open. press and hold the front of the sunshades, press the button on the The switch to operate the front switch to vent the sunroof. Press sunshade handle to release it and sunroof is on the headliner above and hold the rear of the switch to guide it back. Pull the sunshade the rearview mirror. close the sunroof. forward until it latches to close it. Rear Power Sunshade On vehicles with a rear power sunshade, the switch is on the headliner above the rearview mirror. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-23

Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in the tracks, damage the sunroof operation and plug the water draining system.

Notice: The rear sunshade could be damaged if you attempt to open or close it manually. Do not manually open or close the rear sunshade. To open the rear sunshade, located over the second row seats, press and release the rear of the switch. Press and release the front of the switch to close the sunshade. 2-24 Keys, Doors and Windows

2 NOTES Seats and Restraints 3-1

Safety System Check ...... 3-28 Child Restraints Seats and Safety Belt Care ...... 3-28 Older Children ...... 3-44 Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System Infants and Young Parts After a Crash ...... 3-29 Children ...... 3-46 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-49 Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-50 Head Restraints Airbag System ...... 3-29 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-31 for Children (LATCH Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) ...... 3-52 Seat Adjustment ...... 3-3 Inflate? ...... 3-33 Replacing LATCH System Power Seat Adjustment ...... 3-3 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash ...... 3-58 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 3-5 Inflate? ...... 3-34 Securing Child Restraints Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-6 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat ) ...... 3-58 Heated Front Seats ...... 3-8 Restrain? ...... 3-35 Securing Child Restraints Heated and Ventilated Front What Will You See After an (Right Front Seats ...... 3-8 Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-35 Passenger Seat) ...... 3-60 Passenger Sensing Rear Seats System ...... 3-37 Rear Seats ...... 3-9 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Third Row Seats ...... 3-11 Vehicle ...... 3-41 Adding Equipment to the Safety Belts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42 Safety Belts ...... 3-14 Airbag System Check ...... 3-43 How to Wear Safety Belts Replacing Airbag System Properly ...... 3-18 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-43 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-23 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...... 3-28 Safety Belt Extender ...... 3-28 3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/ spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the 1. Pull the head restraint up to drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same raise it. To lower the head all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's restraint, press the release adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the button, located on the head chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint post on the top of the seatback, while you push the head restraint down. 2. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. Seats and Restraints 3-3

Front Seats Power Seat Adjustment Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a A. Manual Seat Adjustment Handle pedal when you do not want to. B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. Adjust the driver's seat only when Driver Seat with Power Seat the vehicle is not moving. C. See Reclining Seatbacks on Control, Power Recline, page 3‑6. and Power Lumbar shown To adjust a manual seat: A. Power Seat Adjustment Control 1. Lift the handle (A) under the seat B. Reclining Seatbacks on to unlock it. page 3‑6. 2. Slide the seat and release the C. Lumbar Adjustment on handle. page 3‑5. Try to move the seat to be sure it is On vehicles with power seats, the locked in place. controls are located on the outboard To manually raise or lower the seat, side of the seats. move the lever (B) repeatedly upward or downward. 3-4 Seats and Restraints

Move the seat forward or rearward Memory Seat and Mirrors See Power Mirrors on by sliding the power seat page 2‑16 for more information. adjustment control (A) forward or Not all mirrors will have the rearward. ability to save and recall the The vehicle may have additional mirror positions. features to adjust the power seat: 2. Press and hold button 1 until two . Raise or lower the entire seat by beeps let you know that the moving the power seat position has been stored. adjustment control (A) up A second seating and mirror or down. position can be programmed by . Raise or lower the front part of repeating the above steps and the seat cushion by moving the pressing button 2. front of the control up or down. To recall the memory positions, the . Raise or lower the rear part of On vehicles with the memory vehicle must be in P (Park). Press the seat cushion by moving the package, the controls for this and release either button 1 or rear of the control up or down. feature are located on the driver button 2 corresponding to the door panel. The controls are used to desired driving position. The seat program and recall memory settings and outside mirrors will move to the for the driver seat and outside position previously stored. You will mirrors. hear a single beep. To save positions in memory: Using the Remote Keyless 1. Adjust the driver seat, including Entry (RKE) transmitter to enter the the seatback recliner and both vehicle, with the remote recall outside mirrors to a comfortable memory feature on, causes position. automatic seat and mirror adjustment. Seats and Restraints 3-5

There is no adjustment when the Easy Exit Seat For programming information, see position has not been changed by Vehicle Personalization (With DIC The control for this feature is another seating position or the easy Buttons) on page 5 42. located on the driver door panel ‑ exit feature. See MEMORY SEAT “ between buttons 1 and 2. RECALL” under Vehicle Lumbar Adjustment Personalization (With DIC Buttons) With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit on page 5‑42 for more information. position can be recalled by pressing Manual Lumbar the exit button. You will hear a To stop recall movement of the single beep. The driver seat will memory feature at any time, press move back. one of the power seat controls, memory buttons, or power mirror If the easy exit seat feature is on in buttons. the Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will occur If something has blocked the driver when the key is removed from the seat while recalling a memory ignition. See EASY EXIT SEAT position, the driver seat recall may “ ” under Vehicle Personalization (With stop working. If this happens, press DIC Buttons) on page 5 42 for the appropriate control for the area ‑ more information. that is not recalling for two seconds, after the obstruction is removed. Further programming for the Then try recalling the memory memory seat feature can be done On vehicles with this feature, the position again by pressing the using the DIC. You can select or handle is located on the inboard appropriate memory button. If the cancel the following: side of the seatback. memory position is still not being . The automatic easy exit seat Move the handle forward or recalled, see your dealer/retailer for feature. service. rearward to increase or decrease . The remote memory seat recall lumbar support. feature. 3-6 Seats and Restraints

Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks In vehicles with seats that have manual reclining seatbacks, the On vehicles with power lumbar, the Manual Reclining Seatbacks lever used to operate them is control is located on the outboard located on the outboard side of the side of the seat. See Power “ seat. See Seat Adjustment on Lumbar under Power Seat { WARNING ” page 3 3. Adjustment on page 3 3 for more ‑ ‑ You can lose control of the information. To recline the seatback: vehicle if you try to adjust a To increase or decrease lumbar manual driver's seat while the 1. Lift the recline lever (C). support, press and hold the front or vehicle is moving. The sudden 2. Move the seatback to the rear of the control (C). movement could startle and desired position, then release Release the control when the confuse you, or make you push a the lever to lock the seatback in seatback reaches the desired level pedal when you do not want to. place. of lumbar support. Adjust the driver's seat only when 3. Push and pull on the seatback to the vehicle is not moving. make sure it is locked. To return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: { WARNING 1. Lift the lever fully without If either seatback is not locked, it applying pressure to the could move forward in a sudden seatback and the seatback will stop or crash. That could cause return to the upright position. injury to the person sitting there. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to Always push and pull on the make sure it is locked. seatbacks to be sure they are locked. Seats and Restraints 3-7

Power Reclining Seatbacks { WARNING In vehicles with seats that have power reclining seatbacks, the Sitting in a reclined position when control used to recline them is the vehicle is in motion can be located on the outboard side of the dangerous. Even when buckled seat. See Power Seat Adjustment up, the safety belts cannot do on page 3‑3 for more information. their job when reclined like this. To recline the seatback: The shoulder belt cannot do its . Tilt the top of the control (B) job because it will not be against rearward. your body. Instead, it will be in . To bring the seatback forward, front of you. In a crash, you could Do not have a seatback reclined if tilt the top of the control forward. go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. your vehicle is moving. The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash, the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly. 3-8 Seats and Restraints

Heated Front Seats I (Heated Seatback): Press to feature will turn off. To turn the turn on the heated seatback. heated seat feature back on, press the desired button. { WARNING J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on or off the heated If you cannot feel temperature seat and seatback. Heated and Ventilated change or pain to the skin, the The light on the button will come on Front Seats seat heater may cause burns to indicate that the feature is on. even at low temperatures. To Each time the button is pressed, the { WARNING reduce the risk of burns, people temperature settings change from with such a condition should use high, to medium, to low, to off. If you cannot feel temperature care when using the seat heater, Indicator lights above the button will change or pain to the skin, the especially for long periods of show the level of heat selected: seat heater may cause burns time. Do not place anything on three for high, two for medium, and even at low temperatures. To the seat that insulates against one for low. reduce the risk of burns, people heat, such as a blanket, cushion, The passenger seat may take with such a condition should use cover or similar item. This may longer to heat up. care when using the seat heater, cause the seat heater to especially for long periods of overheat. An overheated seat If the vehicle has remote vehicle time. Do not place anything on heater may cause a burn or may start and is started using the RKE the seat that insulates against damage the seat. transmitter, the front heated seats heat, such as a blanket, cushion, will be turned on to the high setting cover or similar item. This may if it is cold outside. See Remote On vehicles with heated front seats, “ cause the seat heater to the controls are located on the Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System overheat. An overheated seat center console. To operate the heater may cause a burn or may Operation on page 2‑3. When the heated seats the engine must be damage the seat. running. ignition is turned on, the heated seat Seats and Restraints 3-9

On vehicles with the heated and For either feature press the button Rear Seats ventilated seat feature, the controls once for the highest setting. With are located on the front doors near each press of the switch, the seat the door handle. changes to the next lower setting, H (Ventilated Seat): Press to and then the off setting. The lights ventilate the entire seat. indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. This symbol appears on the climate control display to indicate that the The heated and ventilated seats are feature is on. canceled after the ignition is turned off. To use the heated and ventilated z (Heated Seat and Seatback): seat feature after the vehicle is Press to heat the entire seat. started, you will need to press the This symbol appears on the climate appropriate seat button again. control display to indicate that the feature is on. A. Seat Adjustment Handle B. Reclining Seatback Strap C. Sliding Seat Lever 3-10 Seats and Restraints

Entering and Exiting the 5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) Third Row forward and move the seatback forward. The seat cushion will { WARNING fold, and the entire seat will slide forward. Using the third row seating Returning the Seat to the position while the second row is Seating Position folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden To return the second row seat to its stop or crash. Be sure to return normal seating position: the seat to the passenger seating 1. Remove objects on the floor position. Push and pull on the behind the second row seat or in seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row: the seat tracks on the floor. place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in 2. Pull the seatback rearward until front of or on the second row it is locked in place. Notice: Folding a rear seat with seat, or in the seat tracks on the the safety belts still fastened may floor. 3. Slide the seat rearward by cause damage to the seat or the pushing on the seatback until it 2. Move the front center console safety belts. Always unbuckle the is locked into place. armrest completely forward. See safety belts and return them to Center Console Storage on 4. Push down on the rear of the their normal stowed position page 4‑1. seat cushion until it is locked in before folding a rear seat. place. 3. Place folding armrests in the upright position. 5. Push and pull on the seatback and seat cushion to make sure 4. Ensure that the safety belt is they are locked in place. unfastened and in the stowed position. 6. Check that the safety belt is not under the seat cushion. Seats and Restraints 3-11

Reclining the Seatbacks To return the seatback to the Third Row Seats seating position, lift the upper corner To recline the seatback: of the seatback and push it 1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull rearward until it locks into place. { WARNING the reclining seatback strap (B). Push and pull on the seatback to Using the third row seating make sure it is locked. 2. Move the seatback to the position while the second row is desired position, then release Adjusting the Seats folded, or pushed forward in the the strap to lock the seatback in entry position, could cause injury To adjust the second row seats, pull place. in a sudden stop or crash. Be outward on the seat adjustment 3. Push and pull on the seatback to handle (A). Slide the seat forward or sure to return the seat to the make sure it is locked. rearward to the desired position. passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure Folding the Rear Seat Release the handle and push and pull on the seat to make sure it is it is locked into place. To fold the second row seats: locked. The third row seats can be folded 1. Remove anything on or under forward or removed. the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with 2. Place the armrest in the upright the safety belts still fastened may position, and unfasten the cause damage to the seat or the safety belt. safety belts. Always unbuckle the 3. Pull forward on the reclining safety belts and return them to seatback strap (B) and push their normal stowed position down on the seatback. before folding a rear seat. If the headrest touches the front To fold the seatback: seat, slide the second row seat 1. Remove anything on or under rearward. the seat. 3-12 Seats and Restraints

To return the seatback to the seating position: 1. Raise the seatback into place by using the pullstrap from the rear of the vehicle, or by pushing it into place from inside the vehicle. 2. The headrest must be locked into place before sitting in the seat.

2. Disconnect the rear safety belt 3. Pull up on the release lever { WARNING mini-latch, using a key in the slot located on the back of the seat. on the mini-buckle, let the belt The headrest moves forward If either seatback is not locked, it retract into the headliner. Stow automatically. could move forward in a sudden the mini-latch in the holder stop or crash. That could cause located in the headliner. 4. Push the seatback forward to injury to the person sitting there. lay flat. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place. Seats and Restraints 3-13

Removing the Third Row Seats 5. Remove the seat by tilting it { WARNING slightly upward, and then pulling 1. Remove the cargo management it out of the rear of the vehicle in system, if it is in the vehicle. See A safety belt that is improperly one motion. routed, not properly attached, Cargo Management System on or twisted will not provide the page 4‑3. 6. Replace the bolts in the floor holes for storage. protection needed in a crash. The 2. Remove anything on or under person wearing the belt could be the seat. Installing the Third Row Seats seriously injured. After raising the Notice: Folding a rear seat with rear seatback, always check to be 1. Before installing the seat the the safety belts still fastened may sure that the safety belts are seatback must be folded cause damage to the seat or the forward. See Folding the properly routed and attached, and “ safety belts. Always unbuckle the Seatback” earlier in this section. are not twisted. safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position The seats must be placed in the 4. Reconnect the center safety belt before folding a rear seat. proper locations to attach mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do correctly. The wider seat must not let it twist. 3. Fold the seatback down. See be installed on the driver side “Folding the Seatback” earlier in and the narrower seat on the 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure this section. passenger side. Remove the the mini-latch is secure. 4. Remove the rear bolts located bolts from the holes in the floor on the floor on each side of before installing the seats. the seat. 3-14 Seats and Restraints

2. Place the seat on the vehicle Safety Belts floor so that the front seat hooks { WARNING are on the vehicle bars. This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride 3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people seat to make sure it is locked in riding in these areas are more place. { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or 4. Raise the seatback to its upright killed. Do not allow people to ride position. Push and pull on the Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is seatback to make sure it is safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and locked into place. properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in 5. Push the headrest up into passenger(s) are not wearing your vehicle is in a seat and using position. Push and pull on the safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. headrest to make sure it is much worse. You can hit things locked into place. inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a ejected from the vehicle. You and reminder to buckle the safety belts. 6. Reconnect the center safety belt See Safety Belt Reminders on mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do your passenger(s) can be seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑15 for additional not let it twist. information. same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always In most states and in all Canadian fasten your safety belt, and check provinces, the law requires wearing that your passenger(s) are safety belts. Here is why: restrained properly too. You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. Seats and Restraints 3-15

A few crashes are mild, and some Why Safety Belts Work crashes can be so serious that even When you ride in or on anything, buckled up, a person would not you go as fast as it goes. survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels.

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. 3-16 Seats and Restraints

The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! stopped by something. In a real With safety belts, you slow down as vehicle, it could be the windshield... the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. Seats and Restraints 3-17

Questions and Answers About Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Q: If I am a good driver, and I Safety Belts should I have to wear safety never drive far from home, belts? why should I wear safety Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts? after a crash if I am wearing a A: Airbags are supplemental safety belt? systems only; so they work with A: You may be an excellent driver, safety belts — not instead of but if you are in a crash — even A: You could be whether you are — them. Whether or not an airbag one that is not your fault — you wearing a safety belt or not. But is provided, all occupants still and your passenger(s) can be your chance of being conscious have to buckle up to get the hurt. Being a good driver does during and after an accident, so most protection. That is true not not protect you from things you can unbuckle and get out, is only in frontal collisions, but beyond your control, such as much greater if you are belted. especially in side and other bad drivers. And you can unbuckle a safety collisions. belt, even if you are Most accidents occur within upside down. 40 km (25 miles) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 65 km/h (40 mph). Safety belts are for everyone. 3-18 Seats and Restraints

How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your shoulder belt should go over the passenger(s) wear a safety belt, shoulder and across the chest. Properly there is important information you These parts of the body are best This section is only for people of should know. able to take belt restraining forces. adult size. The shoulder belt locks if there is a Be aware that there are special sudden stop or crash. things to know about safety belts Q: What is wrong with this? and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 3‑44 or Infants and Young Children on page 3‑46. Follow those rules for everyone's protection. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that Sit up straight and always keep your unbelted people are hurt more often feet on the floor in front of you. The in crashes than those who are lap part of the belt should be worn wearing safety belts. low and snug on the hips, just Occupants who are not buckled up touching the thighs. In a crash, this A: The shoulder belt is too loose. can be thrown out of the vehicle in a applies force to the strong pelvic It will not give as much crash. And they can strike others in bones and you would be less likely protection this way. the vehicle who are wearing safety to slide under the lap belt. If you slid belts. under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The Seats and Restraints 3-19

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a lap belt is too loose. In a crash, crash, you would move forward you could slide under the lap belt too much, which could increase and apply force on your injury. The shoulder belt should fit abdomen. This could cause snugly against your body. serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. 3-20 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest. buckle. Seats and Restraints 3-21

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest you wear the shoulder belt under like this. The belt would be much your arm. In a crash, your body too high. In a crash, you can slide would move too far forward, under the belt. The belt force which would increase the chance would then be applied on the of head and neck injury. Also, the abdomen, not on the pelvic belt would apply too much force bones, and that could cause to the ribs, which are not as serious or fatal injuries. Be sure strong as shoulder bones. You the belt goes under the armrests. could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go over the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder and across the the shoulder at all times. chest. 3-22 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across go over the shoulder and across the body. the chest. { WARNING

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it. Seats and Restraints 3-23

Lap-Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not attached, see Third Row Seats on page 3‑11 for instruction on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the properly. the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks. get twisted. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is 4. Pull up on the latch plate to adjustable, so you can sit up The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt straight. To see how, see “Seats” you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety in the Index. quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 3‑28. belt go back slightly to unlock it. Position the release button on Then pull the belt across you the buckle so that the safety belt more slowly. could be quickly unbuckled if If the shoulder portion of a necessary. passenger belt is pulled out all 5. If equipped with a shoulder belt the way, the child restraint height adjuster, move it to the locking feature may be engaged. height that is right for you. See If this happens, let the belt go “Shoulder Belt Height back all the way and start again. 3-24 Seats and Restraints

Adjustment” later in this section Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster for instructions on use and The vehicle has a shoulder belt important safety information. height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder. Improper shoulder belt To unlatch the belt, push the button height adjustment could reduce the on the buckle. The belt should effectiveness of the safety belt in a return to its stowed position. Slide crash. the latch plate up the safety belt 6. To make the lap part tight, pull webbing when the safety belt is not up on the shoulder belt. in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, It may be necessary to pull the near the guide loop on the side wall. stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully Before a door is closed, be sure the tighten the lap belt on smaller safety belt is out of the way. If a occupants. door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle. Seats and Restraints 3-25

Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort This vehicle has safety belt Guides pretensioners for the front outboard This vehicle may have rear shoulder occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort guides. If not, they are pretensioners cannot be seen, they available through your dealer/ are part of the safety belt assembly. retailer. The guides may provide They can help tighten the safety added safety belt comfort for older belts during the early stages of a children who have outgrown booster moderate to severe frontal, near seats and for some adults. When frontal, or rear crash if the threshold installed and properly adjusted, the conditions for pretensioner comfort guide positions the shoulder activation are met. And, for vehicles belt away from the neck and head. To move it down, push down on the with side impact airbags, safety belt button (A) and move the height pretensioners can help tighten the adjuster to the desired position. You safety belts in a side crash or a can move the height adjuster up by rollover event. pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, After the adjuster is set to the they will need to be replaced, and desired position, try to move it down probably other new parts for the without pushing the button to make vehicle's safety belt system. See sure it has locked into position. Replacing Safety Belt System Parts After a Crash on page 3‑29. 3-26 Seats and Restraints

Here is how to install a comfort comfort guide, you will first need guide to the safety belt: to move the headrest forward by pulling on the handle behind the seatback. The comfort guide will now be accessible.

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the Outboard Positions belt into the slots of the guide. 1. For the outboard positions, remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body. Third Row Center Position For the third row center position, Pull the comfort guide out of its locate the comfort guide which is storage location and then return located in a storage pocket, at the headrest to its upright the top of the seat, under the position. headrest on the driver's side of the vehicle. To access the Seats and Restraints 3-27

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release the twisted and it lies flat. The safety belt as described elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make belt and the guide on top. sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage location or on its storage clip. 3-28 Seats and Restraints

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check to protect the mother. When a safety Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts, including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors and occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are working properly. be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer/ retailer to have it repaired. Torn or If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten frayed safety belts may not protect around you, you should use it. you in a crash. They can rip apart But if a safety belt is not long under impact forces. If a belt is torn enough, your dealer/retailer will or frayed, get a new one right away. order you an extender. When you Make sure the safety belt reminder go in to order it, take the heaviest light is working. See Safety Belt coat you will wear, so the extender Reminders on page 5‑15 for more will be long enough for you. To help information. avoid personal injury, do not let Keep safety belts clean and dry. someone else use it, and use it only See Safety Belt Care on for the seat it is made to fit. The A pregnant woman should wear a page 3‑28. lap-shoulder belt, and the lap extender has been designed for portion should be worn as low as adults. Never use it for securing Safety Belt Care possible, below the rounding, child seats. To wear it, attach it to throughout the pregnancy. the regular safety belt. For more Keep belts clean and dry. information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. Seats and Restraints 3-29

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) Airbag System The vehicle has the following Do not bleach or dye safety belts. properly after a crash, have them airbags: It may severely weaken them. In inspected and any necessary a crash, they might not be able to replacements made as soon as . A frontal airbag for the driver. provide adequate protection. possible. . A frontal airbag for the right front Clean safety belts only with mild passenger. After a minor crash, replacement of soap and lukewarm water. . A seat-mounted side impact safety belts may not be necessary. airbag for the driver. Replacing Safety Belt But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may . A seat-mounted side impact System Parts After a have been stressed or damaged. airbag for the right front Crash See your dealer/retailer to have the passenger. safety belt assemblies inspected or . A roof-rail airbag for the driver, { WARNING replaced. passenger seated directly New parts and repairs may be behind the driver, and the third A crash can damage the safety necessary even if the safety belt row outboard passenger belt system in the vehicle. system was not being used at the position. A damaged safety belt system time of the crash. . A roof-rail airbag for the right may not properly protect the Have the safety belt pretensioners front passenger, passenger person using it, resulting in checked if the vehicle has been in a seated directly behind the right serious injury or even death in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light front passenger, and the third crash. To help make sure the stays on after you start the vehicle row outboard passenger safety belt systems are working or while you are driving. See Airbag position. (Continued) Readiness Light on page 5‑15. 3-30 Seats and Restraints

All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things have the word AIRBAG embossed to know about the airbag system: { WARNING in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening. Airbags inflate with great force, { WARNING faster than the blink of an eye. For frontal airbags, the word Anyone who is up against, or very AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not close to, any airbag when it part of the steering wheel for the inflates can be seriously injured wearing your safety belt — even if driver and on the instrument panel or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for the right front passenger. you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety close to the airbag, as you would With seat-mounted side impact belts, but do not replace them. be if you were sitting on the edge airbags, the word AIRBAG will Also, airbags are not designed to of your seat or leaning forward. appear on the side of the seatback Safety belts help keep you in closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only position before and during a With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑33. headliner or trim. should sit as far back as possible Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance the protection provided by safety the vehicle. of hitting things inside the vehicle belts. Even though today's airbags or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on or are also designed to help reduce sleep against the door or side are “supplemental restraints” to the risk of injury from the force of an windows in seating positions with inflating bag, all airbags must inflate the safety belts. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags very quickly to do their job. and/or roof-rail airbags. properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Seats and Restraints 3-31

Where Are the Airbags? { WARNING

Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel cluster, for adults and older children, but which shows the airbag symbol. not for young children and infants. The system checks the airbag Neither the vehicle's safety belt electrical system for malfunctions. system nor its airbag system is The light tells you if there is an designed for them. Young electrical problem. See Airbag children and infants need the Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for protection that a child restraint more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the system can provide. Always middle of the steering wheel. secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 3‑44 or Infants and Young Children on page 3‑46. 3-32 Seats and Restraints

The right front passenger frontal Driver Side shown, Passenger Driver Side shown, Passenger airbag is in the instrument panel on Side similar Side similar the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbags for the driver and right front right front passenger, passengers passenger are in the side of the behind the driver and right front seatbacks closest to the door. passenger, and the third row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. Seats and Restraints 3-33

When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at { WARNING different crash speeds. For Inflate? example: If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to occupant and an airbag, the . If the vehicle hits a stationary inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate airbag might not inflate properly or near-frontal crashes to help or it might force the object into at a different crash speed than if reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object. that person causing severe injury injuries mainly to the driver's or right or even death. The path of an front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that inflating airbag must be kept However, they are only designed to deforms, the airbags could clear. Do not put anything inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed between an occupant and an predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform. anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed the occupants. Do not use seat accessories that than if the vehicle hits a wide block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or object (like a wall). seat-mounted side impact airbag. should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could Never secure anything to the roof It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight by routing a rope or tie down quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object. through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an Thresholds can also vary with inflating roof-rail airbag will be specific vehicle design. blocked. 3-34 Seats and Restraints

Frontal airbags are not intended to impact and roof-rail airbags will frontal airbags, inflation is inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear inflate if the crash severity is above determined by what the vehicle hits, impacts, or in many side impacts. the system's designed threshold the angle of the impact, and how In addition, the vehicle has level. The threshold level can vary quickly the vehicle slows down. For dual-stage frontal airbags. with specific vehicle design. seat-mounted side impact and Dual-stage airbags adjust the Seat-mounted side impact airbags roof-rail airbags, deployment is restraint according to crash severity. are not intended to inflate in frontal determined by the location and The vehicle has electronic frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, severity of the side impact. In a sensors, which help the sensing rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail rollover event, roof-rail airbag system distinguish between a airbags are not intended to inflate in deployment is determined by the moderate frontal impact and a more rear impacts. A seat-mounted side direction of the roll. severe frontal impact. For moderate impact airbag is intended to deploy frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags on the side of the vehicle that is What Makes an Airbag inflate at a level less than full struck. Both roof-rail airbags will Inflate? deployment. For more severe frontal deploy when either side of the In a deployment event, the sensing impacts, full deployment occurs. vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system sends an electrical signal system predicts that the vehicle is The vehicle has seat-mounted side triggering a release of gas from the about to roll over, or in a severe impact and roof-rail airbags. See inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the frontal impact. Airbag System on page 3‑29. airbag causing the bag to break out Seat-mounted side impact and In any particular crash, no one can of the cover and deploy. The inflator, roof-rail airbags are intended to say whether an airbag should have the airbag, and related hardware are inflate in moderate to severe side inflated simply because of the all part of the airbag module. crashes. In addition, these roof-rail damage to a vehicle or because of airbags are intended to inflate what the repair costs were. For during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted side Seats and Restraints 3-35

Frontal airbag modules are located Seat-mounted side impact and What Will You See After inside the steering wheel and roof-rail airbags distribute the force instrument panel. For vehicles with of the impact more evenly over the an Airbag Inflates? seat-mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body. After the frontal airbags and there are airbag modules in the side Rollover capable roof-rail airbags seat-mounted side impact airbags of the front seatbacks closest to the are designed to help contain the inflate, they quickly deflate, so door. For vehicles with roof-rail head and chest of occupants in the quickly that some people may not airbags, there are airbag modules in outboard seating positions in the even realize an airbag inflated. the ceiling of the vehicle, near the first and second rows. The rollover Roof-rail airbags may still be at least side windows that have occupant capable roof-rail airbags are partially inflated for some time after seating positions. designed to help reduce the risk of they deploy. Some components of full or partial ejection in rollover the airbag module may be hot for How Does an Airbag events, although no system can several minutes. For location of the Restrain? prevent all such ejections. airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑34. In moderate to severe frontal or But airbags would not help in many The parts of the airbag that come near frontal collisions, even belted types of collisions, primarily into contact with you may be warm, occupants can contact the steering because the occupant's motion is but not too hot to touch. There may wheel or the instrument panel. In not toward those airbags. See When be some smoke and dust coming moderate to severe side collisions, Should an Airbag Inflate? on from the vents in the deflated even belted occupants can contact page 3‑33 for more information. airbags. Airbag inflation does not the inside of the vehicle. Airbags should never be regarded prevent the driver from seeing out of Airbags supplement the protection as anything more than a supplement the windshield or being able to steer provided by safety belts. Frontal to safety belts. the vehicle, nor does it prevent airbags distribute the force of the people from leaving the vehicle. impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. 3-36 Seats and Restraints

You can lock the doors, turn off the In many crashes severe enough to { WARNING interior lamps and hazard warning inflate the airbag, windshields are flashers by using the controls for broken by vehicle deformation. When an airbag inflates, there those features. Additional windshield breakage may may be dust in the air. This dust also occur from the right front could cause breathing problems { WARNING passenger airbag. for people with a history of . Airbags are designed to inflate asthma or other breathing trouble. A crash severe enough to inflate To avoid this, everyone in the only once. After an airbag the airbags may have also inflates, you will need some new vehicle should get out as soon as damaged important functions in parts for the airbag system. it is safe to do so. If you have the vehicle, such as the fuel If you do not get them, the breathing problems but cannot system, brake and steering airbag system will not be there get out of the vehicle after an systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to help protect you in another airbag inflates, then get fresh air appears to be drivable after a crash. A new system will include by opening a window or a door. moderate crash, there may be airbag modules and possibly If you experience breathing concealed damage that could other parts. The service manual problems following an airbag make it difficult to safely operate for your vehicle covers the need deployment, you should seek the vehicle. to replace other parts. medical attention. Use caution if you should attempt The vehicle has a feature that may to restart the engine after a crash automatically unlock the doors, turn has occurred. on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate. Seats and Restraints 3-37

. The vehicle has a crash sensing Passenger Sensing using remote start, if equipped, to and diagnostic module which start the vehicle from a distance, records information after a System you may not see the system check. crash. See Vehicle Data The vehicle has a passenger When the system check is Recording and Privacy on sensing system for the right front complete, either the word ON or page 13‑14 and Event Data passenger position. The passenger OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will Recorders on page 13‑15. airbag status indicator will be visible be visible. See Passenger Airbag . Let only qualified technicians on the instrument panel when the Status Indicator on page 5‑16. work on the airbag systems. vehicle is started. The passenger sensing system Improper service can mean that turns off the right front passenger an airbag system will not work frontal airbag under certain properly. See your dealer/retailer conditions. The driver airbag, for service. seat-mounted side impact airbags and the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing United States system. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag Canada should be enabled (may inflate) The words ON and OFF, or the or not. symbol for on and off, are visible during the system check. If you are 3-38 Seats and Restraints

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly { WARNING WARNING (Continued) secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints and size. restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a We recommend that children be passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in secured in a rear seat, including: an because the back of the the right front seat, always move infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far rear-facing child restraint; a child be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to riding in a forward-facing child seat; airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large child restraint can be seriously rear seat. enough, using safety belts. injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the The passenger sensing system is A label on the sun visor says, passenger seat is in a forward designed to turn off the right front “Never put a rear-facing child seat in position. passenger frontal airbag if: the front. This is because the risk to ” . The right front passenger seat is the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing unoccupied. if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no . The system determines that an system is fail-safe. No one can infant is present in a child guarantee that an airbag will not restraint. deploy under some unusual . A right front passenger takes circumstance, even though the his/her weight off of the seat for airbag is turned off. a period of time. (Continued) . Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. Seats and Restraints 3-39

When the passenger sensing For some children, including If the On Indicator is Lit for a system has turned off the right front children in child restraints, and for Child Restraint passenger frontal airbag, the off very small adults, the passenger indicator will light and stay lit to sensing system may or may not turn If a child restraint has been installed remind you that the airbag is off. off the right front passenger frontal and the on indicator is lit: See Passenger Airbag Status airbag, depending upon the 1. Turn the vehicle off. Indicator on page 5 16. person s seating posture and body ‑ ’ 2. Remove the child restraint from build. Everyone in the vehicle The passenger sensing system is the vehicle. designed to turn on (may inflate) the who has outgrown child restraints 3. Remove any additional items right front passenger frontal airbag should wear a safety belt from the seat such as blankets, anytime the system senses that a properly — whether or not there is cushions, seat covers, seat person of adult size is sitting an airbag for that person. heaters, or seat massagers. properly in the right front passenger seat. { WARNING 4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided When the passenger sensing If the airbag readiness light ever by the child restraint system has allowed the airbag to be comes on and stays on, it means manufacturer and refer to enabled, the on indicator will light that something may be wrong Securing Child Restraints (Rear and stay lit to remind you that the with the airbag system. To help Seat ) on page 3 58 or airbag is active. ‑ avoid injury to yourself or others, Securing Child Restraints (Right have the vehicle serviced right Front Passenger Seat) on away. See Airbag Readiness page 3‑60. Light on page 5‑15 for more 5. If, after reinstalling the child information, including important restraint and restarting the safety information. vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly 3-40 Seats and Restraints

recline the vehicle seatback and If the Off Indicator is Lit for an system to detect that person and adjust the seat cushion, Adult-Size Occupant enable the right front passenger if adjustable, to make sure that frontal airbag: the vehicle seatback is not 1. Turn the vehicle off. pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion. 2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, Also make sure the child cushions, seat covers, seat restraint is not trapped under the heaters, or seat massagers. vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head 3. Place the seatback in the fully restraint. See Head Restraints upright position. on page 3‑2. 4. Have the person sit upright in 6. Restart the vehicle. the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably The passenger sensing system extended. may or may not turn off the If a person of adult-size is sitting in airbag for a child in a child the right front passenger seat, but 5. Restart the vehicle and have the restraint depending upon the the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for child’s seating posture and body because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the on build. It is better to secure the properly in the seat. If this happens, indicator is lit. child restraint in a rear seat. use the following steps to allow the Seats and Restraints 3-41

Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the The on indicator may be lit if an System Operation performance of the passenger object, such as a briefcase, sensing system. Here is how: handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Safety belts help keep the other electronic device, is put on an . The passenger sensing system passenger in position on the seat unoccupied seat. If this is not during vehicle maneuvers and may turn off the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into desired remove the object from braking, which helps the passenger the seat. sensing system maintain the the seat. If this happens, the off passenger airbag status. See indicator will be lit, and the { “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” airbag readiness light on the WARNING in the Index for additional instrument panel will also be lit. Stowing of articles under the information about the importance of . Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and A thick layer of additional material, more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system will enable (turn proper operation of the passenger on) the passenger airbag while a or aftermarket equipment such as sensing system. seat covers, seat heaters, and seat child restraint or child occupant massagers can affect how well the is on the seat. If the passenger Servicing the passenger sensing system airbag is turned on, the on operates. We recommend that you indicator will be lit. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle not use seat covers or other If the passenger seat gets wet, dry Airbags affect how the vehicle aftermarket equipment except when the seat immediately. If the airbag should be serviced. There are parts approved by GM for your specific readiness light is lit, do not install a of the airbag system in several vehicle. See Adding Equipment to child restraint or allow anyone to places around the vehicle. the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on occupy the seat. See Airbag page 3‑42 for more information Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for about modifications that can affect important safety information. how the system operates. 3-42 Seats and Restraints

Your dealer/retailer and the service Adding Equipment to the that are part of the passenger manual have information about seat. The passenger sensing servicing the vehicle and the airbag Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system may not operate properly system. To purchase a service Q: Is there anything I might add if the original seat trim is manual, see Service Publications to or change about the vehicle replaced with non-GM covers, Ordering Information on page 13‑11. that could keep the airbags upholstery or trim, or with GM from working properly? covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle. { WARNING A: Yes. If you add things that Any object, such as an change the vehicle's frame, aftermarket seat heater or a For up to 10 seconds after the bumper system, height, front end comfort enhancing pad or ignition is turned off and the or side sheet metal, they may device, installed under or on top battery is disconnected, an airbag keep the airbag system from of the seat fabric, could also can still inflate during improper working properly. Changing or interfere with the operation of service. You can be injured if you moving any parts of the front the passenger sensing system. are close to an airbag when it seats, safety belts, the airbag This could either prevent proper inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. sensing and diagnostic module, deployment of the passenger They are probably part of the steering wheel, instrument airbag(s) or prevent the airbag system. Be sure to follow panel, roof-rail airbag modules, passenger sensing system from ceiling headliner or pillar garnish proper service procedures, and properly turning off the trim, overhead console, front make sure the person performing passenger airbag(s). See sensors, side impact sensors, work for you is qualified to do so. Passenger Sensing System on rollover sensor module, or airbag page 3 37. wiring can affect the operation of ‑ the airbag system. If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. The In addition, the vehicle has a phone numbers and addresses passenger sensing system for for Customer Assistance are in the right front passenger position, which includes sensors Seats and Restraints 3-43

Step Two of the Customer Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. The airbag system does not need Parts After a Crash regularly scheduled maintenance or If the vehicle has rollover replacement. Make sure the airbag { WARNING roof-rail airbags, see Different readiness light is working. See Size Tires and Wheels on Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag page 10 53 for additional ‑ page 5 15 for more information. systems in your vehicle. important information. ‑ Notice: If an airbag covering is A damaged airbag system may Q: Because I have a disability, damaged, opened, or broken, the not work properly and may not I have to get my vehicle airbag may not work properly. Do protect you and your modified. How can I find out not open or break the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting whether this will affect my coverings. If there are any in serious injury or even death. To airbag system? opened or broken airbag covers, help make sure your airbag A: If you have questions, call have the airbag covering and/or systems are working properly Customer Assistance. The airbag module replaced. For the after a crash, have them phone numbers and addresses location of the airbag modules, inspected and any necessary for Customer Assistance are in see What Makes an Airbag replacements made as soon as Step Two of the Customer Inflate? on page 3‑34. See your possible. Satisfaction Procedure in this dealer/retailer for service. manual. If an airbag inflates, you will need to In addition, your dealer/retailer and replace airbag system parts. See the service manual have information your dealer/retailer for service. about the location of the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring. 3-44 Seats and Restraints

If the airbag readiness light stays on Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that after the vehicle is started or comes come with the booster seat, state on when you are driving, the airbag the weight and height limitations for system may not work properly. Have Older Children that booster. Use a booster seat the vehicle serviced right away. See with a lap-shoulder belt until the Airbag Readiness Light on child passes the below fit test: page 5 15 for more information. ‑ . Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” Older children who have outgrown under Lap-Shoulder Belt on booster seats should wear the page 3‑23 for more information. vehicle's safety belts. If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat. . Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. Seats and Restraints 3-45

. Can proper safety belt fit be According to accident statistics, maintained for the length of the children and infants are safer when trip? If yes, continue. If no, properly restrained in a child return to the booster seat. restraint system or infant restraint Q: What is the proper way to system secured in a rear seating wear safety belts? position. A: An older child should wear a In a crash, children who are not lap-shoulder belt and get the buckled up can strike other people additional restraint a shoulder who are buckled up, or can be belt can provide. The shoulder thrown out of the vehicle. Older belt should not cross the face or children need to use safety belts neck. The lap belt should fit properly. snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. { WARNING This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. Never do this. It should never be worn over the Never allow two children to wear abdomen, which could cause the same safety belt. The safety severe or even fatal internal belt can not properly spread the injuries in a crash. impact forces. In a crash, the two Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort children can be crushed together Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on and seriously injured. A safety page 3‑23. belt must be used by only one person at a time. 3-46 Seats and Restraints

{ WARNING { WARNING

Never do this. Children can be seriously injured Never allow a child to wear the or strangled if a shoulder belt is safety belt with the shoulder belt wrapped around their neck and behind their back. A child can be the safety belt continues to seriously injured by not wearing tighten. Never leave children the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a unattended in a vehicle and never crash, the child would not be allow children to play with the restrained by the shoulder belt. safety belts. The child could move too far Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer forward increasing the chance of Infants and Young protection for adults and older head and neck injury. The child Children children, but not for young children might also slide under the lap and infants. Neither the vehicle's belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs safety belt system nor its airbag applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and system is designed for them. Every That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the time infants and young children ride injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and in vehicles, they should have the go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the protection provided by appropriate the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety child restraints. restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained every Canadian province says properly can strike other people, children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle. restrained while in a vehicle. Seats and Restraints 3-47

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never do this. child restraint in a rear seat. If you Never hold an infant or a child must secure a forward-facing while riding in a vehicle. Due to child restraint in the right front crash forces, an infant or a child seat, always move the front will become so heavy it is not passenger seat as far back as it possible to hold it during a crash. will go. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's { WARNING arms. An infant should be secured in an appropriate Never do this. restraint. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing (Continued) 3-48 Seats and Restraints

Q: What are the different types of The restraint manufacturer's add-on child restraints? instructions that come with the { WARNING A: Add-on child restraints, which restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still are purchased by the vehicle's so small that the vehicle's regular owner, are available in four basic child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on types. Selection of a particular the hip bones, as it should. restraint should take into available for children with special needs. Instead, it may settle up around consideration not only the child's the child's abdomen. In a crash, weight, height, and age but also the belt would apply force on a whether or not the restraint will { WARNING body area that is unprotected by be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal For most basic types of child need complete support. This is injuries. To reduce the risk of restraints, there are many because an infant's neck is not serious or fatal injuries during a different models available. When crash, young children should purchasing a child restraint, be fully developed and its head always be secured in appropriate sure it is designed to be used in weighs so much compared with a motor vehicle. If it is, the the rest of its body. In a crash, an child restraints. restraint will have a label saying infant in a rear-facing child that it meets federal motor restraint settles into the restraint, vehicle safety standards. so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant's body, the back and shoulders. Infants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints. Seats and Restraints 3-49

Child Restraint Systems

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats (A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system. provides restraint with the seating A booster seat can also help a child surface against the back of the to see out the window. infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. 3-50 Seats and Restraints

Securing an Add-On Child endangered in a crash if the child Securing the Child Within the Restraint in the Vehicle restraint is not properly secured in Child Restraint the vehicle. { WARNING When securing an add-on child { WARNING restraint, refer to the instructions A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a killed in a crash if the child is not restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual. properly secured in the child the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are restraint. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not properly following the instructions using the vehicle's safety belt or available, obtain a replacement that came with that child restraint. LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer. instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured Where to Put the child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a Restraint in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to According to accident statistics, To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in children and infants are safer when the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is properly restrained in a child in the vehicle. Child restraint in it. restraint system or infant restraint systems must be secured in vehicle system secured in a rear seating seats by lap belts or the lap belt position. portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by We recommend that children and the LATCH system. See Lower child restraints be secured in a rear Anchors and Tethers for Children seat, including: an infant or a child (LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for riding in a rear-facing child restraint; more information. Children can be a child riding in a forward-facing Seats and Restraints 3-51 child seat; an older child riding in a When securing a child restraint in a booster seat; and children, who are WARNING (Continued) rear seating position, study the large enough, using safety belts. instructions that came with the child Even if the passenger sensing A label on the sun visor says, restraint to make sure it is system has turned off the right compatible with this vehicle. “Never put a rear-facing child front passenger frontal airbag, no restraint in the front.” This is system is fail-safe. No one can Wherever a child restraint is because the risk to the rear-facing guarantee that an airbag will not installed, be sure to secure the child child is so great, if the airbag deploy under some unusual restraint properly. deploys. circumstance, even though it is Keep in mind that an unsecured turned off. child restraint can move around in a { WARNING collision or sudden stop and injure Secure rear-facing child restraints people in the vehicle. Be sure to A child in a rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the airbag properly secure any child restraint in restraint can be seriously injured is off. If you secure a the vehicle — even when no child is or killed if the right front forward-facing child restraint in in it. passenger airbag inflates. This is the right front seat, always move because the back of the the front passenger seat as far rear-facing child restraint would back as it will go. It is better to be very close to the inflating secure the child restraint in a airbag. A child in a forward-facing rear seat. child restraint can be seriously See Passenger Sensing System injured or killed if the right front on page 3‑37 for additional passenger airbag inflates and the information. passenger seat is in a forward position. (Continued) 3-52 Seats and Restraints

Lower Anchors and In order to use the LATCH system in seating position that will your vehicle, you need a child accommodate a child restraint with Tethers for Children restraint that has LATCH lower attachments (B). (LATCH System) attachments. The child restraint Top Tether Anchor The LATCH system holds a child manufacturer will provide you with restraint during driving or in a crash. instructions on how to use the child This system is designed to make restraint and its attachments. The installation of a child restraint easier. following explains how to attach a The LATCH system uses anchors in child restraint with these the vehicle and attachments on the attachments in your vehicle. child restraint that are made for use Not all vehicle seating positions or with the LATCH system. child restraints have lower anchors Make sure that a LATCH-compatible and attachments or top tether child restraint is properly installed anchors and attachments. using the anchors, or use the Lower Anchors vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and A top tether (A, C) anchors the also the instructions in this manual. top of the child restraint to the When installing a child restraint with vehicle. A top tether anchor is built a top tether, you must also use into the vehicle. The top tether either the lower anchors or the attachment (B) on the child restraint safety belts to properly secure the connects to the top tether anchor in Lower anchors (A) are metal bars child restraint. A child restraint must the vehicle in order to reduce the never be attached using only the top built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH forward movement and rotation of tether and anchor. the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Seats and Restraints 3-53

Your child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Anchor Locations Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be Second Row — 60/40 Bench attached. Be sure to read and follow i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating the instructions for your child Second Row Bucket positions with top tether anchors. restraint. — i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating j (Lower Anchor): Seating If the child restraint does not have a positions with top tether anchors. positions with two lower anchors. top tether, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. j (Lower Anchor): Seating Ask the child restraint manufacturer positions with two lower anchors. whether or not a kit is available. 3-54 Seats and Restraints

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each second row anchor position has a label, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

Third Row Second Row — Bucket Shown, i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating Bench Similar positions with top tether anchors. The top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seatback for each seating position in the To assist you in locating the top second row. Open the cover to tether anchors, the top tether anchor access the anchors. Be sure to use symbol is located on the cover or an anchor located on the same side near the anchor. of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. Seats and Restraints 3-55

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are { WARNING restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Do not attach more than one child Restraint on page 3‑50 for restraint to a single anchor. additional information. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could Securing a Child Restraint cause the anchor or attachment Designed for the LATCH to come loose or even break System during a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the { WARNING risk of serious or fatal injuries Third Row Seat during a crash, attach only one If a LATCH-type child restraint is child restraint per anchor. The third row has one top tether not attached to anchors, the child anchor located at the bottom rear of restraint will not be able to protect the center seatback. This anchor the child correctly. In a crash, the should be used for the center child could be seriously injured or seating position only. Never install killed. Install a LATCH-type child two top tethers using the same top restraint properly using the tether anchor. anchors, or use the vehicle's Do not secure a child restraint in a safety belts to secure the position without a top tether anchor restraint, following the instructions if a national or local law requires that came with the child restraint that the top tether be attached, or if and the instructions in this the instructions that come with the manual. child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. 3-56 Seats and Restraints

Do not fold the empty rear seat restraint on the seat. Make { WARNING with a safety belt buckled. This sure the third row bench could damage the safety belt or seatbacks are both upright Children can be seriously injured the seat. Unbuckle and return the before placing the child or strangled if a shoulder belt is safety belt to its stowed position, restraint on the seat. wrapped around their neck and before folding the seat. the safety belt continues to 1.3. Put the child restraint on tighten. Buckle any unused safety 1. Attach and tighten the lower the seat. belts behind the child restraint so attachments to the lower 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower anchors. If the child restraint children cannot reach them. Pull attachments on the child does not have lower the shoulder belt all the way out restraint to the lower attachments or the desired anchors. of the retractor to set the lock, seating position does not have if your vehicle has one, after the lower anchors, secure the child 2. If the child restraint manufacturer child restraint has been installed. restraint with the top tether and recommends that the top tether the safety belts. Refer to your be attached, attach and tighten Notice: Do not let the LATCH child restraint manufacturer the top tether to the top tether attachments rub against the instructions and the instructions anchor, if the vehicle has one. vehicle’s safety belts. This may in this manual. Refer to the child restraint damage these parts. If necessary, instructions and the following move buckled safety belts to 1.1. Find the lower anchors for steps: avoid rubbing the LATCH the desired seating attachments. position. 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. 1.2. Recline the seatback to the 2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip full reclined position. open the cover to expose the anchor. Make sure the second row bench seatbacks are aligned at the same angle before placing the child Seats and Restraints 3-57

2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:

If the position you are using If the position you are using does not have a headrest has a fixed headrest or or head restraint and you head restraint and you are are using a dual tether, using a dual tether, route route the tether over the the tether around the seatback. headrest or head restraint. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. 3-58 Seats and Restraints

Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat ) When securing a child restraint in a { WARNING rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child A crash can damage the LATCH restraint to make sure it is system in the vehicle. A damaged compatible with this vehicle. LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, If the child restraint has the LATCH resulting in serious injury or even system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH death in a crash. To help make System) on page 3 52 for how and sure the LATCH system is ‑ If the position you are using where to install the child restraint has a fixed headrest or working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If a child restraint is head restraint and you are see your dealer/retailer to have secured in the vehicle using a using a single tether, route the system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether, the tether over the headrest necessary replacements made as see Lower Anchors and Tethers for or head restraint. soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on 3. Push and pull the child restraint page 3‑52 for top tether anchor If the vehicle has the LATCH system in different directions to be sure locations. and it was being used during a it is secure. crash, new LATCH system parts Do not secure a child seat in a may be needed. position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires New parts and repairs may be that the top tether be anchored, or if necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the system was not being used at the child restraint say that the top strap time of the crash. must be anchored. Seats and Restraints 3-59

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt If more than one child restraint buckle until it clicks. all the way out of the retractor to needs to be installed in the rear set the lock. seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on the Restraint on page 3‑50. the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if 1. Put the child restraint on necessary. the seat. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 3-60 Seats and Restraints

6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions (Right Front regarding the use of the top Passenger Seat) tether. See Lower Anchors and The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat Tethers for Children (LATCH is a safer place to secure a System) on page 3‑52 for more forward-facing child restraint. See information. Where to Put the Restraint on 7. Push and pull the child restraint page 3‑50. in different directions to be sure In addition, the vehicle has a it is secure. passenger sensing system which is To remove the child restraint, designed to turn off the right front 5. To tighten the belt, push down unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and passenger frontal airbag under on the child restraint, pull the let it return to the stowed position. certain conditions. See Passenger shoulder portion of the belt to If the top tether is attached to a top Sensing System on page 3 37 and tighten the lap portion of the belt ‑ tether anchor, disconnect it. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator and feed the shoulder belt back on page 5 16 for more information, into the retractor. When installing ‑ including important safety a forward-facing child restraint, it information. may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child A label on the sun visor says, restraint as you tighten the belt. “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. Seats and Restraints 3-61

Do not secure a child seat in a { WARNING WARNING (Continued) position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag the instructions that come with the or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a child restraint say that the top strap passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in must be anchored. because the back of the the right front seat, always move rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to a top tether, and that the tether be airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a attached. child restraint can be seriously rear seat. You will be using the lap-shoulder injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System passenger airbag inflates and the belt to secure the child restraint in on page 3‑37 for additional this position. Follow the instructions passenger seat is in a forward information. position. that came with the child restraint. Even if the passenger sensing If the child restraint has the LATCH 1. Move the seat as far back as it system has turned off the right system, see Lower Anchors and will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. front passenger frontal airbag, no Tethers for Children (LATCH system is fail-safe. No one can System) on page 3‑52 for how and When the passenger sensing guarantee that an airbag will not where to install the child restraint system has turned off the right deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint is front passenger frontal airbag, secured using a safety belt and it circumstance, even though it is the off indicator on the uses a top tether, see Lower turned off. passenger airbag status Anchors and Tethers for Children indicator should light and stay lit (Continued) (LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for when the vehicle is started. See top tether anchor locations. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5‑16. 3-62 Seats and Restraints

2. Put the child restraint on Position the release button on the seat. the buckle so that the safety belt 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run could be quickly unbuckled if the lap and shoulder portions of necessary. the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt into the retractor. When installing all the way out of the retractor to a forward-facing child restraint, it set the lock. may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Seats and Restraints 3-63

If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on page 3‑37 for more information. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. 3-64 Seats and Restraints

2 NOTES Storage 4-1

Storage There may be cupholders located at Storage the rear of the center console. To Compartments access, pull the handle down. Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage Armrest Storage Glove Box ...... 4-1 This vehicle has an instrument Vehicles with a rear seat armrest, Cupholders ...... 4-1 panel storage area located above have two cupholders. Pull the Armrest Storage ...... 4-1 the radio. To open the cover, press armrest down from the rear Center Console Storage ...... 4-1 the button. seatback to access the cupholders. Floor Console Storage ...... 4-2 Additional Storage Features Glove Box Center Console Storage Cargo Cover ...... 4-3 Lift the glove box handle up to open Cargo Tie Downs ...... 4-3 it. Use the key to lock and unlock Cargo Management the glove box. System ...... 4-3 Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Cupholders Roof Rack System There are two cupholders, with Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 removable liners, located in front of the center console. There may be cupholders located in the second row seat armrest. To access, pull the armrest down. There are additional cupholders located on each side of the third row seat and Pull up on the lever, located on the in each door. front of the center console armrest, to slide it forward and backward. 4-2 Storage

To open the armrest storage area, press the button located on the front { WARNING of the armrest. There is additional storage under the armrest. Move the Never open more than one of the armrest all the way to the rear three latches at a time to help position, slide the cover back and avoid personal injury and damage remove the tray. to the console. Floor Console Storage Notice: Slide the front console as far forward as it will go before folding the second row console forward to help prevent damage to the consoles. To access the upper storage area, press the upper button (B) and lift up. To access the lower storage area, press the lower button (C) and lift up. The top of the console can be folded forward for increased storage area. Lift up on handle on the rear of the console (A) and pull forward.

For vehicles with a second row center console, open each area to access the storage compartment inside. Storage 4-3

Additional Storage WARNING (Continued) Features thrown about the vehicle during a Cargo Cover collision or sudden maneuver. Someone could be injured. Be For vehicles with a cargo cover, it sure to return the cover to the can be used to cover items in the closed position and latch before rear of the vehicle. To install the driving. If the cover is removed, cover, place the loops on each always store it outside of the corner of the cover on the four vehicle. When it is replaced, hooks in the rear of the vehicle. The always be sure that it is securely cover should be stored securely reattached. when not in use. To remove the cargo management cover: 3. Remove the cover from the Cargo Tie Downs 1. Open the cover. It remains open vehicle and store outside of the when lifted. Four cargo tie-downs are located in vehicle. the rear compartment of the vehicle. 2. Pull the cover up making sure to The tie-downs can be used to unhook the hinges at the rear of Convenience Net the cover. secure small loads. For vehicles with a convenience net in the rear, use it to store small Cargo Management { WARNING loads as far forward as possible. System The net should not be used to store An improperly latched and closed heavy loads. This vehicle has a cargo cargo cover, or cargo cover left in management center located in the open position, could be the rear. (Continued) 4-4 Storage

Roof Rack System For vehicles with a roof rack, the To prevent damage or loss of cargo rack can be used to load items. For when driving, check to make sure roof racks that do not have crossrails and cargo are securely { WARNING crossrails included, GM Certified fastened. Loading cargo on the roof crossrails can be purchased as an rack will make the vehicle’s center If something is carried on top of accessory. See your dealer/retailer of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, the vehicle that is longer or wider for additional information. sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden than the roof rack— like paneling, braking or abrupt maneuvers, plywood, or a mattress— the wind Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than otherwise it may result in loss of can catch it while the vehicle is control. If driving for a long distance, being driven. The item being 91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may on rough roads, or at high speeds, carried could be violently torn off, damage the vehicle. Load cargo occasionally stop the vehicle to and this could cause a collision, so that it rests evenly between make sure the cargo remains in its and damage the vehicle. Never the crossrails, making sure to place. Do not exceed the maximum carry something longer or wider fasten cargo securely. vehicle capacity when loading the than the roof rack on top of the vehicle. vehicle unless using a GM For more information on vehicle Certified accessory carrier. capacity and loading, see Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10. Instruments and Controls 5-1

Airbag Readiness Light ...... 5-15 Vehicle Messages Instruments and Passenger Airbag Status Vehicle Messages ...... 5-33 Controls Indicator ...... 5-16 Battery Voltage and Charging Charging System Light ...... 5-17 Messages ...... 5-33 Malfunction Brake System Messages . . . . 5-34 Controls Indicator Lamp ...... 5-17 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-34 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Brake System Warning Door Ajar Messages ...... 5-34 Steering Wheel Controls ...... 5-3 Light ...... 5-20 Engine Cooling System Horn ...... 5-5 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Messages ...... 5-35 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5 Warning Light ...... 5-21 Engine Oil Messages ...... 5-36 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-21 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36 Rear Window Wiper/ ® Washer ...... 5-6 StabiliTrak Indicator Light . . . 5-21 Fuel System Messages ...... 5-36 Compass ...... 5-6 Engine Coolant Temperature Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37 Clock ...... 5-8 Warning Light ...... 5-22 Lamp Messages ...... 5-37 Power Outlets ...... 5-9 Tire Pressure Light ...... 5-22 Object Detection System Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23 Messages ...... 5-37 Warning Lights, Gages, and Security Light ...... 5-23 Ride Control System Indicators High-Beam on Light ...... 5-23 Messages ...... 5-38 Warning Lights, Gages, and Fog Lamp Light ...... 5-24 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-38 Indicators ...... 5-11 Cruise Control Light ...... 5-24 Anti-Theft Alarm System Messages ...... 5-38 Instrument Cluster ...... 5-12 Information Displays Speedometer ...... 5-13 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-39 Odometer ...... 5-13 Driver Information Center Tire Messages ...... 5-39 Tachometer ...... 5-13 (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-24 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-40 Fuel Gage ...... 5-13 Driver Information Center Vehicle Reminder Engine Coolant (DIC) (Without DIC Messages ...... 5-41 Temperature Gage ...... 5-14 Buttons) ...... 5-30 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-41 Voltmeter Gage ...... 5-14 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-41 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-15 5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Personalization Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel Vehicle Personalization (With while driving. DIC Buttons) ...... 5-42 Steering Wheel Power Tilt Wheel Universal Remote System Adjustment Universal Remote System . . . 5-49 Universal Remote System The steering wheel can be adjusted. Programming ...... 5-49 The adjustment lever is on the Universal Remote System outboard side of the steering Operation ...... 5-53 column.

For vehicles with the power tilt and telescope wheel, the control is on the outboard side of the steering column. Push the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down. Pull the lever down to move the steering wheel up or down and in or out. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. Instruments and Controls 5-3

Push the control forward or w / x (Next / Previous): Press to 2. Press and release w or x to rearward to move the steering wheel select preset or favorite radio scroll up or down the list, then toward the front or rear of the stations, select tracks on a CD/ press and hold , or press vehicle. To set the memory position, w ¨ DVD, or to select tracks and to play the highlighted track. see Vehicle Personalization (With navigate folders on an iPod® or DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42. USB device. To select tracks on an iPod or USB device for vehicles with a navigation To select preset or favorite radio system: Steering Wheel Controls stations: 1. Press and hold or while . w x Press and release w or x to go listening to a song listed in the to the next or previous radio main audio page, to quickly station stored as a preset or move forward or in reverse favorite. through the tracks. See the To select tracks on a CD/DVD: separate Navigation System manual for more information. Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous track. Track information is displayed on the screen. Release or To select tracks on an iPod or USB w x when the desired track is device for vehicles without a reached. navigation system: 2. Press and release to begin Vehicles with audio steering wheel 1. Press and hold w or x while x playing the track shown in the controls could differ depending on listening to a song until the display. the vehicle's options. Some audio contents of the current folder controls can be adjusted at the display on the radio display. steering wheel. 5-4 Instruments and Controls

To navigate folders on an iPod or To navigate folders on an iPod or interact with those systems. See USB device for vehicles without a USB device for vehicles with a Bluetooth on page 7‑45 and the navigation system: navigation system: OnStar Owner's Guide for more information. 1. Press and hold w or x while 1. Go to the Music Navigator by listening to a song until the first touching the center touch c (End): Press to reject an contents of the current folder screen folder button in the main incoming call, or end a current call. display on the radio display. audio page. SRCE (Source/Voice 2. While in Music Navigator, select Recognition): Press to switch 2. Press and hold to go back to x the folder/artist/genre/category, between the radio, CD, and for the previous folder list. etc. using the touch screen. vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. 3. Press and release w or x to 3. Press and release x to scroll scroll up or down the list. through the selected music list. For vehicles with the navigation . To select a folder, press Touch the track label on the system, press and hold this button for longer than one second to and hold , or press touch screen to highlight and w initiate voice recognition. See “Voice ¨ when the folder is begin playing the track from that list. Recognition” in the Navigation highlighted. System manual for more . To go back further in 4. Press and hold x to quickly information. the folder list, press scroll through the selected ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next and hold x . music list radio station while in AM, b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press FM, or XM™. to silence the vehicle speakers only. For vehicles with or without a Press again to turn the sound on. navigation system: For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar® systems, press and hold Press ¨ to go to the next track or for longer than two seconds to chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Instruments and Controls 5-5

Press ¨ to select a track or a Windshield Wiper/Washer 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Turn the band up for more frequent folder when navigating folders on an The windshield wiper/washer lever wipes or down for less frequent iPod or USB device. is located on the left side of the wipes. For vehicles with a navigation steering column. 1 : Slow wipes. system: Turn the band with the wiper symbol 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep to control the windshield wipers. 2 : Fast wipes. is heard, to place the radio into Clear ice and snow from the wiper SCAN mode, a station will play blades before using them. If frozen for five seconds before moving to the windshield, carefully loosen or to the next station. thaw them. Damaged wiper blades 2. To stop the SCAN function, should be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement on page 10‑26. press ¨ again. Heavy snow or ice can overload the 3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB, wipers. A circuit breaker stops them press and hold to quickly move until the motor cools. forward through the tracks. Release to stop on the desired Windshield Washer track. J (Washer Fluid): Press the + e − e (Volume): Press to 8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn the button at the end of the turn signal/ lane change lever, to spray washer increase or to decrease the volume. band to 8 and then release. fluid on the windshield. The wipers Several wipes, hold the band on 8 clear the windshield and either stop Horn longer. or return to the preset speed. The Press near or on the horn symbols 9 (Off): Turns the wipers off. on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn. 5-6 Instruments and Controls ignition key must be in ACC/ Rear Window Wiper/ Compass ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for this to work. See Washer Fluid on Washer Your vehicle may have a compass page 10‑21 Windshield Washer The rear wiper and rear wash button in the Driver Information Center Fluid . is located on the instrument panel (DIC). See Driver Information below the climate control system. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on { page 5‑24 or Driver Information WARNING Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) rear wiper on and off. The wiper on page 5‑30 for more information In freezing weather, do not use speed cannot be changed. your washer until the windshield about the DIC. Y is warmed. Otherwise the washer (Wash): Press to spray washer Compass Zone fluid can form ice on the fluid on the rear window. The The zone is set to zone eight upon windshield, blocking your vision. window wiper will also come on. Release the button when enough leaving the factory. Your dealer/ retailer will set the correct zone for WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID fluid has been sprayed on the your location. is displayed on the Driver window. The rear wiper will run a Information Center (DIC) when the few more cycles after it is released. Under certain circumstances, such washer fluid is low. See Washer If the rear wiper function was as during a long distance Fluid Messages on page 5‑41. already on, prior to pressing the cross-country trip or moving to a wash button, it stays on until the new state or province, it will be wiper button is pressed again. necessary to compensate for The rear window washer uses the compass variance by resetting the same fluid that is in the windshield zone through the DIC if the zone is washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid not set correctly. on page 10‑21. Instruments and Controls 5-7

Compass variance is the difference 4. Press the trip/fuel button until between the earth's magnetic north the vehicle heading, for and true geographic north. If the example, N for North, is compass is not set to the zone displayed in the DIC. where you live, the compass may 5. If calibration is necessary, give false readings. The compass calibrate the compass. See must be set to the variance zone in “Compass Calibration which the vehicle is traveling. Procedure” following. To adjust for compass variance, use the following procedure: Compass Calibration The compass can be manually Compass Variance (Zone) calibrated. Only calibrate the Procedure 2. Find the vehicle's current compass in a magnetically clean 1. Do not set the compass zone location and variance zone and safe location, such as an open when the vehicle is moving. Only number on the map. parking lot, where driving the set it when the vehicle is in Zones 1 through 15 are vehicle in circles is not a danger. P (Park). available. It is suggested to calibrate away Press the vehicle information from tall buildings, utility wires, V 3. Press the set/reset button to manhole covers, or other industrial button until PRESS TO scroll through and select the structures, if possible. CHANGE COMPASS ZONE appropriate variance zone. displays. If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the compass should be calibrated. 5-8 Instruments and Controls

If the DIC display does not show a Do not operate any switches Clock heading, for example, N for North, such as window, sunroof, or the heading does not change climate controls, seats, etc. To adjust the time and date: after making turns, there may be a during the calibration procedure. 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ strong magnetic field interfering with 2. Press the vehicle information ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then the compass. Such interference V press O , to turn the radio on. may be caused by a magnetic CB or button until PRESS TO cell phone antenna mount, a CALIBRATE COMPASS 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, displays. magnetic emergency light, magnetic MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, note pad holder, or any other 3. Press the set/reset button to month, day, and year). magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, start the compass calibration. move the magnetic item, then turn 3. Press the pushbutton located on the vehicle and calibrate the 4. The DIC will display under any one of the labels to be compass. CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN changed. CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in 4. To increase the time or date, do To calibrate the compass, use the tight circles at less than 5 mph one of the following: following procedure: (8 km/h) to complete the . Press the pushbutton below Compass Calibration Procedure calibration. The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a the selected label. 1. Before calibrating the compass, few seconds when the . Press SEEK. make sure the compass zone is calibration is complete. The DIC ¨ set to the variance zone in which display will then return to the . Press \ FWD. the vehicle is located. See previous menu. “Compass Variance (Zone) . Turn f clockwise. Procedure” earlier in this section. Instruments and Controls 5-9

5. To decrease the time or date, do Power Outlets Certain accessory plugs may not be one of the following: compatible to the accessory power The vehicle has three 12-volt outlets outlet and could result in blown . Press © SEEK. which can be used to plug in vehicle and adapter fuses. If a electrical equipment, such as a . Press s REV. problem is experienced, see your cellular telephone, a compact disc dealer/retailer for additional . Turn f counter-clockwise. player, etc. information on the power accessory outlets. To change the time default setting The power outlets are located on the instrument panel below the from 12 hour to 24 hour or to Notice: Adding any electrical climate controls, at the rear of the change the date default setting from equipment to the vehicle can center console, and in the rear month/day/year to day/month/year: damage it or keep other cargo area. Lift the cover to access components from working as 1. Press G and then the the outlet. Close the cover when not they should. The repairs would pushbutton located under the using the outlet. not be covered by the vehicle forward arrow that displays on Notice: Leaving electrical warranty. Do not use equipment the radio screen until the time equipment plugged in for an exceeding maximum amperage 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and extended period of time while the rating of 20 amperes. Check with the date MM/DD (month and vehicle is off will drain the your dealer/retailer before adding day) and DD/MM (day and battery. Power is always supplied electrical equipment. month) displays. to the outlets. Always unplug 2. Press the pushbutton located electrical equipment when not in under the desired option. use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 3. Press G again to apply the 20 ampere rating. selected default, or let the screen time out. 5-10 Instruments and Controls

When adding electrical equipment, The indicator light does not come on be sure to follow the proper when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or installation instructions included with if no equipment is plugged into the the equipment. outlet. Notice: Improper use of the If equipment is connected using power outlet can cause damage more than 150 watts or a system not covered by the vehicle fault is detected, a protection circuit warranty. Do not hang any type of shuts off the power supply and the accessory or accessory bracket indicator light turns off. To reset the from the plug because the power circuit, unplug the item and plug it outlets are designed for back in or turn the Remote accessory power plugs only. Accessory Power (RAP) off and The power outlet is located on the then back on. See Retained Power Outlet 120 Volt rear of the center console. Accessory Power (RAP) on Alternative Current An indicator light on the outlet turns page 9‑17. The power restarts The vehicle may have a power on to show it is in use. The light when equipment using 150 watts or outlet that can be used to plug in comes on when the ignition is in less is plugged into the outlet and a electrical equipment that uses a ON/RUN and equipment requiring system fault is not detected. maximum limit of 150 watts. less than 150 watts is plugged into the outlet, and no system fault is detected. Instruments and Controls 5-11

The power outlet is not designed for Warning Lights, the following electrical equipment and may not work properly if these Gages, and Indicators items are plugged into the power Warning lights come on when there outlet: could be a problem with a vehicle . Equipment with high initial peak function. Some warning lights come wattage such as: on briefly when the engine is started compressor-driven refrigerators to indicate they are working. and electric power tools. Gages can indicate when there . Other equipment requiring an could be a problem with a vehicle extremely stable power supply function. Often gages and warning such as: lights work together to indicate a microcomputer-controlled problem with the vehicle. electric blankets, touch sensor When one of the warning lights lamps, etc. comes on and stays on while See High Voltage Devices and driving, or when one of the gages Wiring on page 10‑30. shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous. 5-12 Instruments and Controls

Instrument Cluster

United States version shown, Canada similar Instruments and Controls 5-13

Speedometer Fuel Gage When the fuel tank is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will The speedometer shows the appear on the Driver Information vehicle's speed in both kilometers Center (DIC). For more information per hour (km/h) and miles per see Fuel System Messages on hour (mph). page 5‑36. Odometer Here are some situations that may United States Canada occur with the fuel gage. None of The odometer shows how far the these indicate a problem with the vehicle has been driven, in either When the ignition is on, the fuel fuel gage. kilometers or miles. gage shows how much fuel the vehicle has left in the tank. . At the gas station, the fuel pump This vehicle has a tamper-resistant shuts off before the gage odometer. If the vehicle needs a An arrow on the fuel gage indicates reads full. new odometer installed, the new the side of the vehicle the fuel door . It takes a little more or less fuel one is set to the mileage of the old is on. to fill up than the fuel gage odometer. If this is not possible, it is The gage will first indicate empty indicated. For example, the gage set at zero and a label is put on the before the vehicle is out of fuel, the may have indicated the tank was driver's door to show the old vehicles fuel tank should be half full, but it actually took a mileage reading. filled soon. little more or less than half the Tachometer tank's capacity to fill the tank. . The gage goes back to empty The tachometer displays the engine when the ignition is turned off. speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). 5-14 Instruments and Controls

Engine Coolant Voltmeter Gage Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of Temperature Gage electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period. If there is a problem with the battery charging system, a SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM United States Canada When the engine is not running, but message will appear in the Driver the ignition is on, this gage shows Information Center (DIC) and/or the This gage shows the engine coolant the battery's state of charge in charging system light will come on. temperature. Under normal driving DC volts. See Battery Voltage and Charging conditions the gage will read 210°F When the engine is running, this Messages on page 5‑33 for more (100 °C) or less. If the gage pointer gage shows the condition of the information. is near 260°F (125 °C), the engine charging system. The vehicle's However, readings in either warning is too hot. charging system regulates voltage zone may indicate a possible It means that the engine coolant has based on the state of charge of the problem in the electrical system. overheated. If the vehicle has been battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate. Have the vehicle serviced as soon operating under normal driving This is normal. Readings between as possible. conditions, pull off the road, stop the the low and high warning zones vehicle and turn off the engine as indicate the normal operating range. soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-15

Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt as a briefcase, handbag, grocery Reminder Light bag, laptop or other electronic Driver Safety Belt Reminder device. To turn off the warning light Light and or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the The driver safety belt reminder light safety belt. on the instrument panel cluster. Airbag Readiness Light This light shows if there is an When the engine is started this light electrical problem. The system and the chime come on and stay on check includes the airbag sensor, for several seconds to remind the the pretensioners, the airbag passenger to fasten their safety belt. modules, the wiring and the crash When the engine is started this light The light also begins to flash. sensing and diagnostic module. For and the chime come on and stay on This only occurs if the passenger more information on the airbag for several seconds to remind the airbag is enabled. See Passenger system, see Airbag System on driver to fasten the safety belt. The Sensing System on page 3‑37 for page 3‑29. light also begins to flash. more information. This cycle repeats if the driver This cycle repeats if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle remains unbuckled and the vehicle is moving. is moving. If the driver safety belt is already If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the light nor chime buckled, neither the chime nor the comes on. light comes on. This light will come on and stay on The front passenger safety belt for several seconds when the warning light and chime may turn on vehicle is started. Then the light if an object is put on the seat such should go out. 5-16 Instruments and Controls

If the airbag readiness light stays on Passenger Airbag Status for on and off, for several seconds after the vehicle has been started or as a system check. If you are using comes on when while driving, the Indicator remote start to start the vehicle from airbag system may not work The vehicle has a passenger a distance, if equipped, you may not properly. Have the vehicle serviced sensing system. See Passenger see the system check. Then, after right away. Sensing System on page 3‑37 for several more seconds, the status important safety information. The indicator will light either ON or OFF, { WARNING instrument panel has a passenger or either the on or off symbol to let airbag status indicator. you know the status of the right front If the airbag readiness light stays passenger frontal airbag. on after the vehicle is started or If the word ON or the on symbol is comes on while driving, it means lit on the passenger airbag status the airbag system might not be indicator, it means that the right working properly. The airbags in front passenger frontal airbag is the vehicle might not inflate in a enabled (may inflate). crash, or they could even inflate United States If the word OFF or the off symbol is without a crash. To help avoid lit on the passenger airbag status injury, have the vehicle serviced indicator, it means that the right away. passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag.

Canada When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol Instruments and Controls 5-17

If, after several seconds, both status Charging System Light If a short distance must be driven indicator lights remain on, or if there with the light on, be sure to turn off are no lights at all, there may be a all accessories, such as the radio problem with the lights or the and air conditioner. passenger sensing system. See your dealer/retailer for service. Malfunction Indicator Lamp { WARNING The charging system light comes on A computer system called OBD II If the airbag readiness light ever briefly when the ignition is turned (On-Board Diagnostics-Second comes on and stays on, it means on, but the engine is not running, as Generation) monitors operation of that something may be wrong a check to show the light is working. the fuel, ignition, and emission with the airbag system. To help It should go out when the engine is control systems. It ensures that avoid injury to yourself or others, started. emissions are at acceptable levels have the vehicle serviced right for the life of the vehicle, helping to If the light stays on, or comes on produce a cleaner environment. away. See Airbag Readiness while driving, there may be a Light on page 5‑15 for more problem with the electrical charging information, including important system. Have it checked by your safety information. dealer/retailer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery. When this light comes on, the Driver Information Center (DIC) also displays the SERVICE BATTERY This light comes on when the CHARGING SYSTEM message. ignition is on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is See Vehicle Messages on working. If it does not, have the page 5‑33 for more information. vehicle serviced by your dealer/ retailer. 5-18 Instruments and Controls

If the check engine light comes on Notice: Modifications made to the The following can prevent more and stays on, while the engine is engine, transmission, exhaust, serious damage to the vehicle: running, this indicates that there is intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed. an OBD II problem and service is vehicle or the replacement of the required. original tires with other than . Avoid hard accelerations. Malfunctions often are indicated by those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades. Performance Criteria (TPC) can the system before any problem is . If towing a trailer, reduce the apparent. Being aware of the light affect the vehicle's emission controls and can cause this light amount of cargo being hauled as can prevent more serious damage soon as it is possible. to the vehicle. This system assists to come on. Modifications to the service technician in correctly these systems could lead to If the light continues to flash, when diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by the it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. vehicle warranty. This could also Find a safe place to park the Notice: If the vehicle is result in a failure to pass a vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at continually driven with this light required Emission Inspection/ least 10 seconds, and restart the on, after a while, the emission Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing, controls might not work as well, Accessories and Modifications on follow the previous steps and see the vehicle's fuel economy might page 10‑3. your dealer/retailer for service as not be as good, and the engine soon as possible. might not run as smoothly. This This light comes on during a could lead to costly repairs that malfunction in one of two ways: Light On Steady: An emission might not be covered by the Light Flashing: A misfire condition control system malfunction has vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire been detected on the vehicle. increases vehicle emissions and Diagnosis and service might be could damage the emission control required. system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. Instruments and Controls 5-19

An emission system malfunction . Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and might be corrected. with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs causes the engine not to run as . Make sure the fuel cap is fully efficiently as designed and may Some state/provincial and local installed. See Filling the Tank on cause: stalling after start-up, governments have or might begin page 9‑41. The diagnostic stalling when the vehicle is programs to inspect the emission system can determine if the fuel changed into gear, misfiring, control equipment on the vehicle. cap has been left off or hesitation on acceleration, or Failure to pass this inspection could improperly installed. A loose or stumbling on acceleration. prevent getting a vehicle missing fuel cap allows fuel to These conditions might go away registration. evaporate into the atmosphere. once the engine is warmed up. A few driving trips with the cap Here are some things to know to properly installed should turn the If one or more of these help the vehicle pass an inspection: light off. conditions occurs, change the . The vehicle will not pass this fuel brand used. It will require at . If the vehicle has been driven inspection if the check engine least one full tank of the proper light is on with the engine through a deep puddle of water, fuel to turn the light off. the vehicle's electrical system running, or if the key is in ON/ might be wet. The condition is See Gasoline Specifications on RUN and the light is not on. usually corrected when the page 9‑39. . The vehicle will not pass this electrical system dries out. A few If none of the above have made the inspection if the OBD II driving trips should turn the light turn off, your dealer/retailer can (on-board diagnostic) system light off. check the vehicle. The dealer/ determines that critical emission retailer has the proper test control systems have not been equipment and diagnostic tools to completely diagnosed by the fix any mechanical or electrical system. The vehicle would be problems that might have considered not ready for developed. inspection. This can happen if 5-20 Instruments and Controls

the battery has recently been If the light comes on while driving, replaced or if the battery has run pull off the road and stop carefully. down. The diagnostic system is Make sure the parking brake is fully designed to evaluate critical released. The pedal may be harder emission control systems during to push or, the pedal may go closer normal driving. This can take to the floor. It may take longer to several days of routine driving. United States Canada stop. If the light is still on, have the If this has been done and the vehicle towed for service. See vehicle still does not pass the This light should come on briefly Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑83. inspection for lack of OBD II when the ignition key is turned to system readiness, your dealer/ ON/RUN. If it does not come on { WARNING retailer can prepare the vehicle then, have it fixed so it will be ready for inspection. to warn if there is a problem. The brake system might not be This light may also come on due to working properly if the brake Brake System Warning low brake fluid. See Brakes on system warning light is on. Light page 10‑22 for more information. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a When the ignition is on, the brake This vehicle's hydraulic brake crash. If the light is still on after system warning light will also come system is divided into two parts. the vehicle has been pulled off If one part is not working, the other on when the parking brake is set. the road and carefully stopped, part can still work and stop the The light will stay on if the parking have the vehicle towed for vehicle. For good braking both parts brake does not release fully. If it need to be working. stays on after the parking brake is service. fully released, it means there is a If the warning light comes on, there brake problem. is a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away. Instruments and Controls 5-21

Antilock Brake System Then start the engine again to reset StabiliTrak® Indicator the system. If the light still stays on, (ABS) Warning Light or comes on again while driving, the Light vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, there are still brakes, but no antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, there are no antilock brakes and United States Canada there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning This light comes on briefly while The ABS warning light comes on Light on page 5‑20. starting the engine. If it does not, briefly when the ignition key is have the vehicle serviced by your turned to ON/RUN. This is normal. Tow/Haul Mode Light dealer/retailer. If the system is If the light does not come on then, working normally the indicator light have it fixed so it will be ready to goes off. warn you if there is a problem. If it stays on, or comes on while If the light stays on, turn the ignition driving, there could be a problem to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes on with the StabiliTrak system and the while driving, stop as soon as vehicle might need service. When possible and turn the ignition off. this warning light is on, the system This light comes on when the Tow/ is off and will not limit wheel spin. Haul mode has been activated. This light flashes when the For more information, see Tow/Haul StabiliTrak system is active. Mode on page 9‑25. See StabiliTrak System on page 9‑28 for more information. 5-22 Instruments and Controls

Engine Coolant Stop the vehicle and turn off the When the Light is On Steady engine to avoid damage to the This indicates that one or more of Temperature Warning engine. A warning chime sounds Light the tires are significantly when this light is on. underinflated. See Engine Overheating on A tire pressure message in the page 10‑18 for more information. Driver Information Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Tire Tire Pressure Light Messages on page 5‑39 for more information. Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the The engine coolant temperature pressure value shown on the tire warning light comes on briefly when loading information label. See Tire the engine is started. Pressure on page 10‑43 for more information. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. For vehicles with a tire pressure When the Light Flashes First and If the system is working normally the monitoring system, this light comes Then is On Steady indicator light then goes off. on briefly when the engine is This indicates that there may be a If the light comes on and stays on started. It provides information problem with the Tire Pressure while driving, the vehicle may have about tire pressures and the Tire Monitor System. The light flashes a problem with the cooling system. Pressure Monitoring System. for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10‑46 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-23

Engine Oil Pressure Light Security Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come on briefly as the engine is started. Someone could be burned. Check If it does not come on have the the oil as soon as possible and This light flashes when the security vehicle serviced by your dealer/ system is activated. have the vehicle serviced. retailer. For more information, see Anti-Theft Notice: Lack of proper engine oil If the light comes on and stays on, it Alarm System on page 2‑13. maintenance can damage the means that oil is not flowing through engine. The repairs would not be the engine properly. The vehicle High-Beam on Light covered by the vehicle warranty. could be low on oil and might have Always follow the maintenance some other system problem. schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.

The high-beam on light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. 5-24 Instruments and Controls

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Cruise Control Light Information Displays Changer on page 6‑2 for more information. Driver Information Center Fog Lamp Light (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below explains the operation of this system. This light comes on whenever the The DIC displays information about cruise control is set. your vehicle. It also displays The light goes out when the cruise warning messages if a system control is turned off. See Cruise The fog lamp light comes on when problem is detected. Control on page 9 30 for more the fog lamps are in use. ‑ All messages will appear in the DIC information. The light goes out when the fog display located at the top of the lamps are turned off. See Fog instrument panel cluster. Lamps on page 6‑5 for more The DIC comes on when the ignition information. is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. The DIC also displays a shift lever position indicator on the bottom line of the display. See Automatic Transmission on page 9‑22 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-25

The outside air temperature and DIC Buttons on vehicles with this feature, compass, if equipped, also display Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) on the DIC when viewing the trip transmitter programming, and and fuel information. The outside air compass calibration and zone temperature automatically appears setting on vehicles with this feature. in the top right corner of the DIC 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button display. If there is a problem with to display the odometer, trip the system that controls the odometers, fuel range, average temperature display, the numbers The buttons are the set/reset, economy, timer, fuel used, and will be replaced with dashes. If this customization, vehicle information, average speed. occurs, have the vehicle serviced. and trip/fuel buttons. The button The compass will be shown in the functions are detailed in the Vehicle Information Menu bottom right corner of the DIC following pages. Items display. See Compass on V (Set/Reset): Press this button to T (Vehicle Information): Press page 5‑6 for more information. set or reset certain functions and to this button to scroll through the The DIC has different displays turn off or acknowledge messages following menu items: which can be accessed by pressing on the DIC. the DIC buttons located on the OIL LIFE U (Customization): Press this instrument panel. button to customize the feature Press the vehicle information button The DIC also allows some features settings on your vehicle. See until OIL LIFE REMAINING to be customized. See Vehicle Vehicle Personalization (With DIC displays. This display shows an Personalization (With DIC Buttons) Buttons) on page 5‑42 for more estimate of the oil's remaining useful on page 5‑42 for more information. information. life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you T (Vehicle Information): Press means 99% of the current oil life can also use the trip odometer reset this button to display the oil life, remains. The engine oil life system stem to view the odometer and trip park assist on vehicles with this odometers. feature, units, tire pressure readings 5-26 Instruments and Controls will alert you to change the oil on a PARK ASSIST UNITS schedule consistent with your If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Press the vehicle information button driving conditions. Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, until UNITS displays. This display When the remaining oil life is low, press the vehicle information button allows you to select between the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON until PARK ASSIST displays. This English or Metric units of message will appear on the display. display allows the system to be measurement. Once in this display, See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” turned on or off. Once in this press the set/reset button to select under Engine Oil Messages on display, press the set/reset button to between ENGLISH or METRIC page 5‑36. You should change the select between ON or OFF. If you units. All of the vehicle information oil as soon as you can. See Engine choose ON, the system will be will then be displayed in the unit of Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the turned on. If you choose OFF, the measurement selected. engine oil life system monitoring the system will be turned off. The URPA oil life, additional maintenance is system automatically turns back on FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES recommended in the Maintenance after each vehicle start. When the On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Schedule in this manual. See URPA system is turned off and the Monitor System (TPMS), the Scheduled Maintenance on vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the pressure for each tire can be viewed page 11‑2 for more information. DIC will display the PARK ASSIST in the DIC. The tire pressure will be Remember, you must reset the OIL OFF message as a reminder that shown in either pounds per square LIFE display yourself after each oil the system has been turned off. See inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). change. It will not reset itself. Also, Object Detection System Messages Press the vehicle information button be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE on page 5‑37 and Ultrasonic until the DIC displays FRONT display accidentally at any time Parking Assist on page 9‑32 for TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## other than when the oil has just more information. RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle been changed. It cannot be reset information button again until the accurately until the next oil change. DIC displays REAR TIRES To reset the engine oil life system, PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. see Engine Oil Life System on page 10‑10. Instruments and Controls 5-27

If a low tire pressure condition is To match an RKE transmitter to your 4. To match additional transmitters detected by the system while vehicle: at this time, repeat Step 3. driving, a message advising you 1. Press the vehicle information Each vehicle can have a add air to a specific tire will appear button until PRESS V TO maximum of eight transmitters in the display. See Tire Pressure on matched to it. page 10‑43 and Tire Messages on RELEARN REMOTE KEY page 5‑39 for more information. displays. 5. To exit the programming mode, 2. Press the set/reset button until you must cycle the key to If the tire pressure display shows LOCK/OFF. dashes instead of a value, there REMOTE KEY LEARNING may be a problem with your vehicle. ACTIVE is displayed. COMPASS ZONE SETTING If this consistently occurs, see your 3. Press and hold the lock and This display will be available if the dealer/retailer for service. unlock buttons on the first vehicle has a compass. See RELEARN REMOTE KEY transmitter at the same time for Compass on page 5‑6 for more about 15 seconds. information. This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) On vehicles with memory recall COMPASS RECALIBRATION transmitters to your vehicle. This seats, the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and This display will be available if the procedure will erase all previously vehicle has a compass. See learned transmitters. Therefore, they the second will match driver 2. Compass on page 5‑6 for more must be relearned as additional A chime will sound indicating information. transmitters. that the transmitter is matched. Blank Display This display shows no information. 5-28 Instruments and Controls

Trip/Fuel Menu Items Each trip odometer can be reset to For example, if the vehicle was zero separately by pressing the set/ driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button reset button or the trip odometer started again, and then the to scroll through the following menu reset stem while the desired trip retroactive reset feature is activated, items: odometer is displayed. the display will show 5 miles (8 km). ODOMETER The trip odometer has a feature As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then increase to Press the trip/fuel button until called retroactive reset. This can be 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles ODOMETER displays. This display used to set the trip odometer to the (8.4 km), etc. shows the distance the vehicle has number of miles (kilometers) driven been driven in either miles (mi) or since the ignition was last turned on. If the retroactive reset feature is kilometers (km). Pressing the trip This can be used if the trip activated after the vehicle is started, odometer reset stem will also odometer is not reset at the but before it begins moving, the display the odometer. beginning of the trip. display will show the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that To switch between English and To use the retroactive reset feature, were driven during the last ignition metric measurements, see UNITS press and hold the set/reset button “ ” cycle. earlier in this section. for at least four seconds. The trip odometer will display the number of RANGE TRIPA and TRIP B miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven Press the trip/fuel button until Press the trip/fuel button until since the ignition was last turned on RANGE displays. This display TRIPA or TRIP B displays. This and the vehicle was moving. Once shows the approximate number of display shows the current distance the vehicle begins moving, the trip remaining miles (mi) or traveled in either miles (mi) or odometer will accumulate mileage. kilometers (km) the vehicle can be kilometers (km) since the last reset driven without refueling. The display for each trip odometer. Both trip will show LOW if the fuel level odometers can be used at the same is low. time. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometers. Instruments and Controls 5-29

The fuel range estimate is based on since the last time this menu item To reset the timer to zero, press and an average of the vehicle's fuel was reset. To reset AVG hold the set/reset button while economy over recent driving history ECONOMY, press and hold the set/ TIMER is displayed. and the amount of fuel remaining in reset button. the fuel tank. This estimate will FUEL USED change if driving conditions change. TIMER Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL For example, if driving in traffic and Press the trip/fuel button until USED displays. This display shows making frequent stops, this display TIMER displays. This display can be the number of gallons (gal) or may read one number, but if the used as a timer. liters (L) of fuel used since the last vehicle is driven on a freeway, the To start the timer, press the set/ reset of this menu item. To reset the number may change even though reset button while TIMER is fuel used information, press and the same amount of fuel is in the displayed. The display will show the hold the set/reset button while FUEL fuel tank. This is because different amount of time that has passed USED is displayed. driving conditions produce different since the timer was last reset, not AVG (Average) SPEED fuel economies. Generally, freeway including time the ignition is off. driving produces better fuel Time will continue to be counted as Press the trip/fuel button until AVG economy than city driving. Fuel long as the ignition is on, even if SPEED displays. This display range cannot be reset. another display is being shown on shows the average speed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or AVG (Average) ECONOMY the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and kilometers per hour (km/h). This Press the trip/fuel button until AVG 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which average is calculated based on the ECONOMY displays. This display the display will return to zero. various vehicle speeds recorded shows the approximate average since the last reset of this value. To miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per To stop the timer, press the set/reset reset the value to zero, press and 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This button briefly while TIMER is hold the set/reset button. number is calculated based on the displayed. Blank Display number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded This display shows no information. 5-30 Instruments and Controls

Driver Information Center Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) for each trip odometer. Both trip transmitter programming, units, and odometers can be used at the (DIC) (Without DIC display language. same time. Buttons) If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you Each trip odometer can be reset to If your vehicle does not have DIC can use the trip odometer reset zero separately by pressing and buttons, the information below stem to view the following displays: holding the trip odometer reset stem explains the operation of this odometer and trip odometers. while the desired trip odometer is system. displayed. Trip Odometer Reset Stem The DIC has different displays Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature which can be accessed by pressing called the retro-active reset. This the trip odometer reset stem located ODOMETER can be used to set the trip odometer on the instrument panel cluster. Press the trip odometer reset stem to the number of miles (kilometers) Pressing the trip odometer reset until ODOMETER displays. This driven since the ignition was last stem will also turn off, display shows the distance the turned on. This can be used if the or acknowledge, DIC messages. vehicle has been driven in either trip odometer is not reset at the The DIC displays trip and vehicle miles (mi) or kilometers (km). beginning of the trip. system information, and warning To switch between English and To use the retro-active reset feature, messages if a system problem is metric measurements, see “UNITS” press and hold the trip odometer detected. later in this section. reset stem for at least four seconds. If your vehicle does not have DIC The trip odometer will display the TRIPA or TRIP B buttons, you can use the trip number of miles (mi) or odometer reset stem to view the Press the trip odometer reset stem kilometers (km) driven since the following displays: odometer, trip until TRIPA or TRIP B displays. This ignition was last turned on and the odometers, oil life, park assist menu display shows the current distance vehicle was moving. Once the for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear traveled in either miles (mi) or vehicle begins moving, the trip Parking Assist (URPA) system, kilometers (km) since the last reset odometer will accumulate mileage. Instruments and Controls 5-31

For example, if the vehicle was change the oil on a schedule PARK ASSIST driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is consistent with your driving To access this display, the vehicle started again, and then the conditions. must be in P (Park). If your vehicle retro-active reset feature is When the remaining oil life is low, has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking activated, the display will show the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Assist (URPA) system, press the trip 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins message will appear on the display. odometer reset stem until PARK moving, the display will then See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” ASSIST displays. This display increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), under Engine Oil Messages on allows the system to be turned on or 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. page 5‑36. You should change the off. Once in this display, press and If the retro-active reset feature is oil as soon as you can. See Engine hold the trip odometer reset stem to activated after the vehicle is started, Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the select between ON or OFF. If you but before it begins moving, the engine oil life system monitoring the choose ON, the system will be display will show the number of oil life, additional maintenance is turned on. If you choose OFF, the miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that recommended in the Maintenance system will be turned off. The URPA were driven during the last ignition Schedule in this manual. See system automatically turns back on cycle. Scheduled Maintenance on after each vehicle start. When the page 11‑2 for more information. URPA system is turned off and the OIL LIFE Remember, you must reset the OIL vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the To access this display, the vehicle LIFE display yourself after each oil DIC will display the PARK ASSIST must be in P (Park). Press the trip change. It will not reset itself. Also, OFF message as a reminder that odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE the system has been turned off. See REMAINING displays. This display display accidentally at any time Object Detection System Messages shows an estimate of the oil's other than when the oil has just on page 5‑37 and Ultrasonic remaining useful life. If you see been changed. It cannot be reset Parking Assist on page 9‑32 for 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the accurately until the next oil change. more information. display, that means 99% of the To reset the engine oil life system, current oil life remains. The engine see Engine Oil Life System on oil life system will alert you to page 10‑10. 5-32 Instruments and Controls

RELEARN REMOTE KEY On vehicles with memory recall units. All of the vehicle information To access this display, the vehicle seats, the first transmitter will then be displayed in the unit of must be in P (Park). This display learned will match driver 1 and measurement selected. the second will match driver 2. allows you to match Remote DISPLAY LANGUAGE Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to A chime will sound indicating your vehicle. This procedure will that the transmitter is matched. To access this display, the vehicle erase all previously learned must be in P (Park). This display 4. To match additional transmitters allows you to select the language in transmitters. Therefore, they must at this time, repeat Step 3. be relearned as additional which the DIC messages will transmitters. Each vehicle can have a appear. To select a language: maximum of eight transmitters 1. Press the trip odometer reset To match an RKE transmitter to your matched to it. vehicle: stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE 5. To exit the programming mode, displays. 1. Press the trip odometer reset you must cycle the key to 2. Continue to press and hold the stem until RELEARN REMOTE LOCK/OFF. KEY displays. trip odometer reset stem to scroll UNITS through all of the available 2. Press and hold the trip odometer languages. reset stem until REMOTE KEY To access this display, the vehicle LEARNING ACTIVE is must be in P (Park). Press the trip The available languages are displayed. odometer reset stem until UNITS ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS displays. This display allows you to (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), 3. Press and hold the lock and and NO CHANGE. unlock buttons on the first select between English or Metric transmitter at the same time for units of measurement. Once in this 3. Once the desired language is about 15 seconds. display, press and hold the trip displayed, release the trip odometer reset stem to select odometer reset stem to set your between ENGLISH or METRIC choice. Instruments and Controls 5-33

Vehicle Messages display seriously and remember that Turn off all unnecessary clearing the messages will only accessories to allow the battery to Messages are displayed on the DIC make the messages disappear, not recharge. to notify the driver that the status of correct the problem. The normal battery voltage range is the vehicle has changed and that The following are the possible 11.5 to 15.5 volts. some action may be needed by the messages that can be displayed driver to correct the condition. and some information about them. SERVICE BATTERY Multiple messages may appear one CHARGING SYSTEM after another. Battery Voltage and On some vehicles, this message Some messages may not require Charging Messages displays if there is a problem with immediate action, but you can press the battery charging system. Under any of the DIC buttons on the BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE certain conditions, the charging instrument panel or the trip system light may also turn on in the odometer reset stem on the This message displays when the system detects that the battery instrument panel cluster. See instrument panel cluster to Charging System Light on acknowledge that you received the voltage is dropping below expected levels. The battery saver system page 5‑17. Driving with this messages and to clear them from problem could drain the battery. the display. starts reducing certain features of the vehicle that you may be able to Turn off all unnecessary Some messages cannot be cleared notice. At the point that the features accessories. Have the electrical from the DIC display because they are disabled, this message is system checked as soon as are more urgent. These messages displayed. It means that the vehicle possible. See your dealer/retailer. require action before they can be is trying to save the charge in the cleared. You should take any battery. messages that appear on the 5-34 Instruments and Controls

Brake System Messages Door Ajar Messages LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is This message displays along with This message displays and a chime not fully closed and the vehicle is the brake system warning light if sounds if the driver door is not fully shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn there is a problem with the brake closed and the vehicle is shifted out off the vehicle, check the door for system. See Brake System Warning of P (Park). Stop and turn off the obstructions, and close the door Light on page 5‑20. If this message vehicle, check the door for again. Check to see if the message appears, stop as soon as possible obstructions, and close the door still appears on the DIC. and turn off the vehicle. Restart the again. Check to see if the message vehicle and check for the message still appears on the DIC. LIFTGATE OPEN on the DIC display. If the message HOOD OPEN This message displays and a chime is still displayed or appears again sounds if the liftgate is open while when you begin driving, the brake On some models, this message the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off system needs service as soon as displays and a chime sounds if the the vehicle and check the liftgate. possible. See your dealer/retailer. hood is not fully closed. Stop and Restart the vehicle and check for turn off the vehicle, check the hood the message on the DIC display. Cruise Control Messages for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to see if the message PASSENGER DOOR OPEN CRUISE SET TO XXX still appears on the DIC. This message displays and a chime This message displays whenever sounds if the passenger door is not the cruise control is set. See Cruise fully closed and the vehicle is Control on page 9‑30 for more shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn information. off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. Instruments and Controls 5-35

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN If this message continues to appear, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP have the system repaired by your This message displays and a chime ENGINE dealer/retailer as soon as possible sounds if the passenger side rear to avoid damage to the engine. Notice: If you drive your vehicle door is not fully closed and the while the engine is overheating, vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE severe engine damage may Stop and turn off the vehicle, check ENGINE occur. If an overheat warning the door for obstructions, and close appears on the instrument panel the door again. Check to see if the Notice: If you drive your vehicle cluster and/or DIC, stop the message still appears on the DIC. while the engine is overheating, vehicle as soon as possible. Do severe engine damage may not increase the engine speed Engine Cooling System occur. If an overheat warning above normal idling speed. See appears on the instrument panel Messages Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 cluster and/or DIC, stop the for more information. ENGINE HOT A/C (Air vehicle as soon as possible. Do not increase the engine speed This message displays and a Conditioning) OFF above normal idling speed. See continuous chime sounds if the This message displays when the Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 engine cooling system reaches engine coolant becomes hotter than for more information. unsafe temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as the normal operating temperature. This message displays when the See Engine Coolant Temperature soon as it is safe to do so to avoid engine coolant temperature is too severe damage. This message Gage on page 5‑14. To avoid hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to added strain on a hot engine, the air clears when the engine has cooled idle until it cools down. See Engine to a safe operating temperature. conditioning compressor Coolant Temperature Gage on automatically turns off. When the page 5‑14. coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning See Overheated Engine Protection compressor turns back on. You can Operating Mode on page 10‑20 for continue to drive your vehicle. information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. 5-36 Instruments and Controls

Engine Oil Messages possible. Do not drive the vehicle This message also displays when until the cause of the low oil the vehicle's engine power is CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON pressure is corrected. See Engine reduced. Reduced engine power This message displays when the Oil on page 10‑8 for more can affect the vehicle's ability to engine oil needs to be changed. information. accelerate. If this message is on, When you change the engine oil, be This message displays if low oil but there is no reduction in sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE pressure levels occur. Stop the performance, proceed to your OIL SOON message. See Engine vehicle as soon as safely possible destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle Oil Life System on page 10‑10 for and do not operate it until the cause information on how to reset the of the low oil pressure has been is driven. The vehicle may be driven message. See Engine Oil on corrected. Check the oil as soon as at a reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration and page 10‑8 and Scheduled possible and have your vehicle speed may be reduced. Anytime Maintenance on page 11‑2 for serviced by your dealer/retailer. See this message stays on, the vehicle more information. Engine Oil on page 10‑8. should be taken to your dealer/ OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP Engine Power Messages retailer for service as soon as ENGINE possible. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED Notice: If you drive your vehicle Fuel System Messages while the engine oil pressure is This message displays and a chime low, severe engine damage may sounds when the cooling system FUEL LEVEL LOW occur. If a low oil pressure temperature gets too hot and the warning appears on the engine further enters the engine This message displays and a chime instrument panel cluster and/or coolant protection mode. See sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 for further information. on page 5‑13 and Fuel on page 9‑38 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-37

TIGHTEN GAS CAP under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) AUTOMATIC LIGHT System Operation on page 2 3 This message may display along ‑ CONTROL ON and Driver Information Center (DIC) with the check engine light on the (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 24 or This message displays when the instrument panel cluster if the ‑ Driver Information Center (DIC) automatic headlamps are turned on. vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened (Without DIC Buttons) on This message clears itself after properly. See Malfunction Indicator 10 seconds. page 5‑30 for more information. Lamp on page 5‑17. Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank REPLACE BATTERY IN TURN SIGNAL ON on page 9‑41. The diagnostic REMOTE KEY This message displays and a chime system can determine if the fuel cap sounds if a turn signal is left on for This message displays if a Remote has been left off or improperly 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter installed. A loose or missing fuel signal/multifunction lever to the off battery is low. The battery needs to cap allows fuel to evaporate into the position. atmosphere. A few driving trips with be replaced in the transmitter. See the cap properly installed should “Battery Replacement” under Object Detection System turn this light and message off. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2‑3. Messages Key and Lock Messages Lamp Messages PARK ASSIST OFF REMOTE KEY LEARNING If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic ACTIVE AUTOMATIC LIGHT Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, CONTROL OFF after the vehicle has been started This message displays while you and shifted out of P (Park), this are matching a Remote Keyless This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned off. message displays to remind the Entry (RKE) transmitter to your driver that the URPA system has vehicle. See “Matching This message clears itself after 10 seconds. been turned off or to notify the driver Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” that the system has turned itself off. 5-38 Instruments and Controls

Press the set/reset button or the trip there is a problem. See your dealer/ Airbag System Messages odometer reset stem to retailer for service. The vehicle is acknowledge this message and safe to drive, however, you do not SERVICE AIR BAG clear it from the DIC display. For have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so This message displays if there is a more information see Ultrasonic reduce your speed and drive problem with the airbag system. Parking Assist on page 9‑32. accordingly. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SERVICE TRACTION system for problems. See Airbag CONTROL Readiness Light on page 5‑15 and If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Airbag System on page 3‑29 for Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, This message displays when there more information. this message displays if there is a is a problem with the Traction problem with the URPA system. Do Control System (TCS). When this Anti-Theft Alarm System not use this system to help you message is displayed, the system park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your Messages on page 9‑32 for more information. driving accordingly. See your dealer/ SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT See your dealer/retailer for service. retailer for service. See StabiliTrak SYSTEM System on page 9‑28 for more Ride Control System information. This message displays when there Messages is a problem with the theft-deterrent TRACTION CONTROL OFF system. The vehicle may or may not SERVICE STABILITRAK This message displays when the restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before This message displays if there is a Traction Control System (TCS) is ® turned off. Adjust your driving turning off the engine. See problem with the StabiliTrak Immobilizer Operation on system. If this message appears, try accordingly. See StabiliTrak System page 2‑14 for more information. to reset the system. Stop; turn off on page 9‑28 for more information. the engine for at least 15 seconds; This message clears itself after then start the engine again. If this 10 seconds. message still comes on, it means Instruments and Controls 5-39

THEFT ATTEMPTED heavier, but you will still be able to This message also displays LEFT steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right This message displays if the content serviced by your dealer/retailer front), LEFT RR (left rear), theft-deterrent system has detected immediately. or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate a break-in attempt while you were the location of the low tire. away from your vehicle. See SERVICE VEHICLE SOON Anti-Theft Alarm System on The low tire pressure warning light This message displays when a page 2‑13 for more information. will also come on. See Tire non-emissions related malfunction Pressure Light on page 5‑22. occurs. Have the vehicle serviced Service Vehicle Messages by your dealer/retailer as soon as If a tire pressure message appears possible. on the DIC, stop as soon as you SERVICE A/C (Air can. Inflate the tires by adding air Conditioning) SYSTEM STARTING DISABLED until the tire pressure is equal to the This message displays when the SERVICE THROTTLE values shown on the Tire Loading electronic sensors that control the This message displays when your Information label. See Tires on air conditioning and heating vehicle's throttle system is not page 10‑37, Vehicle Load Limits on systems are no longer working. functioning properly. Have your page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure on Have the climate control system vehicle serviced by your dealer/ page 10‑43. serviced by your dealer/retailer if retailer. You can receive more than one tire you notice a drop in heating and air pressure message at a time. To conditioning efficiency. Tire Messages read the other messages that may SERVICE POWER STEERING have been sent at the same time, TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE press the set/reset button or the trip This message displays when a On vehicles with the Tire Pressure odometer reset stem. The DIC also problem is detected with the power shows the tire pressure values. See steering system. When this Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays when the Driver Information Center (DIC) message is displayed, you may (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑24 or notice that the effort required to pressure in one or more of the steer the vehicle increases or feels vehicle's tires is low. 5-40 Instruments and Controls

Driver Information Center (DIC) TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE The AWD system is disabled until (Without DIC Buttons) on the compact spare tire is replaced This message displays when the page 5 30. by a full-size tire. If the warning ‑ Tire Pressure Monitor System message is still on after putting on (TPMS) is re-learning the tire SERVICE TIRE MONITOR the full-size tire, you need to reset positions on your vehicle. The tire SYSTEM the warning message. To reset the positions must be re-learned after warning message, turn the ignition On vehicles with the Tire Pressure rotating the tires or after replacing a off and then back on again after Monitor System (TPMS), this tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on 30 seconds. If the message stays message displays if a part on the page 10 49, Tire Pressure Monitor ‑ on, see your dealer/retailer right TPMS is not working properly. The System on page 10 44, and Tire ‑ away. See All-Wheel Drive on tire pressure light also flashes and Pressure on page 10 43 for more ‑ page 9 25 for more information. then remains on during the same information. ‑ ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE Light on page 5‑22. Several Transmission Messages conditions may cause this message If your vehicle has the All-Wheel to appear. See Tire Pressure ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF Drive (AWD) system, this message Monitor Operation on page 10‑46 for displays if there is a problem with more information. If the warning If your vehicle has the All-Wheel this system. If this message comes on and stays on, there may Drive (AWD) system, this message appears, stop as soon as possible be a problem with the TPMS. See displays when there is a compact and turn off the vehicle. Restart the your dealer/retailer. spare tire on the vehicle, when the vehicle after 30 seconds and check Antilock Brake System (ABS) for the message on the DIC display. warning light comes on, or when the If the message is still displayed or rear differential fluid is overheating. appears again when you begin This message turns off when the driving, the AWD system needs differential fluid cools. service. See your dealer/retailer. Instruments and Controls 5-41

SERVICE TRANSMISSION This message displays and a chime Vehicle Speed Messages sounds if the transmission fluid in This message displays when there the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the SPEED LIMITED TO is a problem with the transmission. transmission fluid temperature high XXX MPH (KM/H) See your dealer/retailer for service. can cause damage to the vehicle. This message displays when your Stop the vehicle and let it idle to TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph allow the transmission to cool. This ENGINE (128 km/h) because the vehicle message clears when the fluid detects a problem in the speed Notice: If you drive your vehicle temperature reaches a safe level. while the transmission fluid is variable assist steering system. overheating and the transmission Vehicle Reminder Have your vehicle serviced by your temperature warning is displayed dealer/retailer. on the instrument panel cluster Messages Washer Fluid Messages and/or DIC, you can damage the ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE transmission. This could lead to costly repairs that would not be WITH CARE WASHER FLUID LOW ADD covered by your warranty. Do not This message displays when the FLUID drive your vehicle with outside air temperature is cold This message displays when the overheated transmission fluid or enough to create icy road windshield washer fluid is low. Fill while the transmission conditions. Adjust your driving the windshield washer fluid reservoir temperature warning is displayed. accordingly. as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10‑6 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Washer Fluid on page 10‑21 for more information. 5-42 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle To change customization Feature Settings Menu Items preferences, use the following The following are customization Personalization procedure. features that allow you to program Vehicle Personalization Entering the Feature settings to the vehicle: Settings Menu (With DIC Buttons) DISPLAY IN ENGLISH 1. Turn the ignition on and place This feature will only display if a Your vehicle may have the vehicle in P (Park). language other than English has customization capabilities that allow been set. This feature allows you to you to program certain features to To avoid excessive drain on the change the language in which the one preferred setting. Customization battery, it is recommended that DIC messages appear to English. features can only be programmed to the headlamps are turned off. one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press the customization button Press the customization button until cannot be programmed to a to enter the feature the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN preferred setting for two different settings menu. ENGLISH screen appears on the drivers. If the menu is not available, DIC display. Press the set/reset All of the customization options may FEATURE SETTINGS button once to display all DIC not be available on your vehicle. AVAILABLE IN PARK will messages in English. Only the options available will be display. Before entering the DISPLAY LANGUAGE displayed on the DIC. menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park). This feature allows you to select the The default settings for the language in which the DIC customization features were set messages will appear. when your vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from their default state since then. The customization preferences are automatically recalled. Instruments and Controls 5-43

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK To select a setting, press the set/ the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen This feature allows you to select reset button while the desired appears on the DIC display. Press when the vehicle's doors will setting is displayed on the DIC. the set/reset button once to access automatically lock. See Automatic the settings for this feature. Then AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more press the customization button to information. This feature allows you to select scroll through the following settings: whether or not to turn off the Press the customization button until automatic door unlocking feature. ENGLISH (default): All messages AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the will appear in English. It also allows you to select which DIC display. Press the set/reset doors and when the doors will FRANCAIS: All messages will button once to access the settings automatically unlock. See Automatic appear in French. for this feature. Then press the Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more ESPANOL: All messages will customization button to scroll information. through the following settings: appear in Spanish. Press the customization button until NO CHANGE: No change will be SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on made to this feature. The current The doors will automatically lock the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting will remain. when the vehicle is shifted out of button once to access the settings P (Park). for this feature. Then press the To select a setting, press the set/ AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors customization button to scroll reset button while the desired through the following settings: setting is displayed on the DIC. will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph OFF: None of the doors will You can also change the language (13 km/h) for three seconds. automatically unlock. by pressing the trip odometer reset NO CHANGE: No change will be stem. See “Language” under Driver DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the Information Center (Without DIC made to this feature. The current driver's door will unlock when the Buttons) earlier in this section for setting will remain. key is taken out of the ignition. more information. 5-44 Instruments and Controls

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ driver's door will unlock when the REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on reset button while the desired vehicle is shifted into P (Park) . the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. button once to access the settings ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK will unlock when the key is taken for this feature. Then press the out of the ignition. customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive ALL IN PARK (default): All of the OFF: There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the doors will unlock when the vehicle is Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) shifted into P (Park). when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. transmitter. You will not receive NO CHANGE: No change will be feedback when unlocking the made to this feature. The current LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps vehicle with the RKE transmitter if setting will remain. will flash when you press the lock the doors are open. See Remote button on the RKE transmitter. Keyless Entry (RKE) System To select a setting, press the set/ HORN ONLY: The horn will sound Operation on page 2‑3 for more reset button while the desired information. setting is displayed on the DIC. on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN & LIGHTS (default): The REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears This feature allows you to select the exterior lamps will flash when you on the DIC display. Press the set/ type of feedback you will receive press the lock button on the RKE reset button once to access the when locking the vehicle with the transmitter, and the horn will sound settings for this feature. Then press Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) when the lock button is pressed the customization button to scroll transmitter. You will not receive again within five seconds of the through the following settings: feedback when locking the vehicle previous command. LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps with the RKE transmitter if the doors NO CHANGE: No change will be will not flash when you press the are open. See Remote Keyless made to this feature. The current unlock button on the RKE Entry (RKE) System Operation on setting will remain. transmitter. page 2‑3 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-45

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lock button on the RKE transmitter is dark enough outside. This lamps will flash when you press the twice. See Delayed Locking on happens after the key is turned from unlock button on the RKE page 2‑7 for more information. ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. transmitter. Press the customization button until Press the customization button until NO CHANGE: No change will be DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC made to this feature. The current the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button setting will remain. button once to access the settings once to access the settings for this To select a setting, press the set/ for this feature. Then press the feature. Then press the reset button while the desired customization button to scroll customization button to scroll setting is displayed on the DIC. through the following settings: through the following settings: OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not DELAY DOOR LOCK locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on. This feature allows you to select ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The whether or not the locking of the lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for vehicle's doors and liftgate will be door or the liftgate is closed. 30 seconds. delayed. When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will switch and a door or the liftgate is made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute. open, this feature will delay locking setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will the doors and liftgate until To select a setting, press the set/ stay on for two minutes. five seconds after the last door is reset button while the desired NO CHANGE: No change will be closed. You will hear three chimes setting is displayed on the DIC. to signal that the delayed locking made to this feature. The current feature is in use. The key must be EXIT LIGHTING setting will remain. out of the ignition for this feature to This feature allows you to select the To select a setting, press the set/ work. You can temporarily override amount of time you want the reset button while the desired delayed locking by pressing the exterior lamps to remain on when it setting is displayed on the DIC. power door lock switch twice or the 5-46 Instruments and Controls

APPROACH LIGHTING See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NO CHANGE: No change will be This feature allows you to select System Operation on page 2‑3 for made to this feature. The current whether or not to have the exterior more information. setting will remain. lights turn on briefly during low light NO CHANGE : No change will be There is no default for chime periods after unlocking the vehicle made to this feature. The current volume. The volume will stay at the using the Remote Keyless Entry setting will remain. last known setting. (RKE) transmitter. To select a setting, press the set/ To select a setting, press the set/ Press the customization button until reset button while the desired reset button while the desired APPROACH LIGHTING appears on setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC. the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings CHIME VOLUME PARK TILT MIRRORS for this feature. Then press the This feature allows you to select the If your vehicle has this feature, it customization button to scroll volume level of the chime. allows you to select whether or not through the following settings: Press the customization button until the outside mirror(s) will OFF: The exterior lights will not CHIME VOLUME appears on the automatically tilt down when the turn on when you unlock the vehicle DIC display. Press the set/reset vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). with the RKE transmitter. button once to access the settings See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑18 for more information. ON (default): If it is dark enough for this feature. Then press the outside, the exterior lights will turn customization button to scroll on briefly when you unlock the through the following settings: vehicle with the RKE transmitter. NORMAL: The chime volume will The lights will remain on for be set to a normal level. 20 seconds or until the lock button LOUD: The chime volume will be on the RKE transmitter is pressed, set to a loud level. or the vehicle is no longer off. Instruments and Controls 5-47

Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ The automatic easy exit seat PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on reset button while the desired movement will only occur one time the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. after the key is removed from the button once to access the settings ignition. If the automatic movement for this feature. Then press the EASY EXIT SEAT has already occurred, and you put customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it the key back in the ignition and through the following settings: allows you to select your preference remove it again, the seat and OFF (default): Neither outside for the automatic easy exit seat steering column will stay in the mirror will be tilted down when the feature. See Delayed Locking on original exit position, unless a vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). page 2‑7 for more information. memory recall took place prior to removing the key again. DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's Press the customization button until outside mirror will be tilted down EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the NO CHANGE: No change will be when the vehicle is shifted into DIC display. Press the set/reset made to this feature. The current R (Reverse). button once to access the settings setting will remain. for this feature. Then press the PASSENGER MIRROR: The To select a setting, press the set/ customization button to scroll reset button while the desired passenger's outside mirror will be through the following settings: tilted down when the vehicle is setting is displayed on the DIC. shifted into R (Reverse). OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur. MEMORY SEAT RECALL BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and ON: The driver's seat will move If your vehicle has this feature, it passenger's outside mirrors will be allows you to select your preference tilted down when the vehicle is back when the key is removed from the ignition. for the remote memory seat recall shifted into R (Reverse). feature. See Delayed Locking on NO CHANGE: No change will be page 2‑7 for more information. made to this feature. The current setting will remain. 5-48 Instruments and Controls

Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ NO CHANGE: No change will be MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears reset button while the desired made to this feature. The current on the DIC display. Press the set/ setting is displayed on the DIC. setting will remain. reset button once to access the REMOTE START To select a setting, press the set/ settings for this feature. Then press reset button while the desired the customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it setting is displayed on the DIC. through the following settings: allows you to turn the remote start OFF (default): No remote memory off or on. The remote start feature FACTORY SETTINGS seat recall will occur. allows you to start the engine from This feature allows you to set all of outside of the vehicle using the ON: The driver's seat and outside the customization features back to Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) their factory default settings. mirrors will automatically move to transmitter. See Remote Vehicle the stored driving position when the Start on page 2‑5 for more Press the customization button until unlock button on the Remote information. FACTORY SETTINGS appears on Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is the DIC display. Press the set/reset Press the customization button until pressed. See “Relearn Remote Key” button once to access the settings under Driver Information Center REMOTE START appears on the for this feature. Then press the (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on DIC display. Press the set/reset customization button to scroll button once to access the settings page 5‑24 or Driver Information through the following settings: Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll RESTORE ALL (default): The on page 5‑30 for more information through the following settings: customization features will be set to on matching transmitters to driver ID their factory default settings. numbers. OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled. DO NOT RESTORE: The NO CHANGE: No change will be customization features will not be made to this feature. The current ON (default): The remote start set to their factory default settings. setting will remain. feature will be enabled. Instruments and Controls 5-49

To select a setting, press the set/ Exiting the Feature Universal Remote reset button while the desired Settings Menu setting is displayed on the DIC. System The feature settings menu will be EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS exited when any of the following See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 16 for information regarding This feature allows you to exit the occurs: ‑ Part 15 of the Federal feature settings menu. . The vehicle is shifted out of Communications Commission (FCC) Press the customization button until P (Park). Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V . The vehicle is no longer in and Science Canada. TO EXIT appears in the DIC display. ON/RUN. Press the set/reset button once to . The trip/fuel or vehicle Universal Remote System exit the menu. information DIC buttons are Programming If you do not exit, pressing the pressed. customization button again will . The end of the feature settings return you to the beginning of the menu is reached and exited. feature settings menu. . A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made.

This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. 5-50 Instruments and Controls

Do not use the Universal Home When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices: Remote with any garage door park outside of the garage. Park opener that does not have the stop directly in line with and facing the and reverse feature. This includes garage door opener motor-head or any garage door opener model gate motor-head. Be sure that manufactured before April 1, 1982. people and objects are clear of the Read the instructions completely garage door or gate that is being before attempting to program the programmed. Universal Home Remote. Because It is recommended that a new of the steps involved, it may be battery be installed in your helpful to have another person hand-held transmitter for quicker available to assist you with and more accurate transmission of programming the Universal Home the radio-frequency signal. Remote. Programming the Universal 1. From inside the vehicle, press Keep the original hand-held Home Remote System and hold down the two outside transmitter for use in other vehicles buttons at the same time, as well as for future Universal Home For questions or help programming releasing only when the Remote programming. It is also the Universal Home Remote Universal Home Remote recommended that upon the sale of System, call 1-800-355-3515 or go indicator light begins to flash, the vehicle, the programmed to www.homelink.com. after 20 seconds. This step will Universal Home Remote buttons Programming a garage door opener erase the factory settings or all should be erased for security involves time-sensitive actions, so previously programmed buttons. purposes. See “Erasing Universal read the entire procedure before Home Remote Buttons” later in this starting. Otherwise, the device will Do not hold down the buttons for section. time out and the procedure will have longer than 30 seconds and do to be repeated. not repeat this step to program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons. Instruments and Controls 5-51

2. Hold the end of your hand-held 4. The indicator light on the to a constant light, continue transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to Universal Home Remote will with the programming 3 inches) away from the flash slowly at first and then Steps 6 through 8. Universal Home Remote buttons rapidly after Universal Home It may be helpful to have while keeping the indicator light Remote successfully receives another person assist with in view. The hand-held the frequency signal from the the remaining steps. transmitter was supplied by the hand-held transmitter. Release manufacturer of your garage both buttons. door opener receiver (motor 5. Press and hold the newly-trained head unit). Universal Home Remote button 3. At the same time, press and and observe the indicator light. hold both the Universal Home . If the indicator light stays on Remote button to be used to continuously, the control the garage door and the programming is complete hand-held transmitter button. Do and the garage door should not release the Universal Home move when the Universal Remote button or the hand-held Home Remote button is transmitter button until Step 4 pressed and released. has been completed. There is no need to Some entry gates and garage continue programming 6. After Steps 1 through 5 have door openers may require Steps 6 through 8. been completed, locate inside substitution of Step 3 with the the garage the garage door . If the Universal Home opener receiver (motor-head procedure noted in “Gate Remote indicator light unit). Locate the Learn or Operator and Canadian blinks rapidly for “ ” Smart button. The name and Programming” later in this two seconds and then turns “ ” section. color of the button may vary by manufacturer. 5-52 Instruments and Controls

7. Firmly press and release the To program the remaining two If you live in Canada, or you are “Learn” or “Smart” button. After Universal Home Remote buttons, having difficulty programming a gate you press this button, you will begin with Step 2 of “Programming operator or garage door opener by have 30 seconds to complete the Universal Home Remote using the “Programming Universal Step 8. System.” Do not repeat Step 1, as Home Remote” procedures, 8. Immediately return to the this will erase all previous regardless of where you live, vehicle. Firmly press and hold programming from the Universal replace Step 3 under “Programming the Universal Home Remote Home Remote buttons. Universal Home Remote” with the following: button, selected in Step 3 to Gate Operator and Canadian control the garage door, for Programming Continue to press and hold the two seconds, and then release Universal Home Remote button it. If the garage door does not If you have questions or need help while you press and release every move, press and hold the same programming the Universal Home two seconds (cycle) the hand-held button a second time for Remote System, call transmitter button until the two seconds, and then release 1-800-355-3515 or go to frequency signal has been it. Again, if the door does not www.homelink.com. successfully accepted by the move, press and hold the same Canadian radio-frequency laws Universal Home Remote. The button a third time for require transmitter signals to time Universal Home Remote indicator two seconds, and then release. out or quit after several seconds of light will flash slowly at first and then The Universal Home Remote transmission. This may not be long rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under should now activate the enough for Universal Home Remote “Programming Universal Home garage door. to pick up the signal during Remote” to complete the training programming. Similarly, some U.S. procedure. gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner. Instruments and Controls 5-53

Universal Remote System To erase all programmed buttons on Reprogramming a Single Operation the Universal Remote device: Universal Remote Button To reprogram any of the three Using Universal Remote Universal Remote buttons, repeat Press and hold the appropriate the programming instructions earlier Universal Remote button for at least in this section, beginning with half of a second. The indicator light Step 2. will come on while the signal is For help or information on the being transmitted. Universal Home Remote System, Erasing Universal Remote call the customer assistance phone Buttons number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 13‑4. All programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. 5-54 Instruments and Controls

2 NOTES Lighting 6-1

Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control ...... 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls Exterior Lighting Courtesy Lamps ...... 6-5 Dome Lamps ...... 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 Reading Lamps ...... 6-6 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ...... 6-2 Lighting Features Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Daytime Running Lamps Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 6-7 System ...... 6-3 Parade Dimming ...... 6-7 Delayed Headlamps ...... 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 Battery Power Protection ...... 6-8 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...... 6-4 Fog Lamps ...... 6-5 The exterior lamps control is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. 6-2 Lighting

It controls the following systems: ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the Headlamp High/ parking lamps together with the . Headlamps following: Low-Beam Changer . Taillamps 2 3 . Taillamps Headlamp High/Low Beam . Parking Lamps Changer: Push the turn signal/lane . License Plate Lamps change lever away from you to turn . License Plate Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights the high beams on. . Instrument Panel Lights 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the Pull the lever towards you to return . Fog Lamps (If Equipped) headlamps together with the to low beams. The exterior lamps control has four following lamps listed below. positions: A warning chime sounds if the driver door is opened when the ignition O (Off): Turns the automatic light switch is off and the headlamps control on or off. are on. AUTO (Automatic): Automatically . Parking Lamps turns on the headlamps at normal brightness, together with the . Taillamps This indicator light turns on in the instrument panel cluster when the following: . License Plate Lamps high beam headlamps are on. . Parking Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights . Taillamps # (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped): . License Plate Lamps Turns on the fog lamps. . Instrument Panel Lights See Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. Lighting 6-3

Flash-to-Pass The DRL system makes either the darkness of the surroundings. The low-beam headlamps come on at a other lamps that come on with the This feature is used to signal to the reduced brightness or the DRL headlamps will also come on. vehicle ahead that you want lights, for vehicles with High to pass. When it is bright enough outside, Intensity Discharge (HID) the headlamps will go off and the If the headlamps are off or in the headlamps when the following DRL will come on. low-beam position, pull the turn conditions are met: The regular headlamp system signal lever toward you to . The ignition is in the ON/RUN should be turned on when needed. momentarily switch to high-beams. position. Do not cover the light sensor on top Release the lever to turn the . The exterior lamps control is high-beam headlamps off. of the instrument panel because it in AUTO. works with the DRL. Daytime Running Lamps . The engine is running. Delayed Headlamps (DRL)/Automatic When the DRL are on, the regular Headlamp System headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, Delayed headlamps provide a and other lamps will not be on. The period of exterior lighting as you Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can instrument panel and cluster will leave the area around the vehicle. make it easier for others to see the also not be lit. This feature is activated when the front of your vehicle during the day. For vehicles with HID headlamps, headlamps are on due to the Fully functional daytime running if the DRL are on and the left or automatic headlamps control lamps are required on all vehicles right turn signal lamp is turned on, feature, and when the ignition is first sold in Canada. the left or right DRL will go off. turned off. The headlamps remain on until the exterior lamps control is The headlamps automatically moved to the parking lamps position change from DRL to the regular or until the pre-selected delayed headlamps depending on the headlamp lighting period has ended. 6-4 Lighting

If the ignition is turned off with the Turn and Lane-Change Raise or lower the lever until the exterior lamp control in the parking arrow starts to flash to signal a lane lamps or headlamps position, the Signals change. Hold it there until the lane delayed headlamps cycle will not change is completed. If the lever is occur. briefly pressed and released, the To disable the delayed headlamps turn signal flashes three times. feature or change the time of delay, The lever returns to its starting see Vehicle Personalization (With position whenever it is released. DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42. If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes rapidly or Hazard Warning Flashers does not come on, a signal bulb | Hazard Warning Flasher: might be burned out. Press this button located on the Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb instrument panel below the audio is not burned out, check the fuse. system, to make the front and rear See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on turn signal lamps flash on and off. An arrow on the instrument panel page 10‑31. This warns others that you are cluster flashes in the direction of the having trouble. Press again to turn turn or lane change. Turn Signal On Chime the flashers off. Move the lever all the way up or If either one of the turn signals are The turn signals do not work while down to signal a turn. left on and the vehicle has been the hazard warning flashers are on. driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound. Lighting 6-5

Fog Lamps Interior Lighting Courtesy Lamps # (Fog Lamps): For vehicles with The courtesy lamps automatically fog lamps, the button is located on Instrument Panel come on when a door is opened. the exterior lamps control. The Illumination Control The lamps can also be turned on exterior lamps control is on the manually by fully turning the instrument panel to the left of the D (Instrument Panel instrument panel brightness control steering column. Brightness): The knob with this clockwise. symbol on it is next to the exterior The ignition must be in the ON/RUN lamps control to the left of the The reading lamps, located on the position for the fog lamps to steering wheel. Push the knob in all headliner above the rearview mirror, come on. the way until it extends out and then can be turned on or off independent # turn the knob clockwise or of the automatic courtesy lamps, Press to turn the fog lamps on or when the doors are closed. off. A light will come on in the counterclockwise to brighten or dim instrument panel cluster. the lights. Push the knob back in when finished. Dome Lamps When the headlamps are changed The dome lamps are located in the to high-beam, the fog lamps also overhead console and above the go off. rear seat passengers. Some localities have laws that The dome lamps automatically require the headlamps to be on come on when a door is opened, along with the fog lamps. unless the dome lamp override button is pressed in. 6-6 Lighting

The lamps can also be turned on Lighting Features When the ignition is on, illuminated and off by turning the instrument entry is inactive, which means the panel brightness control clockwise courtesy lamps will not come on to the farthest position. Entry Lighting unless a door is opened. Dome Lamp Override For vehicles with courtesy lamps, they come on and stay on for a set Delayed Entry Lighting The dome lamp override button is time whenever the unlock symbol is Delayed entry lighting illuminates next to the exterior lamps control. pressed on the Remote Keyless the interior for a period of time after Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the E (Dome Lamp Override): Press all the doors have been closed. the button in and the dome lamps vehicle has one. The ignition must be off for delayed remain off when a door is opened. If a door is opened, the lamps stay entry lighting to work. Immediately Press the button again to return it to on while it is open and then turn off after all the doors have been closed, the extended position so that the automatically about 20 seconds the delayed entry lighting feature dome lamps come on when a door after the door is closed. If the unlock continues to work until one of the is opened. symbol is pressed and no door is following occurs: opened, the lamps turn off after Reading Lamps about 20 seconds. . The ignition is in ON/RUN. Press the button near each lamp to Entry lighting includes a feature . The doors are locked. turn them on or off. called theater dimming. With theater . An illumination period of about dimming, the lamps do not turn off 25 seconds has elapsed. at the end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim and then If during the illumination period a go out. The delay time is canceled if door is opened, the timed the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN illumination period is canceled and or the power door lock switch is the interior lamps remain on. pressed. The lamps will dim right away. Lighting 6-7

Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Delayed exit lighting illuminates the This feature automatically prohibits Center (DIC), you may see the interior for a period of time after the the dimming of the instrument panel voltage move up or down. This is key is removed from the ignition. displays in daylight while the normal. If there is a problem, an The ignition must be off for delayed headlamps are on so that the alert will be displayed. displays are still able to be seen. exit lighting to work. When the key The battery can be discharged at is removed, interior illumination Battery Load idle if the electrical loads are very activates and remains on until one high. This is true for all vehicles. of the following occurs: Management This is because the generator . The ignition is in ON/RUN. The vehicle has Electric Power (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the . Management (EPM) that estimates The power door locks are power that is needed for very high activated. the battery's temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage electrical loads. . An illumination period of for best performance and extended A high electrical load occurs when 20 seconds has elapsed. life of the battery. several of the following are on, such If during the illumination period a When the battery's state of charge as: headlamps, high beams, fog door is opened, the timed is low, the voltage is raised slightly lamps, rear window defogger, illumination period will be canceled to quickly bring the charge back up. climate control fan at high speed, and the interior lamps will remain on When the state of charge is high, heated seats, engine cooling fans, because a door is open. the voltage is lowered slightly to trailer loads, and loads plugged into prevent overcharging. If the vehicle accessory power outlets. 6-8 Lighting

EPM works to prevent excessive Battery Power Protection discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output This feature helps prevent the and the vehicle's electrical needs. battery from being drained, if the It can increase engine idle speed to interior courtesy lamps, reading/map generate more power, whenever lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk needed. It can temporarily reduce lamp are accidentally left on. If any the power demands of some of these lamps are left on, they accessories. automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The Normally, these actions occur in lamps will not come back on again steps or levels, without being until one of the following occurs: noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, . The ignition is turned on. this action may be noticeable to the . The exterior lamps control is driver. If so, a Driver Information turned off, then on again. Center (DIC) message might be displayed, such as BATTERY The headlamps will timeout after SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY 10 minutes, if they are manually VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. turned on while the ignition is on If one of these messages displays, it or off. is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑24 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30. Infotainment System 7-1

Audio Players Introduction Infotainment CD Player ...... 7-12 System CD/DVD Player ...... 7-14 Read the following pages to MP3 (Radio with CD and become familiar with the audio Radio with CD/USB) ...... 7-21 system's features. Introduction MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) . . . 7-27 Introduction ...... 7-1 Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-33 { WARNING Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 Rear Seat Infotainment Operation ...... 7-2 Taking your eyes off the road for Rear Seat Entertainment extended periods could cause a Radio (RSE) System ...... 7-35 crash resulting in injury or death Rear Seat Audio (RSA) AM-FM Radio ...... 7-6 to you or others. Do not give System ...... 7-43 Satellite Radio ...... 7-7 extended attention to Radio Reception ...... 7-11 Phone entertainment tasks while driving. Multi-Band Antenna ...... 7-11 Bluetooth ...... 7-45 This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings. To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked: . Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. 7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speaker Operation adjustments, and preset radio stations. For more information, see Defensive Driving on page 9‑2. The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑17 for more information. Navigation/Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the separate Navigation System manual.

Theft-Deterrent Feature Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB similar THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle. Infotainment System 7-3

System on page 7‑35 for more information on the vehicle's RSE system. The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Playing the Radio Radio with CD, DVD, and USB O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to The vehicle may have one of these explained later in this section under, increase or decrease the volume. radios as its audio system. “Adjusting the Speakers For vehicles with a Rear (Balance/Fade)”. Radios with CD, DVD, and USB Entertainment System (RSE), press If the vehicle has a Rear Seat and hold for more than two seconds Radios with CD, DVD, and USB to turn off the entire radio and RSE ® Entertainment (RSE) system, it has have a Bose Surround Sound a CD, DVD, and USB radio. See system and to start the parental System. Some of its features are Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) control feature. Parental control 7-4 Infotainment System prevents the rear seat occupant Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, compensate for road and wind noise from operating the Rear Seat Audio CD, MP3, and WMA features): If as the vehicle speeds up or slows (RSA) system or remote control. additional information is available down, so that the volume level is A lock symbol displays next to the for the current song being played, consistent. clock display while the parental Auto Text will automatically page/ To activate SCV: control feature is being used. The scroll the information every five seconds above the FAV presets 1. Set the radio volume. feature remains on until O is on the radio display. pressed and held for more than 2. Press the MENU button to two seconds, or the driver turns the To activate Auto Text: display the radio setup menu. ignition off and exits the vehicle. 1. Press MENU to display the radio 3. Press the softkey under the 4 (Information): Press to switch setup menu. AUTO VOLUM (automatic volume) tab on the radio display. the display between the radio 2. Press the softkey under AUTO station frequency and the time. TXT tab on the radio display. 4. Press the softkey under the When the ignition is in the OFF Speed Compensated Volume 4 3. Press the softkey under the ON setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) position, press to display the time. tab on the radio display. For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA or to select the level of radio 4 volume compensation. Press the RDS features, press 4 to display If is pressed and the song title or artist information is longer than what softkey located below the BACK additional text information related to tab on the MENU SETUP the current FM-RDS or XM station; can be displayed, the extra information will page every display or let the display time out or CD, MP3 or WMA song. after approximately 10 seconds. If information is available during XM, five seconds when Auto Text is activated. Each higher setting allows for CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the more radio volume song title information displays on Speed Compensated Volume compensation at faster vehicle the top line of the display and artist (SCV): The Speed Compensated speeds. information displays on the bottom Volume (SCV) feature automatically line. When information is not adjusts the radio volume to available, “NO INFO” is displayed. Infotainment System 7-5

Setting the Tone (Bass/ To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Adjusting the Speakers Midrange/Treble) or treble to the middle position, (Balance/Fade) press the softkey under the BASS, BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, MID, or TREB tab for more than BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To or Treble): To adjust bass, two seconds. A beep sounds and adjust the balance or fade: midrange, or treble: the level adjusts to the middle 1. Press f until the speaker control 1. Press f until the tone control position. tabs display. tabs display. To quickly adjust all tone and 2. Continue pressing f to highlight f speaker controls to the middle 2. Continue pressing to highlight f the tab, or press the softkey the tab, or press the softkey position, press for more than under the tab. two seconds until a beep sounds. under the tab. 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, EQ (Equalization): Press to do one of the following until the do one of the following until the choose bass and treble equalization levels are obtained. levels are obtained. settings designed for different types of music. The choices are pop, rock, . Turn f clockwise or . Turn f clockwise or country, talk, jazz, and classical. counterclockwise. counterclockwise. Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the . Press \ FWD, . Press \ FWD, manual bass and treble settings. or s REV. or s REV. Unique EQ settings can be saved To quickly adjust balance or fade to If a station's frequency is weak or if for each source. the middle position, press the there is static, decrease the treble. If the radio has a Bose® audio softkey under the BAL or FADE tab system, the EQ settings are either for more than two seconds. A beep MANUAL or TALK. sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. 7-6 Infotainment System

To quickly adjust all speaker and Radio Messages Radio tone controls to the middle position, f Calibration Error: The audio press for more than two seconds system has been calibrated for the AM-FM Radio until a beep sounds. vehicle from the factory. Radios with CD and DVD fade If Calibration Error displays, it Radio Data System (RDS) differently depending on the DVD means that the radio has not been The Radio Data System (RDS) Media type: configured properly for the vehicle feature is available for use only on and it must be returned to your FM stations that broadcast RDS . With DVD-A 5.1 Surround dealer/retailer for service. media, the left front and right information. This system relies upon front speakers fade rearward, Locked: This message displays receiving specific information from ® leaving the center front speakers when the THEFTLOCK system has these stations and only works when unaffected until the last fade locked up the radio. Take the the information is available. While step, then all front vehicle to your dealer/retailer for the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS speakers mute. service. station, the station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio . With DVD-V 5.1 Surround If any error occurs repeatedly or if station could broadcast incorrect media, surround sound is an error cannot be corrected, information that causes the radio maintained until Step 4 of the contact your dealer/retailer. features to work improperly. If this Fade control is reached while happens, contact the radio station. fading rearward. At that point the audio system output changes to Finding a Station Stereo to prevent the loss of BAND: Press to switch between Center channel output when the AM, FM, or XM. The selection full rearward fade position is displays. reached. f (Tune): Turn to select radio If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is stations. turned on, the radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers. Infotainment System 7-7

© SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the tabs and by using the radio favorites To setup the number of favorites previous or to the next station and page button (FAV button). Press to pages: stay there. go through up to six pages of 1. Press MENU to display the radio favorites, each having six favorite setup menu. To scan stations, press and hold © stations available per page. Each or ¨ until a beep sounds. The page of favorites can contain any 2. Press the softkey below the radio goes to a station, plays for a combination of AM, FM, or XM FAV 1-6 tab. few seconds, then goes to the next stations. 3. Select the desired number of station. Press either arrow again to The balance/fade and tone settings favorites pages by pressing the stop scanning. that were previously adjusted, are softkey below the displayed The radio only seeks and scans stored with the favorite stations. page numbers. stations with a strong signal that are To store a station as a favorite: 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time in the selected band. out, to return to the original main 1. Tune to the desired radio station. radio screen showing the radio Storing a Radio Station as a 2. Press FAV to display the page to station frequency tabs and to Favorite store the station. begin the process of Drivers are encouraged to set up 3. Press and hold one of the programming favorites for the their radio station favorites while the six softkeys until a beep sounds. chosen amount of numbered vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to When that softkey is pressed pages. favorite stations using the presets, and released, the station that favorites button, and steering wheel was set, returns. Satellite Radio controls. See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5‑3. 4. Repeat the steps for each radio XM™ Satellite Radio Service station to be stored as a favorite. FAV (Favorites): A maximum of XM is a satellite radio service that is 36 stations can be programmed as based in the 48 contiguous United favorites using the six softkeys States and 10 Canadian provinces. below the radio station frequency XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and 7-8 Infotainment System commercial-free music, Finding a Category (CAT) 5. To go to the next or previous XM coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality Station station within the selected sound. For more information, category, do one of the contact XM at www.xmradio.com or CAT (Category): The CAT button is following: call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and used to find XM™ stations when the . f www.xmradio.ca or call radio is in the XM mode. To find XM Turn . channels within a desired category: 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. . Press the buttons below the 1. Press BAND until the XM Finding a Station right or left arrows on the frequency displays. display. BAND: Press to switch between 2. Press CAT to display the . Press either SEEK arrow. AM, FM, or XM. The selection category tabs. displays. 6. To exit the category search 3. Continue pressing CAT until the mode, press the FAV button or f (Tune): Turn to select radio desired category name displays. BAND button to display the stations. . Radios with CD and DVD favorites again. SEEK : Press to go to the © ¨ can also navigate the Undesired XM categories can be previous or to the next station and category list by pressing removed through the setup menu. stay there. s REV or \ FWD. To remove an undesired category, To scan stations, press and hold © 4. Press either of the two buttons perform the following: or ¨ until a beep sounds. The below the desired category tab 1. Press MENU to display the radio radio goes to a station, plays for a to immediately tune to the first setup menu. XM station associated with that few seconds, then goes to the next 2. Press the softkey below the XM category. station. Press either arrow again to CAT tab. stop scanning. 3. Turn f to display the category to The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal that are be removed. in the selected band. Infotainment System 7-9

4. Press the softkey under the FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To setup the number of favorites Remove tab until the category 36 stations can be programmed as pages: name along with the word favorites using the six softkeys 1. Press MENU to display the radio Removed displays. below the radio station frequency setup menu. tabs and by using the radio favorites 5. Repeat the steps to remove 2. Press the softkey below the more categories. page button (FAV button). Press to go through up to six pages of FAV 1-6 tab. Removed categories can be favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the desired number of restored by pressing the softkey stations available per page. Each favorites pages by pressing the under the Add tab when a removed page of favorites can contain any softkey below the displayed category is displayed or by pressing combination of AM, FM, or XM page numbers. the softkey under the Restore stations. All tab. 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time The balance/fade and tone settings out, to return to the original main Categories cannot be removed or that were previously adjusted, are radio screen showing the radio added while the vehicle is moving stored with the favorite stations. station frequency tabs and to faster than 8 km/h (5 mph). To store a station as a favorite: begin the process of programming favorites for the Storing a Radio Station as a 1. Tune to the desired radio station. Favorite chosen amount of numbered 2. Press FAV to display the page to pages. Drivers are encouraged to set up store the station. their radio station favorites while the XM™ Radio Messages 3. Press and hold one of the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to XL (Explicit Language favorite stations using the presets, six softkeys until a beep sounds. When that softkey is pressed Channels): These channels, or any favorites button, and steering wheel others, can be blocked at a controls. See Steering Wheel and released, the station that was set, returns. customer's request, by calling Controls on page 5‑3. 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). 4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored as a favorite. 7-10 Infotainment System

XM Updating: The encryption code If this station was one of the XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the receiver is being updated, and presets, choose another station for in the vehicle could have previously no action is required. This process that preset button. been in another vehicle. For security should take no longer than No Artist Info: No artist purposes, XM receivers cannot be 30 seconds. information is available at this time swapped between vehicles. If this No XM Signal: The system is on this channel. The system is message is received after having functioning correctly, but the vehicle working properly. the vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer. is in a location that is blocking the No Title Info: No song title XM™ signal. When the vehicle is information is available at this time XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, moved into an open area, the signal on this channel. The system is this message alternates with the should return. working properly. XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. Loading XM: The audio system is This label is needed to activate the No CAT Info: No category service. acquiring and processing audio and information is available at this time text data. No action is needed. This on this channel. The system is Unknown: If this message is message should disappear shortly. working properly. received when tuned to channel 0, Channel Off Air: This channel is there could be a receiver fault. No Information: No text or Consult with your dealer/retailer. not currently in service. Tune in to informational messages are another channel. available at this time on this Check XM Receivr: If this Channel Unauth : This channel is channel. The system is working message does not clear within a blocked or cannot be received with properly. short period of time, the receiver your XM Subscription package. could have a fault. Consult with your CAT Not Found: There are no dealer/retailer. Channel Unavail: This previously channels available for the selected assigned channel is no longer category. The system is working XM Not Available: If this message assigned. Tune to another station. properly. does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer/ retailer. Infotainment System 7-11

Radio Reception reception, most AM radio stations or simply having the phone on. This boost the power levels during the interference can cause an increased Frequency interference and static day, and then reduce these levels level of static while listening to the can occur during normal radio during the night. Static can also radio. If static is received while reception if items such as cell phone occur when things like storms and listening to the radio, unplug the chargers, vehicle convenience power lines interfere with radio cellular phone and turn it off. accessories, and external electronic reception. When this happens, try devices are plugged into the reducing the treble on the radio. Multi-Band Antenna accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the XM™ Satellite Radio Service The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle. This type item from the accessory power XM Satellite Radio Service gives outlet. of antenna is used with the AM/FM digital radio reception from ® coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous radio, as well as OnStar and the FM XM Satellite Radio Service United States, and in Canada. Just ™ System, if the vehicle has these FM signals only reach about 16 to as with FM, tall buildings or hills can 65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the interfere with satellite radio signals, features. Keep this antenna clear of radio has a built-in electronic circuit causing the sound to fade in and snow and ice build up for clear radio reception. If the vehicle has a that automatically works to reduce out. In addition, traveling or standing sunroof, the performance of the interference, some static can occur, under heavy foliage, bridges, especially around tall buildings or garages, or tunnels may cause loss radio system may be affected if the sunroof is open. Loading items onto hills, causing the sound to fade in of the XM signal for a period of time. and out. the roof of the vehicle can interfere Cellular Phone Usage with the performance of the radio AM system and, if the vehicle has this Cellular phone usage may cause feature, OnStar®. Make sure the The range for most AM stations is interference with the vehicle's radio. greater than for FM, especially at multi-band antenna is not This interference may occur when obstructed. night. The longer range can cause making or receiving phone calls, station frequencies to interfere with charging the phone's battery, each other. For better radio 7-12 Infotainment System

Audio Players If either arrow is held, or pressed BAND: Press to listen to the radio multiple times, the player continues when a CD is playing. The CD moving backward or forward remains inside the radio for future CD Player through the tracks on the CD. listening. Playing a CD s REV (Fast Reverse): Press CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to Insert a CD partway into the slot, and hold to reverse playback quickly select between CD, or Auxiliary. within a track. Sound will be heard label side up. The player pulls it in . When a CD is in the player the and the CD should begin playing. at a reduced volume. Release to CD icon and a message resume playing the track. The showing the disc and/or track Z EJECT : Press and release to elapsed time of the track displays. eject the disc that is currently number displays. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press playing. A beep sounds and . If an auxiliary input device is not and hold to advance playback Ejecting Disc displays. Once the connected, “No Input Device quickly within a track. Sound will be disc is ejected, Remove Disc Found” displays. displays. The disc can be removed. heard at a reduced volume. Release If the disc is not removed, after to resume playing the track. The Care of CDs several seconds, the disc elapsed time of the track displays. If playing a CD-R, the sound quality automatically pulls back into the RDM (Random): CD tracks can be can be reduced due to CD-R or player. listened to in random, rather than CD-RW quality, the method of f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on sequential order with the random recording, the quality of the music the CD that is currently playing. setting. To use random, press the that has been recorded, and the softkey under the RDM label until way the CD-R or CD-RW has been © SEEK ¨ : Press © to go to Random Current Disc displays. handled. Handle them carefully. the start of the current track, if more Press the softkey again to turn off Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their than ten seconds on the CD have random play. original cases or other protective played. Press ¨ to go to the next cases and away from direct sunlight track. and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the Infotainment System 7-13 surface of a CD is damaged, such Notice: If a label is added to a CD Messages as cracked, broken, or scratched, CD, or more than one CD is CHECK DISC: Radios with a the CD does not play properly or not inserted into the slot at a time, Single CD player display CHECK at all. Do not touch the bottom side or an attempt is made to play DISC and/or ejects the CD if an of a CD while handling it; this could scratched or damaged CDs, the error occurs. damage the surface. Pick up CDs CD player could be damaged. by grasping the outer edges or the While using the CD player, use Optical Error: The disc was edge of the hole and the outer edge. only CDs in good condition inserted upside down. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take without any label, load one CD at Disk Read Error: A disc was a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a a time, and keep the CD player inserted with an invalid or unknown clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral and the loading slot free of format. detergent solution mixed with water, foreign materials, liquids, and debris. Player Error: There are disc LOAD and clean it. Make sure the wiping or disc EJECT problems. process starts from the center to If an error displays, see “CD the edge. Messages” later in this section. . It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, Care of the CD Player Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or the CD should play. CD-RW Disc Do not add any label to a CD, it . The road is very rough. When could get caught in the CD player. The radio has the capability of the road becomes smoother, the If a CD is recorded on a personal playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD should play. computer and a description label is CD-RW disc. For more information . The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, needed, try labeling the top of the on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or upside down. recorded CD with a marking pen. or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio The use of CD lens cleaners for with CD and Radio with CD/USB) . The air is very humid. If so, wait CDs is not advised. on page 7‑21 or MP3 (Radio with about an hour and try again. CD/DVD) on page 7‑27. 7-14 Infotainment System

. There could have been a If the ignition or radio is turned off, If the disc is not removed, after problem while burning the CD. while a CD is in the player, it stays several seconds, the disc . The label could be caught in the in the player. When the ignition or automatically pulls back into the CD player. radio is turned on, the CD starts player. playing where it stopped, if it was If the CD is not playing correctly for Z DVD (Eject): Press and the last selected audio source. The release to eject the disc that is any other reason, try a known CD is controlled by the buttons on good CD. currently playing in the top slot. the radio faceplate or by the RSA A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc If any error occurs repeatedly or if unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) displays. an error cannot be corrected, System on page 7‑43 for more contact your dealer/retailer. If the information. The DVD/CD decks, If loading and reading of a disc radio displays an error message, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the cannot be completed, and the disc write it down and provide it to your lower slot is the CD deck) of the fails to eject, press and hold Z dealer/retailer when reporting the radio are compatible with most DVD for more than five seconds to problem. audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and force the disc to eject. MP3/WMAs. f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on CD/DVD Player When a CD is inserted, the text the CD that is currently playing. Playing a CD (In Either the label DVD or CD symbol displays on the left side of the radio display. As © SEEK ¨ : Press © to go to DVD or CD Slot) each new track starts to play, the the start of the current track if the Insert a CD partway into the slot, track number displays. track has played more than five seconds. If the track has played label side up. The player pulls it in Z CD (Eject): Press and release and the CD should begin playing less than five seconds the previous to eject the disc that is currently track will play. (loading a disc into the system, playing. The disc ejects from the depending on media type and bottom slot. A beep sounds and Press ¨ to go to the next track. format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Ejecting Disc displays. Once the for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a disc is ejected, Remove Disc DVD to begin playing). displays. The disc can be removed. Infotainment System 7-15

If either arrow is held, or pressed BAND: Press to listen to the radio If a disc is inserted into the top DVD multiple times, the player continues when a CD or DVD is playing. The slot, the rear seat operator can turn moving backward or forward CD or DVD remains inside the radio on the video screen and use the through the tracks on the CD. for future listening or for viewing remote control to only navigate the s REV (Fast Reverse): Press entertainment. CD tracks through the remote and hold to reverse playback quickly DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to control. within a track. Sound will be heard select between DVD, CD, See “Using the Auxiliary Input at a reduced volume. Release to or Auxiliary. Jack(s)” later in this section, resume playing the track. The or Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks under, . If an auxiliary input device is not “ ” elapsed time of the track displays. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) connected, “No Aux Input System on page 7 35 for more \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Device” displays. ‑ and hold to advance playback information. . When a disc is in either slot, the quickly within a track. Sound will be DVD/CD text tab and a message Care of CDs and DVDs heard at a reduced volume. Release showing the track or chapter If playing a CD-R, the sound quality to resume playing the track. The number displays. elapsed time of the track displays. can be reduced due to CD-R or . If an auxiliary input device is not CD-RW quality, the method of RDM (Random): CD tracks can be connected, and a disc is in both recording, the quality of the music listened to in random, rather than the DVD slot and the CD slot the that has been recorded, and the sequential order with the random DVD/CD AUX button only cycles way the CD-R or CD-RW has been setting. To use random, press the between the two sources and handled. Handle them carefully. softkey under the RDM tab until does not indicate “No Aux Input Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their Random Current Disc displays. Device”. original cases or other protective Press the softkey again to turn off cases and away from direct sunlight random play. . If a front auxiliary input device is and dust. The CD or DVD player connected, the DVD/CD AUX scans the bottom surface of the button cycles through all disc. If the surface of a CD is available options. 7-16 Infotainment System damaged, such as cracked, broken, Notice: If a label is added to a Front seat passengers can listen to or scratched, the CD does not play CD, or more than one CD is the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by properly or not at all. Do not touch inserted into the slot at a time, pressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX to the bottom side of a CD while or an attempt is made to play select the CD slot, DVD slot, front or handling it; this could damage the scratched or damaged CDs, the rear auxiliary input (if available). surface. Pick up CDs by grasping CD player could be damaged. If a playback device is plugged into the outer edges or the edge of the While using the CD player, use the radio’s front auxiliary input jack hole and the outer edge. only CDs in good condition or the rear auxiliary jack, the front If the surface of a CD is soiled, take without any label, load one CD at seat passengers are able to listen to a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a a time, and keep the CD player playback from this source through and the loading slot free of clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral the vehicle speakers. See “Using foreign materials, liquids, and detergent solution mixed with water, the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in debris. and clean it. Make sure the wiping this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) process starts from the center to If an error displays, see “CD Jacks” under, Rear Seat the edge. Messages” later in this section. Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7‑35 for more information. Care of the CD and DVD Player Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output In some vehicles, depending on Do not add any label to a CD, it audio options, the rear speakers could get caught in the CD or DVD Only one audio source can be heard can be muted when the RSA power player. If a CD is recorded on a through the speakers at one time. is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio personal computer and a description An audio source is defined as DVD (RSA) System on page 7‑43 for label is needed, try labeling the top slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front more information. of the recorded CD with a Auxiliary Jack, or Rear marking pen. Auxiliary Jack. Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc The use of CD lens cleaners for Press O to turn the radio on. The CDs is not advised. radio can be heard through all of the The radio has the capability of vehicle speakers. playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information Infotainment System 7-17 on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R . There could have been a The DVD player is only compatible or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio problem while burning the CD. with DVDs of the appropriate region with CD and Radio with CD/USB) . The label could be caught in the code that is printed on the jacket of on page 7‑21 or MP3 (Radio with CD player. most DVDs. CD/DVD) on page 7‑27. If the CD is not playing correctly for The DVD slot of the radio is CD Messages any other reason, try a known compatible with most audio CDs, good CD. CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, Optical Error: The disc was DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/ inserted upside down. If any error occurs repeatedly or if RW media along with MP3 and an error cannot be corrected, Disk Read Error: A disc was WMA formats. contact your dealer/retailer. If the inserted with an invalid or unknown radio displays an error message, If an error message displays on the format. write it down and provide it to your video screen or the radio, see “DVD Player Error: There are disc LOAD dealer/retailer when reporting the Display Error Messages” under, or disc EJECT problems. problem. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7‑35 and “DVD . It is very hot. When the Using the DVD Player Radio Error Messages in this temperature returns to normal, ” section for more information. the CD should play. The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the remote . The road is very rough. When Playing a DVD control, the RSA system, or by the f the road becomes smoother, the buttons on the radio faceplate. See (Tune): Turn to change tracks on CD should play. “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat a CD or DVD, to manually tune a . The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, Entertainment (RSE) System on radio station, or to change clock or or upside down. page 7‑35 and Rear Seat Audio date settings, while in the clock or (RSA) System on page 7‑43 for date setting mode. See the . The air is very humid. If so, wait more information. information given earlier in this about an hour and try again. section specific to the radio, CD, 7-18 Infotainment System and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to The rear seat passenger can Clock” in the index, for setting the fast forward the DVD. The radio navigate the DVD-V menus and clock and date. displays the elapsed time and fast controls through the remote control. © SEEK (Previous Track/ forwards five times the normal See “Remote Control”, under Rear Chapter): Press to return to the speed. To stop fast forwarding, Seat Entertainment (RSE) System start of the current track or chapter. press again. This button may not on page 7‑35 for more information. The Video Screen automatically Press © again to go to the work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the turns on when the DVD-V is previous track or chapter. This previews. inserted into the DVD slot. button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD. r / j (Play/Pause): Press either or the previews. If the DVD is ejected, but not the play or pause icon displayed on removed, the player automatically the radio system, to toggle between SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): pulls it back in after 15 seconds. pausing or restarting playback of Press to go to the next track or a DVD. If loading and reading of a DVD chapter. This button may not work . If the forward arrow is showing when the DVD is playing the cannot be completed, because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc on display, the system is in copyright information or the pause mode. previews. fails to eject, press and hold for s more than five seconds to force the . If the pause icon is showing on REV (Fast Reverse): Press to disc to eject. display, the system is in quickly reverse the DVD at playback mode. five times the normal speed. The DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons radio displays the elapsed time Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio . If the DVD screen is off, press while in fast reverse. To stop fast display menu shows several icons. the play button to turn the reversing, press again. This button Press the softkeys under any icon screen on. may not work when the DVD is during DVD playback. See the icon Some DVDs begin playing after the playing the copyright information or list below for more information. previews have finished, although the previews. there could be a delay of up to Infotainment System 7-19

30 seconds. If the DVD does not q (Return): Press to exit the r / j (Play/Pause): Press either begin playing the movie current active menu and return to the play or pause icon displayed on automatically, press the softkey the previous menu. This button the radio system, to toggle between under the play/pause icon displayed operates only when a DVD is pausing or restarting playback of on the radio. If the DVD still does playing and a menu is active. a DVD. not play, refer to the on-screen instructions, if available. DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons . If the forward arrow is showing on display, the system is in c (Stop): Press to stop playing, Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio pause mode. rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. display menu shows several icons. r Press the softkeys under any icon . If the pause icon is showing on (Enter): Press to select the during DVD playback. See the icon display, the system is in choices that are highlighted in list below for more information. playback mode. any menu. y The rear seat operator can navigate q Group r : Press to cycle (Menu): Press to access the the DVD-A menus and controls through musical groupings on the DVD menu. The DVD menu is through the remote control. See DVD-A disc. different on every DVD. Use the “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Nav (Navigate): Press to display softkeys under the navigation Entertainment (RSE) System on arrows to navigate the cursor directional arrows for navigating page 7‑35 for more information. through the menus. through the DVD menu. After The Video Screen does not making a selection press this automatically power on when the e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle button. This button only operates DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. through audio stream formats when using a DVD. It must be manually turned on by located on the DVD-A disc. The Nav (Navigate): Press to display the rear seat occupant through the video screen shows the audio directional arrows for navigating remote control power button. stream changing. through the menus. 7-20 Infotainment System

Inserting a Disc Stopping and Resuming Playback The DVD should resume play from To play a disc, gently insert the disc, To stop playing a DVD without where it last stopped if the disc has with the label side up, into the turning off the system, do one of the not been ejected and the stop loading slot. The DVD player might following: button has not been pressed twice not accept some paper labeled on the remote control. If the disc media. The player starts loading the . Press c on the remote control. has been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice on the disc into the system and shows . Press the softkey under the stop remote control, the disc resumes “Loading Disc” on the radio display. or the play/pause icons playing at the beginning of the disc. At the same time, the radio displays displayed on the radio. a softkey menu of option(s). Some . Ejecting a Disc discs automatically play the movie If the radio head is sourced to while others default to the softkey something other than DVD-V, Press Z DVD on the radio to eject menu display, which requires the press the DVD/CD AUX button the disc. If a disc is ejected from the Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to make DVD-V the active radio, but not removed, the radio to be pressed; either by the softkey source. reloads the disc after a short period on the radio or by the rear seat To resume DVD playback, do one of of time. The disc is stored in the passenger using the remote control. the following: radio. The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically. If the It may take up to 30 seconds for a . Press r / j on the remote movie is reloaded and the RSA DVD to begin playing. control. system is sourced to the DVD, the . Press the softkey under the play/ player begins to play again. pause icon displayed on the If loading and reading a DVD or CD radio. cannot be completed, and the disc fails to eject, press and hold Z DVD for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. Infotainment System 7-21

DVD Error Messages 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, . Up to 512 files and folders. 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, . Player Error: This message Playlists with an .m3u or 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and displays when there are disc load or .wpl extension. 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. eject problems. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or Radios that have a USB port can Disc Format Error: This message .cda file extension. play.mp3 and .wma files that are displays, if the disc is inserted with stored on a USB storage device as USB Supported File and Folder the disc label wrong side up, or if well as AAC files that are stored on Structure the disc is damaged. ® an iPod . The radio supports: Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc is not from a Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode . Up to 700 folders. Discs correct region. . Up to 8 folders in depth. The radio can play discs that No Disc Inserted: This message . Up to 65,535 files. displays, if no disc is present when contain both uncompressed CD . Folder and file names up to Z DVD or DVD/CD AUX is audio and MP3/WMA files. If both 64 bytes. pressed on the radio. formats are on the disc, the radio plays both file formats in the order in . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file which they were recorded to extension. MP3 (Radio with CD and the disc. Radio with CD/USB) . AAC files stored on an iPod. CD-R or CD-RW Supported File Format and Folder Structure . FAT16 . Radios that have the capability of The radio supports: FAT32 playing MP3s can play.mp3 or .wma . Up to 50 folders. files that were recorded onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can . Up to 8 folders in depth. be recorded with the following fixed . Up to 15 playlists. bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 7-22 Infotainment System

Root Directory Tracks are played in the following File System and Naming The root directory of the disc is order: The song name that displays is the treated as a folder. If the root . Play begins from the first track in song name that is contained in the directory has compressed audio the first playlist and continues ID3 tag. If the song name is not files, the directory displays on the sequentially through all tracks in present in the ID3 tag, then the radio as the CD label. each playlist. When the last radio displays the file name without If a disc contains both track of the last playlist has the extension (such as .mp3) as the uncompressed CD audio and played, play continues from the track name. MP3/WMA files, a folder under the first track of the first playlist. Track names longer than root directory called CD accesses . Play begins from the first track in 32 characters or four pages are all of the CD audio tracks on the first folder and continues shortened. Parts of words on the the disc. sequentially through all tracks in last page of text and the extension each folder. When the last track of the filename does not display. Empty Folder of the last folder has played, Folders that do not contain files are play continues from the first Preprogrammed Playlists skipped, and the player advances to track of the first folder. Preprogrammed playlists that were the next folder that contains files. When play enters a new folder, the created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ Order of Play display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the software can be accessed, however, Compressed audio files are folder mode has been chosen as they cannot be edited using the accessed in the following order: the default display. The new track radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing . Playlists (Px). name displays. compressed audio song files. . Files stored in the root directory. Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls . Files stored in folders in the root file extension and are stored on a directory. USB device may be supported by the radio with a USB port. Infotainment System 7-23

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3 S c (Previous Folder): Press When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files in order by f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA the softkey below S c to go to the artist. The current artist playing is files. first track in the previous folder. shown on the second line of the © SEEK: Press to go to the start c T (Next Folder): Press the display. Once all songs by that artist of the track, if more than ten softkey below c T to go to the first are played, the player moves to the seconds have played. Press and track in the next folder. next artist in alphabetical order and hold or press multiple times to begins playing files by that artist. continue moving backward through RDM (Random): Files on the disc To listen to files by another artist, tracks. can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To use press the softkey located below ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next random, press the softkey under the either arrow tab. The disc goes to track. Press and hold or press RDM tab until Random Current Disc the next or previous artist in multiple times to continue moving displays to play songs in random alphabetical order. Continue forward through tracks. order. Press the same softkey again pressing either softkey below the s REV (Reverse): Press and to turn off random play. arrow tab until the artist displays. hold to reverse playback quickly. h (Music Navigator): Press the To change from playback by artist to Sound is heard at a reduced volume playback by album: softkey below h to play files in and the elapsed time of the file order by artist or album. 1. Press the softkey located below displays. Release s REV to the Sort By tab. resume playing. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag 2. Press one of the softkeys below \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press information. It can take several the album tab from the sort and hold to advance playback minutes to scan the disc depending screen. quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced on the number of files on the disc. 3. Press the softkey below the volume and the elapsed time of the The radio may begin playing while it \ back tab to return to the main file displays. Release FWD to is scanning in the background. music navigator screen. resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays. 7-24 Infotainment System

The album name displays on the connector and connect the other Using the Radio to Control a second line between the arrows and end to the USB port located in the USB Storage Device or iPod songs from the current album center console. If the vehicle is on The radio can control a USB begins to play. Once all songs from and the USB connection works, “OK storage device or an iPod using the that album have played, the player to disconnect” and a GM logo may moves to the next album in appear on the iPod and iPod radio buttons and knobs and display alphabetical order on the CD and appears on the radio's display. The song information on the radio’s display. begins playing MP3 files from that iPod music appears on the radio’s album. display and begins playing. f (Tune): Turn to select files. To exit music navigator mode, press The iPod charges while it is © SEEK: Press to go to the start the softkey below the Back tab to connected to the vehicle if the of the track, if more than ten return to normal MP3 playback. vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY seconds have played. Press and or ON/RUN position. When the hold or press multiple times to Connecting a USB Storage ® vehicle is turned off, the iPod continue moving backward through Device or iPod automatically powers off and will not tracks. charge or draw power from the The USB Port can be used to SEEK: Press to go to the next vehicle's battery. ¨ control an iPod or a USB storage track. Press and hold or press device. If you have an older iPod model that multiple times to continue moving To connect a USB storage device, is not supported, it can still be used forward through tracks. by connecting it to the Auxiliary connect the device to the USB port s REV (Reverse): Press and Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm located in the center console. hold to reverse playback quickly. (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the To connect an iPod, connect one Sound is heard at a reduced Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more end of the USB cable that came information. volume. Release s REV to with the iPod to the iPod’s dock resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays. Infotainment System 7-25

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey 4. Turn f to scroll through the files and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track. The tab in the selected folder. quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced appears raised when pause is being 5. Press f to select the file to be volume. Release \ FWD to used. Press the softkey below played. resume playing. The elapsed time of j again to resume playback. To skip through large lists, the five the file displays. Back: Press the softkey below the softkeys can be used to navigate in 4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main the following order: additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the selected track. root directory on a USB storage . First softkey, first item in the list. device. . Second softkey, 1% through the Using Softkeys to Control a c USB Storage Device or iPod (Folder View): Press the list each time the softkey is softkey below c to view the pressed. The five softkeys below the radio contents of the current folder on the . display are used to control the Third softkey, 5% through the list USB drive. To browse and select functions listed below. each time the softkey is pressed. files: . To use the softkeys: Fourth softkey, 10% through the 1. Press the softkey below c . list each time the softkey is 1. Press the first or fifth softkey pressed. below the radio display to 2. Turn f to scroll through the list . Fifth softkey, end of the list. display the functions listed of folders. below, or press the softkey below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the folder. currently displayed. If there is more than one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the 2. Press the softkey below the tab folder is reached. with the function on it to use that function. 7-26 Infotainment System h (Music Navigator): Press the To skip through large lists, the five ' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below h to view and softkeys can be used to navigate in softkey below to repeat one the following order: ' select a file on an iPod, using the track. The tab appears raised when iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list. Repeat Track is being used. sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the Shuffle Functionality . Playlists list each time the softkey is pressed. To use Shuffle: . Artists . Third softkey, 5% through the list Press the softkey below > , 2 . Albums each time the softkey is pressed. , < or = to select between . Genres . Fourth softkey, 10% through the Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ . Songs list each time the softkey is Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder. . Composers pressed. . Fifth softkey, end of the list. > (Shuffle Off): This is the To select files: default mode when a USB storage Repeat Functionality 1. Press the softkey below h . device or iPod is first connected. To use Repeat: (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle 2. Turn f to scroll through the list 2 Press the softkey below " or Songs): Shuffles all songs on the of menus. USB storage device or iPod. f ' to select between Repeat All 3. Press to select the menu. and Repeat Track. < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all songs in the current album on 4. Turn f to scroll through the (Repeat All): Press the softkey " an iPod. folders or files in the below " to repeat all tracks. The selected menu. tab appears lowered when Repeat = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all All is being used. This is the default songs in the current folder on a USB 5. Press f to select the file to be mode when a USB storage device storage device. played. or iPod is first connected. Infotainment System 7-27

MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) before MP3/WMA files. Press the USB Supported File and Folder CAT (category) button to toggle Structure Format between uncompressed audio and The radio supports: The radio can play.mp3 or MP3/WMA files. . Up to 700 folders. .wma files that were recorded onto CD-R or CD-RW Supported File a CD-R or CD-RW disc. and Folder Structure . Up to 8 folders in depth. The USB port can The DVD Player supports: . Up to 65,535 files. play.mp3 and .wma files that are . Up to 255 folders. . Folder and file names up to stored on a USB storage device as 64 bytes. well as AAC files that are stored on . Up to 8 folders in depth. an iPod®. . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file . Up to 15 playlists. extension. Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode . Up to 40 sessions. . Discs AAC files stored on an iPod. . Playlists with an .m3u or . FAT16 The radio plays discs that contain .wpl extension. both uncompressed CD audio and . FAT32 MP3/WMA files depending on which . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or slot the disc is loaded into. .cda file extension. The DVD Player only reads The CD Player supports: uncompressed audio and ignores . Up to 512 files and folders. MP3/WMA files on a mixed . mode disc. Up to 8 folders in depth. . The CD Player reads both Playlists with an .m3u or uncompressed audio and MP3/ .wpl extension. WMA files on a mixed mode disc. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or Uncompressd audio is played .cda file extension. 7-28 Infotainment System

Root Directory When the disc contains only . Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues The root directory of the disc is playlists and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are sequentially through all tracks in treated as a folder. If the root each folder. When the last track directory has compressed audio located under the root folder. The folder down and the folder up of the last folder has played, files, the directory displays as F1 play continues from the first ROOT on the radio. buttons search playlists first and then goes to the root folder. When track of the first folder. If a disc contains both the radio displays the name of the When play enters a new folder, the uncompressed CD audio and MP3/ folder the radio displays ROOT. display does not automatically show WMA files, a folder under the root Order of Play the new folder name unless the directory called CD accesses all of folder mode has been chosen as the CD audio tracks on the disc. Compressed audio files are the default display. The new track Empty Folder accessed in the following order: name displays. . Folders that do not contain files are Playlists. File System and Naming skipped, and the player advances to . Files stored in the root directory. The song name that displays is the the next folder that contains files. . Files stored in folders in the root song name that is contained in the No Folder directory. ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the Tracks are played in the following When the disc contains only radio displays the file name without order: compressed files, the files are the extension (such as .mp3) as the located under the root folder. The . Play begins from the first track in track name. next and previous folder function the first playlist and continues Track names longer than does not function on a disc that was sequentially through all tracks in 32 characters or four pages are recorded without folders or playlists. each playlist. When the last shortened. Parts of words on the When displaying the name of the track of the last playlist has last page of text and the extension folder the radio displays ROOT. played, play continues from the of the filename does not display. first track of the first playlist. Infotainment System 7-29

Preprogrammed Playlists Press to go to the previous track if c T (Next Folder): Press the more then five seconds have Preprogrammed playlists that softkey below c T to go to the first played. Press and hold or press were created using WinAmp™, track in the next folder. MusicMatch , or Real Jukebox multiple times to continue moving ™ ™ RDM (Random): Files on the disc software can be accessed, however, backward through tracks. can be listened to in random, rather they cannot be edited using the SEEK: Press to go to the next ¨ than sequential order. To use radio. These playlists are treated track. Press and hold or press random, press the softkey under the as special folders containing multiple times to continue moving RDM tab until Random Current Disc compressed audio song files. forward through tracks. displays to play songs in random Playlists that have an .m3u or s REV (Reverse): Press and order. Press the same softkey again .pls file extension and are stored on hold to reverse playback quickly. to turn off random play. a USB device may be supported by Sound is heard at a reduced volume h (Music Navigator): Press the the radio with a USB port. and the elapsed time of the file softkey below h to play files in displays. Release s REV to Playing an MP3/WMA File order by artist or album. From a Disc (In Either the DVD resume playing. The player scans the disc to sort the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press or CD Slot) files by artist and album ID3 tag and hold to advance playback information. It can take several If a disc is inserted into the top DVD quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced minutes to scan the disc depending slot, the rear seat operator can turn volume and the elapsed time of the on the video screen and use the on the number of files on the disc. remote control to navigate the CD file displays. Release \ FWD to The radio may begin playing while it (tracks only). resume playing. The elapsed time of is scanning in the background. f the file displays. (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA c When the scan is finished, the disc files. S (Previous Folder): Press begins playing files in order by the softkey below S c to go to the artist. The current artist playing is SEEK: Press to go to the © shown on the second line of the start of the track, if more than first track in the previous folder. display. Once all songs by that artist five seconds have played. 7-30 Infotainment System are played, the player moves to the The album name displays on the connector and connect the other next artist in alphabetical order and second line between the arrows and end to the USB port located in the begins playing files by that artist. songs from the current album center console. If the vehicle is on To listen to files by another artist, begins to play. Once all songs from and the USB connection works, “OK press the softkey located below that album have played, the player to disconnect” and a GM logo may either arrow tab. The disc goes to moves to the next album in appear on the iPod and iPod the next or previous artist in alphabetical order on the CD and appears on the radio's display. The alphabetical order. Continue begins playing MP3 files from that iPod music appears on the radio’s pressing either softkey below the album. display and begins playing. arrow tab until the artist displays. To exit music navigator mode, press The iPod charges while it is To change from playback by artist to the softkey below the Back tab to connected to the vehicle if the playback by album: return to normal MP3 playback. vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position. When the 1. Press the softkey located below Connecting a USB Storage ® vehicle is turned off, the iPod the Sort By tab. Device or iPod automatically powers off and will not 2. Press one of the softkeys below The USB Port can be used to charge or draw power from the the album tab from the sort control an iPod or a USB storage vehicle's battery. screen. device. If you have an older iPod model that 3. Press the softkey below the To connect a USB storage device, is not supported, it can still be used back tab to return to the main connect the device to the USB port by connecting it to the Auxiliary music navigator screen. located in the center console. Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the To connect an iPod, connect one Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more end of the USB cable that came information. with the iPod to the iPod’s dock Infotainment System 7-31

Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track. The tab The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced appears raised when pause is being storage device or an iPod using the volume. Release \ FWD to used. Press the softkey below radio buttons and knobs and display resume playing. The elapsed time of j again to resume playback. song information on the radio’s the file displays. Back: Press the softkey below the display. 4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the selected track. root directory on a USB storage SEEK: Press to go to the start © device. of the track, if more than ten Using Softkeys to Control a c seconds have played. Press and USB Storage Device or iPod (Folder View): Press the hold or press multiple times to softkey below c to view the The five softkeys below the radio continue moving backward through contents of the current folder on the display are used to control the tracks. USB drive. To browse and select functions listed below. ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next files: To use the softkeys: track. Press and hold or press 1. Press the softkey below c . multiple times to continue moving 1. Press the first or fifth softkey forward through tracks. below the radio display to 2. Turn f to scroll through the list s REV (Reverse): Press and display the functions listed of folders. below, or press the softkey hold to reverse playback quickly. 3. Press f to select the folder. Sound is heard at a reduced below the function if it is currently displayed. If there is more than one folder, volume. Release s REV to repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the resume playing. The elapsed 2. Press the softkey below the tab folder is reached. time of the file displays. with the function on it to use that function. 7-32 Infotainment System

4. Turn f to scroll through the files h (Music Navigator): Press the To skip through large lists, the five in the selected folder. softkey below h to view and softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: 5. Press f to select the file to be select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list. played. sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the To skip through large lists, the five . Playlists list each time the softkey is softkeys can be used to navigate in pressed. the following order: . Artists . Third softkey, 5% through the list . . Albums First softkey, first item in the list. each time the softkey is pressed. . . Genres Second softkey, 1% through the . Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the softkey is . Songs list each time the softkey is pressed. . Composers pressed. . Third softkey, 5% through the list . Fifth softkey, end of the list. each time the softkey is pressed. To select files: Repeat Functionality . Fourth softkey, 10% through the 1. Press the softkey below h . list each time the softkey is f To use Repeat: pressed. 2. Turn to scroll through the list of menus. Press the softkey below " or . Fifth softkey, end of the list. ' to select between Repeat All 3. Press f to select the menu. and Repeat Track. 4. Turn f to scroll through the " (Repeat All): Press the softkey folders or files in the below " to repeat all tracks. The selected menu. tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default 5. Press f to select the file to be mode when a USB storage device played. or iPod is first connected. Infotainment System 7-33

' (Repeat Track): Press the Auxiliary Devices To use an auxiliary input device, softkey below to repeat one connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to ' The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm the radio's front auxiliary input jack. track. The tab appears raised when (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack located Repeat Track is being used. on the lower right side of the O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to Shuffle Functionality faceplate and for vehicles with a USB port, it is located in the center increase or decrease the volume of To use Shuffle: console. the portable player. Additional volume adjustments might have to Press the softkey below > , 2 Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) be made from the portable device if , < or = to select between Auxiliary Input Jack the volume is not loud or soft enough. Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ The auxiliary input jack is located on Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, the lower right side of the faceplate. BAND: Press to listen to the radio or Shuffle Folder. This is not an audio output; do not when a portable audio device is > (Shuffle Off): This is the plug a headphone set into the front playing. The portable audio device default mode when a USB storage auxiliary input jack. Connect an continues playing, so you might device or iPod is first connected. auxiliary input device such as an want to stop it or turn it off. iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to 2 CD player, or cassette tape player, Songs): Shuffles all songs on the select between CD, or Auxiliary. etc. to the auxiliary input jack for USB storage device or iPod. use as another source for audio . When a CD is in the player the < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all listening. CD icon and a message songs in the current album on showing the disc and/or track Drivers are encouraged to set up an iPod. number displays. any auxiliary device while the = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all vehicle is in P (Park). See . If an auxiliary input device is not songs in the current folder on a USB Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 for connected, “No Input Device storage device. more information on driver Found” displays. distraction. 7-34 Infotainment System

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press remote control to only navigate the USB Supported Devices to select between DVD, CD, CD tracks through the remote . USB Flash Drives or Auxiliary. control. . Portable USB Hard Drives . If an auxiliary input device is not See “Using the Auxiliary Input connected, “No Aux Input Jack(s)” later in this section, . Fifth generation or later iPod Device” displays. or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, . iPod nanos Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) . When a disc is in either slot, the . iPod touch DVD/CD text tab and a message System on page 7‑35 for more showing the track or chapter information. . iPod classic number displays. Using the USB Port Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the USB port. . If an auxiliary input device is not For vehicles with a USB port, the connected, and a disc is in both connector is located in the center Make sure the iPod has the latest the DVD slot and the CD slot the console. firmware from Apple® for proper DVD/CD AUX button only cycles operation. iPod firmware can be Radios with a USB port can control ® between the two sources and updated using the latest iTunes a USB storage device or an iPod® does not indicate “No Aux Input application. See www.apple.com/ using the radio buttons and knobs. Device”. itunes. See MP3 (Radio with CD and Radio . If a front auxiliary input device is with CD/USB) on page 7‑21 or For help with identifying your iPod, connected, the DVD/CD AUX MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) on go to www.apple.com/support. button cycles through all page 7‑27 for information about available options. how to connect and control a USB If a disc is inserted into top DVD storage device or an iPod. slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the Infotainment System 7-35

Rear Seat In severe or extreme weather Headphones conditions the RSE system might or The RSE includes two 2-channel Infotainment might not work until the temperature wireless headphones that are is within the operating range. The dedicated to this system. Channel 1 operating range for the RSE system Rear Seat Entertainment is dedicated to the video screen, is above −4°F (−20°C) or below while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA (RSE) System 140°F (60°C). If the temperature of selections. These headphones are The vehicle may have a DVD Rear the vehicle is outside of this range, used to listen to media such as Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. heat or cool the vehicle until the CDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, The RSE system works with the temperature is within the operating radio, any auxiliary source vehicle's audio system. The DVD range of the RSE system. connected to A/V jacks, or the player is part of the front radio. The auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle RSE system includes a radio with a Parental Control has this feature. The wireless DVD player, a video display screen, The RSE system may have a headphones have an On/Off button, audio/video jacks, two wireless Parental Control feature, depending channel 1/2 switch, and a volume headphones, and a remote control. on the radio. To enable Parental control. Switch the headphones to See Operation on page 7 2 for ‑ Control, press and hold the radio Off when not in use. more information on the vehicle's power button for more than audio/DVD system. two seconds to stop all system Push the power button to turn on features such as: radio, video the headphones. An indicator light Before Driving screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While located on the headphones comes The RSE is designed for rear seat Parental Control is on, Q displays. on. If the light does not come on, passengers only. The driver cannot the batteries might need to be safely view the video screen while When the radio is turned back on, replaced. Intermittent sound or static driving and should not try to do so. Parental Control is unlocked. on the headphones can also be an indication of weak batteries. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for more information. 7-36 Infotainment System

The headphones may automatically on the upper right side, above the Battery Replacement turn off after four hours of ear pad and should be positioned To change the batteries on the continuous use. on the right ear. headphones: To adjust the volume on the Notice: Do not store the 1. Turn the screw to loosen the headphones, use the volume control headphones in heat or direct battery door located on the left located on the right side. sunlight. This could damage the side of the headphones. Slide Infrared transmitters are located at headphones and repairs will not the battery door open. be covered by the warranty. the rear of the RSE overhead 2. Replace the two batteries in the console. The headphones shut off Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the compartment. Make sure that automatically to save the battery they are installed correctly, using power if the RSE system and RSA headphones stored in a cool, dry place. the diagram on the inside of the are shut off or if the headphones are battery compartment. out of range of the transmitters for If the foam ear pads attached to the more than three minutes. Moving too headphones become worn or 3. Replace the battery door and far forward or stepping out of the damaged, the pads can be replaced tighten the door screw. vehicle, can cause the headphones separately from the headphone set. If the headphones are to be stored to lose the audio signal. See your dealer/retailer for more for a long period of time, remove the For optimal audio performance, the information. batteries and keep them in a cool, headphones must be worn correctly. Headphones should be stored in the dry place. Headphones should be worn with front floor console and not in the the headband over the top of the front seat back pocket. Headphone head for best audio reception. The damage can occur when the second symbol L (Left) appears on the row seats are folded forward. upper left side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears Infotainment System 7-37

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks are color coded to How to Change the RSE Video match typical home entertainment Screen Settings system equipment. The yellow The screen display mode (normal, jack (A) is for the video input. The full, and zoom), screen brightness, white jack (B) is for the left audio and setup menu language can be input. The red jack (C) is for the changed from the on screen setup right audio input. menu by using the remote control. Power for auxiliary devices is not To change a setting: supplied by the radio system. 1. Press z . To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external 2. Use n , q , p , o and r to auxiliary device to the color-coded navigate and use the A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary setup menu. device and the video screen power z The A/V jacks, located on the rear on. If the video screen is in the DVD 3. Press again to remove the of the floor console, allow audio or player mode, pressing the AUX setup menu from the screen. video signals to be connected from (auxiliary) button on the remote Audio Output an auxiliary device such as a control, switches the video screen camcorder or a video game unit to from the DVD player mode to the Audio from the DVD player or the RSE system. Adapter auxiliary device. The radio can listen auxiliary inputs can be heard connectors or cables (not supplied) to the audio of the connected through the following sources: might be required to connect the auxiliary device by sourcing to . Wireless Headphones auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. auxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices on Refer to the manufacturer s . ’ page 7‑33 for more information. Vehicle Speakers instructions for proper usage. . Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system, if the vehicle has this feature. 7-38 Infotainment System

The RSE system always transmits Video Screen Notice: Avoid directly touching the audio signal to the wireless the video screen, as damage may The video screen is located in the headphones, if there is audio occur. See Cleaning the Video overhead console. When the video “ available. See Headphones earlier Screen later in this section for “ ” screen is not in use, push it up into ” in this section for more information. more information. its locked position. The DVD player is capable of To use the video screen: Remote Control outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA 1. Push the release button located To use the remote control, aim it at system, if the vehicle has this on the overhead console. the transmitter window at the rear of feature. The DVD player can be the overhead console and press the 2. Move the screen to the desired desired button. Direct sunlight or selected as an audio source on the position. RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio very bright light could affect the (RSA) System on page 7‑43 for If a DVD is playing and the screen ability of the RSE transmitter to more information. is raised to its locked position, the receive signals from the remote screen remains on; this is normal, control. If the remote control does When a device is connected to the and the DVD continues to play not seem to be working, the A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary through the previous audio source. batteries might need to be replaced. input jack, if the vehicle has this P See “Battery Replacement” later in feature, the rear seat passengers Press on the remote control or eject the disc to turn off the screen. this section. Objects blocking the are able to hear audio from the line of sight could also affect the auxiliary device through the wireless The infrared receivers for the function of the remote control. or wired headphones. The front seat wireless headphones and the passengers are able to listen to remote control are located at the playback from this device through rear of the overhead console. the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio. Infotainment System 7-39

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD v (Title): Press to return the DVD q (Return): Press to exit the slot, the remote control O button to the main menu of the DVD. This current active menu and return to can be used to turn on the video function could vary for each disc. the previous menu. This button screen display and start the disc. y (Main Menu): Press to access operates only when the display The radio can also turn on the video the DVD menu. The DVD menu is menu or a DVD menu is active. screen display. See Operation on different on every DVD. Use the c (Stop): Press to stop playing, page 7‑2 for more information. navigation arrows to move the rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Notice: Storing the remote cursor around the DVD menu. Press twice to return to the control in a hot area or in direct After making a selection press the beginning of the DVD. sunlight can damage it, and the enter button. This button only s (Play/Pause): Press to start repairs will not be covered by the operates when using a DVD. playing a DVD. Press while a DVD warranty. Storage in extreme cold n , q, p, o (Menu Navigation is playing to pause it. Press again to can weaken the batteries. Keep Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to continue playing the DVD. the remote control stored in a navigate through a menu. cool, dry place. When the DVD is playing, r (Enter): Press to select the depending on the radio, play may Remote Control Buttons choice that is highlighted in be slowed down by pressing O (Power): Press to turn the any menu. s then [ . The DVD continues video screen on and off. z (Display Menu): Press to adjust playing in a slow play mode. Depending on the radio, perform P (Illumination): Press to turn the the brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom), and display reverse slow play by pressing remote control backlight on. The s then r . To cancel slow play backlight automatically times out the language menu. s after seven to ten seconds if no mode, press again. other button is pressed while the backlight is on. 7-40 Infotainment System t (Previous Track/Chapter): [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast d (Camera): Press to change Press to return to the start of the forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast camera angles on DVDs that have current track or chapter. Press again forwarding a DVD video, press this feature when a DVD is playing. to go to the previous track or s . To stop fast forwarding a DVD The format and content of this chapter. This button might not work audio or CD, release [ . This function vary for each disc. when the DVD is playing the button might not work when the 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): copyright information or the DVD is playing the copyright The numeric keypad provides the previews. information or the previews. capability of direct chapter or track u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to e (Audio): Press to change audio number selection. go to the beginning of the next tracks on DVDs that have this \ (Clear): Press within chapter or track. This button might feature when the DVD is playing. three seconds after entering a not work when the DVD is playing The format and content of this numeric selection, to clear all the copyright information or the function vary for each disc. numerical inputs. previews. { } r (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/ 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press (Fast Reverse): Press to OFF subtitles and to move through to select chapter or track numbers quickly reverse the DVD or CD. To subtitle options when a DVD is greater than nine. Press this button stop fast reversing a DVD video, playing. The format and content of before entering the number. press s . To stop fast reversing a this function vary for each disc. If the remote control becomes lost DVD audio or CD, release r . This AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch or damaged, a new universal button might not work when the the system between the DVD player remote control can be purchased. DVD is playing the copyright and an auxiliary source. If this happens, make sure the information or the previews. universal remote control uses a Toshiba® code set. Infotainment System 7-41

Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart To change the remote control Problem Recommended Action batteries: No power. The ignition might not be turned ON/ 1. Slide the rear cover back, on the RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY. remote control. The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in 2. Replace the two batteries in the There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the compartment. Make sure that and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote they are installed correctly, using looks stretched out. control. the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input or scrolls. connections at both devices. 3. Replace the battery cover. The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no If the remote control is to be stored obstruction between the remote for a long period of time, remove the control and the transmitter window. batteries and keep them in a cool, Check the batteries to make sure dry place. they are not dead or installed incorrectly. 7-42 Infotainment System

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message depends on which radio the vehicle After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed one has. The video screen might display Play but sometimes the DVD starts time, the DVD player resumes one of the following: where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was beginning. stopped. If the stop button was Disc Load/Eject Error: This pressed two times the DVD player message displays when there are begins to play from the beginning of disc load or eject problems. the DVD. Disc Format Error: This message The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen is displays if the disc is inserted with there is no picture or sound. in the auxiliary source mode. the disc label wrong side up, or if Check the auxiliary input the disc is damaged. connections at both devices. Disc Region Error: This message Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low displays if the disc is not from a audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and correct region. interference from cellular telephone No Disc Inserted: This message towers or by using a cellular displays if no disc is present when telephone in the vehicle. the Z EJECT button is pressed on Check that the headphones are on the radio. correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones. I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for headphones. assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player. Infotainment System 7-43

DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not included) plugged Video distortion can occur when System into the jacks on the RSA. If the operating cellular phones, scanners, For vehicles with Rear Seat Audio vehicle has this feature, audio can CB radios, Global Position Systems (RSA), rear seat passengers can also be heard on Channel 2 of the (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, listen to and control any of the wireless headphones. or walkie talkies. music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, The audio system mutes the rear It might be necessary to turn off the or other auxiliary sources. The rear speakers when the RSA audio is DVD player when operating one of seat passengers can only control active through the headphones. these devices in or near the vehicle. the music sources the front seat To listen to an iPod or portable *Excludes the OnStar® System. passengers are not listening to (except on some radios where dual audio device through the RSA, Cleaning the RSE Overhead control is allowed). For example, attach the iPod or portable audio Console rear seat passengers can control a device to the front auxiliary input (if CD and listen to it through the available), located on the front audio When cleaning the RSE overhead headphones, while the driver listens system. Turn the iPod on, then console surface, use only a clean to the radio through the front choose the front auxiliary input with cloth dampened with clean water. speakers. The rear seat passengers the RSA SRCE button. Cleaning the Video Screen have control of the volume for each set of headphones. Use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when The RSA functions operate even directly touching or cleaning the when the main radio is off. The front screen, as damage could result. audio system displays X when the RSA is on, and disappears from the display when it is off. 7-44 Infotainment System

inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. While listening to a disc, press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press © to go back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played). This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. P (Power): Press to turn the RSA © ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the When a DVD video menu is being on or off. previous or to the next station and displayed, press © or ¨ to Volume: Turn to increase or to stay there. This function is inactive, perform a cursor up or down on the decrease the volume of the wired with some radios, if the front seat menu. Hold © or ¨ to perform a passengers are listening to the headphones. The left knob controls cursor left or right on the menu. the left headphones and the right radio. PROG (Program): Press to go to knob controls the right headphones. Press and hold © or ¨ until the the next preset radio station or SRCE (Source): Press to select display flashes to tune to an channel set on the main radio. This between the radio (AM/FM/XM™), individual station. The display stops function is inactive, with some CD, and if the vehicle has these flashing after the buttons have not radios, if the front seat passengers features, DVD, front auxiliary, and been pushed for more than are listening to the radio. rear auxiliary. two seconds. This function is Infotainment System 7-45

When a CD or DVD audio disc is Phone Noise: Keep interior noise levels to playing, press PROG to go to the a minimum. The system may not beginning of the CD or DVD audio. recognize voice commands if there This function is inactive, with some Bluetooth is too much background noise. radios, if the front seat passengers Vehicles with a Bluetooth system When to Speak: A short tone are listening to the disc. can use a Bluetooth capable cell sounds after the system responds When a disc is playing in the CD or phone with a Hands Free Profile to indicating when it is waiting for a DVD changer, press PROG to make and receive phone calls. The voice command. Wait until the tone select the next disc, if multiple discs system can be used while the key is and then speak. are loaded. This function is inactive, in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The range of the Bluetooth How to Speak: Speak clearly in a with some radios, if the front seat calm and natural voice. passengers are listening to the disc. system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones support all functions, Audio System When a DVD video menu is being and not all phones are guaranteed displayed, press PROG to perform to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth the ENTER menu function. system. See gm.com/bluetooth for system, sound comes through the more information on compatible vehicle's front audio system phones. speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system Voice Recognition volume knob, during a call, to The Bluetooth system uses voice change the volume level. The recognition to interpret voice adjusted volume level remains in commands to dial phone numbers memory for later calls. To prevent and name tags. missed calls, a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low. 7-46 Infotainment System

Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information: Pairing a Phone Use the buttons located on the . Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press and hold b g for steering wheel to operate the paired to the in-vehicle Bluetooth two seconds. The system in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See system. responds with “Ready” followed Steering Wheel Controls on . The pairing process is disabled by a tone. page 5‑3 for more information. when the vehicle is moving. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system b g (Push To Talk) : Press to . The in-vehicle Bluetooth system responds with “Bluetooth ready” answer incoming calls, to confirm automatically links with the first followed by a tone. system information, and to start available paired cell phone in the speech recognition. 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds order the phone was paired. with instructions and a four digit c x (Phone On Hook): Press to . Only one paired cell phone can PIN number. The PIN number end a call, reject a call, or to cancel be connected to the in-vehicle will be used in Step 4. an operation. Bluetooth system at a time. 4. Start the Pairing process on the Pairing . Pairing should only need to be cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell A Bluetooth enabled cell phone completed once, unless changes phone manufacturers user guide must be paired to the in-vehicle to the pairing information have for information on this process. Bluetooth system first and then been made or the phone is connected to the vehicle before it deleted. Locate the device named can be used. See the cell phone To link to a different paired phone, “General Motors” in the list on manufacturers user guide for see Linking to a Different Phone the cellular phone and follow the Bluetooth functions before pairing later in this section. instructions on the cell phone to the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone enter the four digit PIN number is not connected, calls will be made that was provided in Step 3. using OnStar® Hands-Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner's guide for more information. Infotainment System 7-47

5. The system prompts for a name 3. Say “List”. The system lists all 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. for the phone. Use a name that the paired Bluetooth devices. If a The system responds with “OK, best describes the phone. This phone is connected to the deleting ”. name will be used to indicate vehicle, the system will say “Is Linking to a Different Phone which phone is connected. The connected” after the connected system then confirms the name phone. 1. Press and hold b g for provided. Deleting a Paired Phone two seconds. The system 6. The system responds with responds with “Ready” followed “ has been 1. Press and hold b g for by a tone. two seconds. The system successfully paired” after the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with Ready followed pairing process is complete. “ ” responds with “Bluetooth ready” by a tone. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for followed by a tone. 2. Say Bluetooth . The system additional phones to be paired. “ ” 3. Say “Change phone”. The responds with Bluetooth ready “ ” system responds with “Please Listing All Paired and Connected followed by a tone. Phones wait while I search for other 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks phones”. 1. Press and hold for which phone to delete followed b g . If another phone is found, two seconds. The system by a tone. the response will be responds with Ready followed “ ” 4. Say the name of the phone to be “ is now by a tone. deleted. If the phone name is connected”. 2. Say Bluetooth . The system unknown, use the List “ ” “ ” . If another phone is not responds with “Bluetooth ready” command for a list of all paired found, the original phone followed by a tone. phones. The system responds remains connected. with “Would you like to delete ? Yes or No” followed by a tone. 7-48 Infotainment System

Storing Name Tags 3. Say the complete phone number responds with “About to store to be stored at once with no . Does that The system can store up to thirty pauses. sound OK? . phone numbers as name tags that ” are shared between the Bluetooth . If the system recognizes . If the name tag does not and OnStar systems. the number it responds with sound correct, say “No” and OK, Storing and repeats repeat Step 5. The system uses the following “ ” the phone number. commands to store and retrieve . If the name tag sounds phone numbers: . If the system is unsure it correct, say “Yes” and the recognizes the phone name tag is stored. After . Store number, it responds with the number is stored the . Digit Store “Store” and repeats the system returns to the . Directory number followed by “Please main menu. say yes or no”. If the Using the Store Command number is correct, say Using the Digit Store Command The store command allows a phone “Yes”. If the number is not The digit store command allows a number to be stored without correct, say “No”. The phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually. system will ask for the entering the digits individually. number to be re-entered. 1. Press and hold b g for 1. Press and hold b g for 4. After the system stores the two seconds. The system two seconds. The system phone number, it responds with responds with Ready followed responds with “Ready” followed “ ” “Please say the name tag” by a tone. by a tone. followed by a tone. 2. Say Digit Store . The system 2. Say “Store”. The system “ ” 5. Say a name tag for the phone responds with Please say the responds with “Store, number “ number. The name tag is first digit to store followed by please” followed by a tone. ” recorded and the system a tone. Infotainment System 7-49

3. Say the first digit to be stored. responds with “About to store Deleting Name Tags The system will repeat back the . Does that The system uses the following digit it heard followed by a tone. sound OK? . ” commands to delete name tags: Continue entering digits until the . If the name tag does not number to be stored is complete. . Delete sound correct, say “No” and . If an unwanted number is repeat Step 5. . Delete all name tags recognized by the system, . If the name tag sounds Using the Delete Command say “Clear” at any time to correct, say Yes and the “ ” The delete command allows specific clear the last number. name tag is stored. After name tags to be deleted. . To hear all of the numbers the number is stored the recognized by the system, system returns to the To use the delete command: say “Verify” at any time and main menu. the system will repeat them. 1. Press and hold b g for Using the Directory Command two seconds. The system 4. After the complete number has The directory command lists all of responds with “Ready” followed been entered, say “Store”. The the name tags stored by the system. by a tone. system responds with “Please To use the directory command: say the name tag” followed by 2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with Delete, please a tone. 1. Press and hold for “ b g say the name tag” followed by 5. Say a name tag for the phone two seconds. The system a tone. number. The name tag is responds with “Ready” followed recorded and the system by a tone. 2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with “Directory” and then plays back all of the stored name tags. When the list is complete, the system returns to the main menu. 7-50 Infotainment System

3. Say the name tag to be deleted. Using the Delete All Name Tags Making a Call The system responds with Command Calls can be made using the Would you like to delete, ? Please say yes or no”. deletes all stored phone book name . Dial . If the name tag is correct, tags and route name tags for say “Yes” to delete the OnStar (if present). . Digit Dial name tag. The system To use the delete all name tags . Call responds with “OK, deleting command: , returning to . Re-dial the main menu.” 1. Press and hold b g for Using the Dial Command . If the name tag is incorrect, two seconds. The system 1. Press and hold for say “No”. The system responds with “Ready” followed b g responds with “No. OK, let's by a tone. two seconds. The system responds with Ready followed try again, please say the 2. Say Delete all name tags . The “ ” “ ” by a tone. name tag.” system responds with “You are about to delete all name tags 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds stored in your phone directory with “Dial using ”. and your route destination “Number please” followed by directory. Are you sure you want a tone. to do this? Please say yes 3. Say the entire number without or no.” pausing. . Say “Yes” to delete all . If the system recognizes name tags. the number, it responds . Say “No” to cancel the with “OK, Dialing” and dials function and return to the the number. main menu. Infotainment System 7-51

. If the system does not 4. Continue entering digits until the 3. Say the name tag of the person recognize the number, it number to be dialed is complete. to call. confirms the numbers After the whole number has followed by a tone. If the . If the system clearly been entered, say “Dial”. The recognizes the name tag it number is correct, say system responds with OK, “ responds with “OK, calling, “Yes”. The system responds Dialing” and dials the number. with “OK, Dialing” and dials ” and dials the the number. If the number . If an unwanted number is number. recognized by the system, is not correct, say “No”. The . If the system is unsure it system will ask for the say “Clear” at any time to recognizes the right name number to be re-entered. clear the last number. tag, it confirms the name . To hear all of the numbers tag followed by a tone. Using the Digit Dial Command recognized by the system, If the name tag is correct, 1. Press and hold b g for say “Verify” at any time and say “Yes”. The system two seconds. The system the system will repeat them. responds with “OK, calling, ” and dials the responds with “Ready” followed Using the Call Command by a tone. number. If the name tag is 1. Press and hold for not correct, say “No”. The 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system b g two seconds. The system system will ask for the responds with “Digit dial using name tag to be re-entered. , please say the responds with “Ready” followed first digit to dial” followed by by a tone. Once connected, the person called a tone. 2. Say “Call”. The system responds will be heard through the audio speakers. 3. Say the digit to be dialed one at with “Call using . a time. Following each digit, the Please say the name tag” system will repeat back the digit followed by a tone. it heard followed by a tone. 7-52 Infotainment System

Using the Re-dial Command Call Waiting Three-Way Calling 1. Press and hold b g for Call waiting must be supported on Three-Way Calling must be two seconds. The system the Bluetooth phone and enabled by supported on the Bluetooth phone responds with “Ready” followed the wireless service carrier to work. and enabled by the wireless service by a tone. carrier to work. . Press b g to answer an 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The incoming call when another call 1. While on a call press b g . The system responds with “Re-dial is active. The original call is system responds with “Ready” using ” and dials placed on hold. followed by a tone. the last number called from the . 2. Say Three-way call . The connected Bluetooth phone. Press b g again to return to “ ” the original call. system responds with Once connected, the person called “Three-way call, please say dial will be heard through the audio . To ignore the incoming call, or call”. speakers. continue with the original call with no action. 3. Use the dial or call command to Receiving a Call dial the number of the third party . Press c x to disconnect the to be called. When an incoming call is received, current call and switch to the call the audio system mutes and a ring 4. Once the call is connected, on hold. tone is heard in the vehicle. press b g to link all the callers together. . Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call. Ending a Call . Press c x to ignore a call. Press c x to end a call. Infotainment System 7-53

Muting a Call Transferring a Call To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle Bluetooth System During a call, all sounds from inside Audio can be transferred between the vehicle can be muted so that the the in-vehicle Bluetooth system and The cellular phone must be paired person on the other end of the call the cell phone. and connected with the Bluetooth cannot hear them. system before a call can be To Transfer Audio to the Cell transferred. The connection process To Mute a call Phone can take up to two minutes after the 1. Press b g . The system During a call with the audio in the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. responds with “Ready” followed vehicle: by a tone. 1. Press b g . The system During a call with the audio on the 2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Ready” followed cell phone, press b g for more responds with “Call muted”. by a tone. than two seconds. The audio switches from the cell phone to the 2. Say Transfer Call. The system To Cancel Mute “ ” vehicle. responds with “Transferring call” 1. Press b g . The system and the audio will switch from responds with “Ready” followed the vehicle to the cell phone. by a tone. 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Resuming call”. 7-54 Infotainment System

Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency 3. Say the number to send. Voice Pass-Thru allows access to (DTMF) Tones . If the system clearly the voice recognition commands on The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can recognizes the number it the cell phone. See the cell phone send numbers and numbers stored responds with “OK, Sending manufacturers user guide to see if as name tags during a call. This is Number” and the dial tones the cell phone supports this feature. used when calling a menu driven are sent and the call This feature can be used to verbally phone system. Account numbers continues. access contacts stored in the cell can be programmed into the . If the system is not sure it phone. phonebook for retrieval during menu recognized the number driven calls. 1. Press and hold b g for properly, it responds “Dial two seconds. The system Sending a Number During a Call Number, Please say yes or no? followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed ” by a tone. 1. Press b g . The system If the number is correct, say responds with “Ready” followed “Yes”. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system by a tone. with “OK, Sending Number” responds with “Bluetooth ready” and the dial tones are sent 2. Say Dial . The system responds followed by a tone. “ ” and the call continues. with “Say a number to send 3. Say “Voice”. The system tones” followed by a tone. responds with “OK, accessing ”. . The cell phone's normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone's operating instructions. Infotainment System 7-55

Sending a Stored Name Tag Sending ” and During a Call the dial tones are sent and the call continues. 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” followed Clearing the System by a tone. Unless information is deleted out of 2. Say “Send name tag.” The the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it system responds with “Say a will be retained indefinitely. This name tag to send tones” includes all saved name tags in the followed by a tone. phonebook and phone pairing information. For information on how 3. Say the name tag to send. to delete this information, see the . If the system clearly above sections on Deleting a Paired recognizes the name tag it Phone and Deleting Name Tags. responds with “OK, Sending ” and the dial Other Information tones are sent and the call The Bluetooth® word mark and continues. logos are owned by the Bluetooth® . If the system is not sure it SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks recognized the name tag by General Motors is under license. properly, it responds “Dial Other trademarks and trade names , Please say are those of their respective owners. yes or no?” followed by a See Radio Frequency Statement on tone. If the name tag is page 13‑16 for FCC information. correct, say “Yes”. The system responds with “OK, 7-56 Infotainment System

2 NOTES Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with Climate Control Systems this system. Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...... 8-4 Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) ...... 8-10 Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) ...... 8-11 Air Vents Air Vents ...... 8-12

A. Fan Control E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) B. Temperature Control F. Recirculation C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger D. Air Conditioning 8-2 Climate Controls

9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided 0 (Defrost): This clears the way counterclockwise to turn the between the instrument panel and windshield of fog or frost, more front climate control system off. floor outlets. Some air is directed quickly. Air is directed to the 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise towards the windshield and side windshield and side window vents, or counterclockwise to increase or window outlets. Cooler air is with some to the floor vents. In this decrease the fan speed. directed to the upper outlets and mode, outside air is pulled inside warmer air to the floor outlets. the vehicle. Recirculation cannot be Temperature Control: Turn 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the selected while in the defrost mode. clockwise or counterclockwise to The air conditioning system runs increase or decrease the floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the windshield, side automatically in this setting, unless temperature of the air flowing from the outside temperature is less than the system. window, and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system 4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicle Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn automatically selects outside air. until all the windows are clear. clockwise or counterclockwise to Recirculation cannot be selected # (Air Conditioning): Press to change the current airflow mode. while in floor mode. turn the air conditioning system on By positioning the right knob - (Defog): This clears the or off. An indicator light comes on between two modes, a combination windows of fog or moisture. Air is when A/C is on. The air conditioning of those two modes is selected. directed to the windshield, floor system does not operate when the outlets, and side window vents. outside temperature is below 4°C H (Vent): Air is directed to the (40°F). The indicator light flashes instrument panel outlets. When this mode is selected, the system turns off recirculation and three times and turns off when runs the air conditioning unless the outside conditions affect air outside temperature is less than 4°C conditioning operation. This is (40°F). Recirculation cannot be normal. selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. Climate Controls 8-3

For quicker cool down on hot days: @ (Recirculation): Press to turn REAR (Rear Climate Control): 1. Open the windows to let hot air the recirculation mode on or off. An Press to turn the rear heating and escape. indicator light comes on when air conditioning on or off. See Rear recirculation is on. When the engine Climate Control System (Rear 2. Select H mode. is turned off, the recirculation mode Climate Control Only) on page 8‑10 automatically turns off and must be or Rear Climate Control System 3. Select # . re-selected when the engine is (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) 4. Select the coolest temperature. turned on again. on page 8‑11. 5. Select the highest fan speed. This mode recirculates and helps to Rear Window Defogger quickly cool the air inside the 6. Close the windows after the hot The rear window defogger uses a vehicle. It can be used to prevent air has escaped. warming grid to remove fog from the outside air and odors from entering rear window. 7. Once the vehicle's interior the vehicle. temperature is below the outside < (Rear Window Defogger): The recirculation mode cannot be Press to turn the rear window temperature, select @ mode used with floor, defrost, or defogging for faster cooling. defogger on or off. The rear window modes. If recirculation is selected in defogger stays on for about Using recirculation for long periods these modes, the indicator flashes 10 minutes, before automatically of time could cause the air inside of three times and turns off. The air turning off. The defogger will also the vehicle to become too dry. To conditioning also comes on when turn off when the engine is prevent this from happening, after this mode is activated unless the turned off. the inside of the vehicle has cooled, outside air temperature is less than turn the recirculation mode off. 4°C (40°F). While in recirculation mode the windows can fog when The air conditioning system the weather is cold and damp. To removes moisture from the air, so clear the fog, select either the defog water might drip under the vehicle or defrost mode and increase the while idling or after turning off the fan speed. engine. This is normal. 8-4 Climate Controls

Do not drive the vehicle until all the Dual Automatic Climate Control System windows are clear. The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with For vehicles with heated outside this system. rearview mirrors, fog or frost is cleared from the surface of the mirror when < is pressed. Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.

A. Fan Control H. Display B. AUTO I. Power (On/Off) C. Defrost J. Rear Window Defogger D. Recirculation K. Air Conditioning E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) L. PASS (Passenger) F. Air Delivery Mode Control M. Passenger Side Temperature G. Driver Side Temperature Control Control Climate Controls 8-5

Display Function Automatic Operation quickly cool the vehicle. The recirculation indicator light will Each time the temperature, mode, AUTO (Automatic): The system come on. or fan control buttons are pressed, automatically controls the inside the climate control display shows temperature, the air delivery, and 2. Set the temperature for the that function along with the inside the fan speed. driver and passenger. temperature setting. The outside To use automatic mode: To find a comfortable setting, temperature is displayed on the start with a 22°C (73°F) 1. Press the AUTO button. instrument panel cluster. temperature setting and O (On/Off): Press to turn the When AUTO is selected, the allow about 20 minutes for the climate control system on or off. current temperature(s) selected system to regulate. Use the While the system is off, outside air and AUTO is shown on the driver's side or passenger side still enters through the floor outlets, display. The current air delivery temperature buttons to adjust but the air delivery mode can be mode and fan speed also the temperature setting as adjusted. appear for approximately necessary. The system will five seconds. The climate control system will also remain at the selected setting. turn on if either the fan control, When AUTO is selected, the air Choosing the warmest or coolest defrost, AUTO, or air conditioning conditioning and air inlet are temperatures does not cause the buttons are pressed. automatically controlled. The air vehicle to heat or cool more conditioning runs when the quickly. outside temperature is over To avoid blowing cold air in cold 4°C (40°F). The system is weather, the system delays automatically set to outside air, turning on the fan until warm unless it is hot outside and air is available. Press the fan then the air inlet changes to control to override this delay and recirculation mode to help select the fan speed. 8-6 Climate Controls

Temperature Control PASS (Passenger): Press to set display. Pressing a mode button The driver and passenger side the passenger temperature to match while the system is off changes the temperature buttons are used to the driver temperature setting. The air delivery mode without turning the adjust the temperature of the air PASS indicator will turn off. When system on. Press a mode button coming through the system. The the passenger temperature setting while in automatic control to place temperature can be adjusted even if is different than the driver setting, the system into manual control. the system is turned off since the PASS indicator comes on. The air delivery mode setting still outside air still enters the vehicle, Manual Operation displays, but the word AUTO no unless the recirculation mode is longer displays, and the AUTO selected. See “Recirculation” later in The air delivery mode or fan speed button indicator light turns off. this section. can be manually adjusted. D C H (Vent): Air is directed to the Driver Side Temperature / (Fan Control): Press to instrument panel outlets. increase or decrease the fan speed. Control: Press the + or − buttons ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided to increase or decrease the driver Pressing D or C while in automatic between the instrument panel and side temperature. The driver side control places the fan speed under floor outlets. Some air is directed temperature display will show the manual control. towards the windshield and side temperature setting. The air delivery mode remains in window outlets. Cooler air is Passenger Side Temperature automatic control. The fan setting directed to the upper outlets and Control: Press the + or − buttons still displays, but the word AUTO no warmer air to the floor outlets. to increase or decrease the longer displays, and the AUTO 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the passenger side temperature. The button indicator light turns off. floor outlets, with some of the air passenger side display will show the directed to the windshield, side temperature setting. H / G (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press to change the window, and second row floor direction of the airflow in the vehicle. outlets. In this mode, the system uses outside air. Repeatedly press H or G until the desired mode appears on the Climate Controls 8-7

- (Defog): This mode clears the Do not drive the vehicle until all the Air Conditioning windows are clear. windows of fog or moisture. Air is # (Air Conditioning): Press to directed to the windshield, floor While in defrost mode, if the PASS turn the air conditioning (A/C) on outlets, and side window vents. button is pressed, the PASS button and off. An indicator light comes on When this mode is selected, the indicator flashes three times to when A/C is on. system turns off recirculation and show that the passenger climate The A/C does not work when the runs the air conditioning compressor control system cannot be activated. outside temperature is below 4°C unless the outside temperature is If the passenger temperature less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive buttons are adjusted while in defrost (40°F). If # is pressed the indicator the vehicle until all the windows are mode, the driver temperature flashes three times and turns off to clear. indicator will change. The show that the A/C mode is not 0 (Defrost): Press to turn the passenger temperature will not be available. If the A/C is on and the defrost on or off. This mode quickly displayed. outside temperature drops below a clears the windshield of fog or frost. temperature which is too cool for air When returning to bi-level, vent, conditioning to be effective, the A/C Air is directed to the windshield, or floor mode, the previous side window, and floor vents. In this indicator turns off to show that the temperature settings displays in A/C mode has been canceled. mode, outside air is pulled inside place of any change made while in the vehicle. The air conditioning defrost mode. On hot days, open the windows system runs automatically in this briefly to let hot inside air escape. setting, unless the outside This helps reduce the time it takes temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). for the interior of the vehicle to cool down. 8-8 Climate Controls

The air conditioning system The recirculation mode cannot be Rear Window Defogger removes moisture from the air, so used with floor, defog, or defrosting The rear window defogger uses a water might drip under the vehicle modes. If recirculation is selected in warming grid to remove fog from the while idling or after turning off the these modes, the indicator flashes rear window. engine. This is normal. three times and turns off. The air (Rear Window Defogger): (Recirculation): Press to turn conditioning compressor also comes < @ Press to turn the rear window the recirculation mode on or off. An on when this mode is activated. defogger on or off. The rear window indicator light comes on when While in recirculation mode the defogger stays on for about recirculation is on. When the engine windows can fog when the weather 10 minutes, before turning off. The is turned off, the recirculation mode is cold and damp. To clear the fog, defogger also turns off when the automatically turns off and must be select either the defog or defrost engine is turned off. Do not drive the re-selected when the engine is mode and increase the fan speed. vehicle until all the windows are turned on again. REAR: Press to turn the rear clear. This mode recirculates and helps to heating and air conditioning on or For vehicles with heated outside quickly cool the air inside the off. See Rear Climate Control rearview mirrors, fog or frost is vehicle. It can be used to prevent System (Rear Climate Control Only) cleared from the surface of the outside air and odors from entering on page 8‑10 or Rear Climate mirror when the rear window defog the vehicle. Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11. button is pressed. Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Climate Controls 8-9

Sensors There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by The interior temperature sensor adjusting the temperature, fan located on the instrument panel to speed, and the air delivery mode. The solar sensor, located in the the right of the steering column, The system may also supply cooler defrost grille in the middle of the measures the temperature of the air air to the side of the vehicle facing instrument panel, monitors the solar inside the vehicle. the sun. The recirculation mode will heat. Do not cover the solar sensor also be used as needed to maintain or the system will not work properly. cool outlet temperatures. 8-10 Climate Controls

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airflow Control Only) according to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted. Fan Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob to 9 to turn the fan off. Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airflow temperature. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front to the desired mode to change the airflow direction. B. Temperature Control climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or H (Vent): Air is directed through C. Air Delivery Mode Control off. An indicator comes on when the the overhead outlets. rear system is on. The system also For vehicles with the rear climate ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed control system, the controls are turns on if any of the rear controls are adjusted. through the rear floor outlets, as located on the rear of the center well as the overhead outlets. console. The system can also be Mimic Mode: This mode matches controlled with the front controls. the rear climate control to the front 6 (Floor): Air is directed through climate control settings. It comes on the floor outlets. The rear system when REAR is pressed. floor outlets are located under the third row seats. Climate Controls 8-11

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate control to the front Seat Audio) climate control settings. It comes on when REAR is pressed. Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airflow according to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted. DC (Fan Control): Press the fan up or down buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Temperature Control: Press + or − to increase or decrease the air temperature. The temperature A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front settings will display in climate control system to turn the B. Air Delivery Mode Control 0-12 increments, going from the rear climate control system on or coolest (0) to the warmest (12) C. Temperature Control off. The system also turns on if any setting. of the rear controls, except for the For vehicles with the rear climate C control system, the controls are are pressed. An indicator comes located on the rear of the center on when the rear system is on. console. The system can also be turned off, by pressing and holding the C button. 8-12 Climate Controls

. Keep the path under all seats N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Air Vents clear of objects to help circulate Press to manually change the the air inside the vehicle more direction of the airflow. Repeatedly Use the slider switch in the center of effectively. press the button until the desired the outlet, to change the direction of mode appears on the display. the air flow. Use the thumbwheel . If fogging reoccurs while in vent near the outlet to control the amount or bi-level modes with mild (Vent): Air is directed through H of air flow or to shut off the airflow. temperature throughout the the overhead outlets. Keep all outlets open whenever vehicle, turn on the air ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed possible for best system conditioner to reduce windshield through the rear floor outlets, as performance. fogging. well as the overhead outlets. Operation Tips 6 (Floor): Air is directed through the floor outlets. The rear system . Clear away any ice, snow, floor outlets are located under the or leaves from the air inlets at third row seats. the base of the windshield that can block the flow of air into the vehicle. . Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Driving and Operating 9-1

Shifting Into Park ...... 9-19 Object Detection Systems Driving and Shifting Out of Park ...... 9-20 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-32 Operating Parking Over Things Rear Vision That Burn ...... 9-21 Camera (RVC) ...... 9-34 Engine Exhaust Fuel Driving Information Engine Exhaust ...... 9-21 Fuel ...... 9-38 Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 Running the Vehicle While Recommended Fuel ...... 9-39 Drunk Driving ...... 9-2 Parked ...... 9-22 Gasoline Specifications ...... 9-39 Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 California Fuel Braking ...... 9-3 Automatic Transmission Requirements ...... 9-39 Steering ...... 9-4 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-40 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Manual Mode ...... 9-24 Fuel Additives ...... 9-40 Loss of Control ...... 9-5 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-25 Filling the Tank ...... 9-41 Driving on Wet Roads ...... 9-6 Drive Systems Filling a Portable Fuel Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-7 Container ...... 9-43 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-7 All-Wheel Drive ...... 9-25 Winter Driving ...... 9-8 Brakes Towing If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-10 Antilock Brake General Towing Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-10 System (ABS) ...... 9-26 Information ...... 9-43 Starting and Operating Parking Brake ...... 9-27 Driving Characteristics and Brake Assist ...... 9-27 Towing Tips ...... 9-44 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-15 Trailer Towing ...... 9-48 Ignition Positions ...... 9-16 Ride Control Systems Towing Equipment ...... 9-52 Retained Accessory StabiliTrak System ...... 9-28 Power (RAP) ...... 9-17 Conversions and Add-Ons Starting the Engine ...... 9-17 Cruise Control Add-On Electrical Engine Heater ...... 9-18 Cruise Control ...... 9-30 Equipment ...... 9-54 9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information Death and injury associated with WARNING (Continued) drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or Alcohol affects four things that Defensive driving means always “ possible death. These simple anyone needs to drive a vehicle: expect the unexpected.” The first defensive driving techniques judgment, muscular coordination, step in driving defensively is to wear vision, and attentiveness. your safety belt, see Safety Belts on could save your life. page 3‑14. Police records show that almost Drunk Driving 40 percent of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve { WARNING { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these Assume that other road users deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is very recent years, more than drivers) are going to be careless dangerous. Your reflexes, 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and deaths have been associated with judgment can be affected by even what they might do and be ready. the use of alcohol, with about a small amount of alcohol. You In addition: 250,000 people injured. can have a serious — or even . Allow enough following fatal — collision if you drive after For persons under 21, it is against distance between you and the law in every U.S. state to drink the driver in front of you. drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been alcohol. There are good medical, . Focus on the task of driving. drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if psychological, and developmental (Continued) you are with a group, designate a reasons for these laws. driver who will not drink. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. Driving and Operating 9-3

Medical research shows that alcohol Braking And, of course, actual stopping in a person's system can make distances vary greatly with the crash injuries worse, especially See Brake System Warning Light surface of the road, whether it is injuries to the brain, spinal cord, on page 5‑20. pavement or gravel; the condition of or heart. This means that when Braking action involves perception the road, whether it is wet, dry, anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to or icy; tire tread; the condition of the drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception brakes; the weight of the vehicle; in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is and the amount of brake force being killed or permanently disabled reaction time. applied. is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy braking. been drinking. Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. But that is Some people drive in only an average. It might be less spurts — heavy acceleration Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two followed by heavy braking — rather The following three systems help to or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. This control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition, is a mistake. The brakes might not driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and have time to cool between hard accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But much faster with a lot of heavy ask more of those control systems even in three-fourths of a second, a braking. Keeping pace with the than the tires and road can provide. vehicle moving at 100 km/h traffic and allowing realistic following Meaning, you can lose control of the (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That distances eliminates a lot of vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on could be a lot of distance in an unnecessary braking. That means page 9‑28. emergency, so keeping enough better braking and longer brake life. space between the vehicle and Adding non-dealer/non-retailer others is important. accessories can affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 10‑3. 9-4 Driving and Operating

If the engine ever stops while the Variable Effort Steering Steering in Emergencies vehicle is being driven, brake The vehicle has a steering system There are times when steering can normally but do not pump the that continuously adjusts the effort be more effective than braking. For brakes. If the brakes are pumped, felt when steering at all vehicle example, you come over a hill and the pedal could get harder to push speeds. It provides ease when find a truck stopped in your lane, down. If the engine stops, there will parking, yet a firm, solid feel at or a car suddenly pulls out from still be some power brake assist but highway speeds. nowhere, or a child darts out from it will be used when the brake is between parked cars and stops right applied. Once the power assist is Steering Tips in front of you. These problems can used up, it can take longer to stop be avoided by braking if you can and the brake pedal will be harder It is important to take curves at a — stop in time. But sometimes you to push. reasonable speed. cannot stop in time because there is Traction in a curve depends on the Adding non-dealer/non-retailer no room. That is the time for condition of the tires and the road accessories can affect vehicle evasive action steering around surface, the angle at which the — performance. See Accessories and the problem. curve is banked, and vehicle speed. Modifications on page 10‑3. While in a curve, speed is the one The vehicle can perform very well in factor that can be controlled. emergencies like these. First apply Steering the brakes. See Braking on If there is a need to reduce speed, page 9 3. It is better to remove as Power Steering do it before entering the curve, while ‑ much speed as possible from a the front wheels are straight. If power steering assist is lost collision. Then steer around the because the engine stops or the Try to adjust the speed so you can problem, to the left or right power steering system is not drive through the curve. Maintain a depending on the space available. functioning, the vehicle can be reasonable, steady speed. Wait to steered but it will take more effort. accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Driving and Operating 9-5

Off-Road Recovery tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go The vehicle's right wheels can drop straight down the roadway. off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems — brakes, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. In any emergency, do not give up. If holding the steering wheel at the Keep trying to steer and constantly recommended 9 and 3 o'clock seek an escape route or area of positions, it can be turned a full less danger. 180 degrees very quickly without Skidding removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement, In a skid, a driver can lose control of quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. Ease the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid you have avoided the object. off the accelerator and then, if there most skids by taking reasonable is nothing in the way, steer so that care suited to existing conditions, The fact that such emergency the vehicle straddles the edge of the and by not overdriving those situations are always possible is a pavement. Turn the steering wheel conditions. But skids are always good reason to practice defensive 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), about possible. driving at all times and wear safety one-eighth turn, until the right front belts properly. 9-6 Driving and Operating

The three types of skids correspond While driving on a surface with to the vehicle's three control reduced traction, try your best to { WARNING systems. In the braking skid, the avoid sudden steering, acceleration, wheels are not rolling. In the or braking, including reducing Wet brakes can cause crashes. steering or cornering skid, too much vehicle speed by shifting to a lower They might not work as well in a speed or steering in a curve causes gear. Any sudden changes could quick stop and could cause tires to slip and lose cornering force. cause the tires to slide. You might pulling to one side. You could And in the acceleration skid, too not realize the surface is slippery lose control of the vehicle. much throttle causes the driving until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to After driving through a large wheels to spin. recognize warning clues — such as puddle of water or a car/vehicle If the vehicle starts to slide, ease enough water, ice, or packed snow wash, lightly apply the brake your foot off the accelerator pedal on the road to make a mirrored pedal until the brakes work surface and slow down when you and quickly steer the way you want — normally. the vehicle to go. If you start have any doubt. Flowing or rushing water creates steering quickly enough, the vehicle Remember: Any Antilock Brake may straighten out. Always be ready System (ABS) helps avoid only the strong forces. Driving through for a second skid if it occurs. braking skid. flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this Of course, traction is reduced when Driving on Wet Roads happens, you and other vehicle water, snow, ice, gravel, or other occupants could drown. Do not material is on the road. For safety, Rain and wet roads can reduce ignore police warnings and be slow down and adjust your driving to vehicle traction and affect your very cautious about trying to drive these conditions. It is important to ability to stop and accelerate. through flowing water. slow down on slippery surfaces Always drive slower in these types because stopping distance is longer of driving conditions and avoid and vehicle control more limited. driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water. Driving and Operating 9-7

Hydroplaning . Have good tires with proper Hill and Mountain Roads tread depth. See Tires on Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water page 10‑37. Driving on steep hills or through can build up under your vehicle's mountains is different than driving . Turn off cruise control. tires so they actually ride on the on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for water. This can happen if the road is driving in these conditions include: wet enough and you are going fast Highway Hypnosis enough. When your vehicle is . Keep the vehicle serviced and in Always be alert and pay attention to good shape. hydroplaning, it has little or no your surroundings while driving. contact with the road. If you become tired or sleepy, find a . Check all fluid levels and brakes, There is no hard and fast rule about safe place to park your vehicle tires, cooling system, and hydroplaning. The best advice is to and rest. transmission. slow down when the road is wet. Other driving tips include: . Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear. Other Rainy Weather Tips . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. Besides slowing down, other wet . Keep interior temperature cool. { WARNING weather driving tips include: . Keep your eyes moving — scan . Allow extra following distance. the road ahead and to the sides. If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they . Pass with caution. . Check the rearview mirror and would not work well. You would . Keep windshield wiping vehicle instruments often. then have poor braking or even equipment in good shape. none going down a hill. You could . Keep the windshield washer fluid crash. Shift down to let the engine reservoir filled. assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. 9-8 Driving and Operating

Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS) { WARNING on page 9‑26 improves vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) Drive carefully when there is snow slippery roads, but apply the brakes or with the ignition off is sooner than when on dry pavement. dangerous. The brakes will have or ice between the tires and the to do all the work of slowing down road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on and they could get so hot that Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for (32°F) when freezing rain begins to they would not work well. You slippery spots. Icy patches can fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in would then have poor braking or Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a even none going down a hill. You freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy could crash. Always have the treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are engine running and the vehicle in clear. Avoid sudden steering gear when going downhill. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while on ice. . Stay in your own lane. Do not traction is not lost. Accelerating too swing wide or cut across the quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control, if equipped, center of the road. Drive at and makes the surface under the on slippery surfaces. speeds that let you stay in your tires slick, so there is even less own lane. traction. . Top of hills: Be Try not to break the fragile traction. alert — something could be in If you accelerate too fast, the drive your lane (stalled car, accident). wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. . Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action. Driving and Operating 9-9

Blizzard Conditions WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about vehicle unless there is help nearby. . Clear away snow from around carbon monoxide, see Engine If possible, use the Roadside the base of your vehicle, Exhaust on page 9‑21. Assistance Program on page 13 5. ‑ especially any that is blocking To get help and keep everyone in Snow can trap exhaust gases the exhaust pipe. the vehicle safe: under your vehicle. This can . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (carbon . Turn on the hazard warning time to be sure snow does monoxide) gas to get inside. CO flashers. not collect there. could overcome you and kill you. . Tie a red cloth to an outside You cannot see it or smell it, so . Open a window about 5 cm mirror. (two inches) on the side of you might not know it is in your the vehicle that is away from vehicle. Clear away snow from { WARNING the wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on exhaust. under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument cause exhaust gases to get panel. Run the engine for short periods inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the Climate Control only as needed to keep warm, but carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that be careful. cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the To save fuel, run the engine for only cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed short periods as needed to warm death. to the highest setting. See the vehicle and then shut the engine (Continued) Climate Control System in the off and close the window most of Index. the way to save heat. Repeat this (Continued) until help arrives but only when you 9-10 Driving and Operating feel really uncomfortable from the Release the accelerator pedal while cold. Moving about to keep warm { WARNING shifting, and press lightly on the also helps. accelerator pedal when the If the vehicle's tires spin at high transmission is in gear. Slowly If it takes some time for help to speed, they can explode, and you arrive, now and then when you run spinning the wheels in the forward or others could be injured. The and reverse directions causes a the engine, push the accelerator vehicle can overheat, causing an pedal slightly so the engine runs rocking motion that could free the engine compartment fire or other vehicle. If that does not get the faster than the idle speed. This damage. Spin the wheels as little keeps the battery charged to restart vehicle out after a few tries, it might as possible and avoid going the vehicle and to signal for help need to be towed out. If the vehicle above 55 km/h (35 mph) as with the headlamps. Do this as little does need to be towed out, see as possible to save fuel. shown on the speedometer. Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑83. For information about using tire Vehicle Load Limits If the Vehicle is Stuck chains on the vehicle, see Tire Slowly and cautiously spin the Chains on page 10‑56. It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can wheels to free the vehicle when Rocking the Vehicle to Get stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. carry. This weight is called the it Out vehicle capacity weight and If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to free a stuck Turn the steering wheel left and includes the weight of all vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's right to clear the area around the occupants, cargo, and all traction system in the Index. If stuck front wheels. Turn off any traction or nonfactory-installed options. too severely for the traction system stability system. Shift back and forth Two labels on your vehicle show to free the vehicle, turn the traction between R (Reverse) and a forward how much weight it may system off and use the rocking gear, spinning the wheels as little as properly carry, the Tire and method. possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop Loading Information label and spinning before shifting gears. the Certification/Tire label. Driving and Operating 9-11

Tire and Loading Information seating positions (A), and the { WARNING Label maximum vehicle capacity Do not load the vehicle any weight (B) in kilograms and heavier than the Gross pounds. Vehicle Weight Rating The Tire and Loading (GVWR), or either the Information label also shows the maximum front or rear Gross size of the original equipment Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). tires (C) and the recommended If you do, parts on the vehicle cold tire inflation pressures (D). can break, and it can change For more information on tires the way your vehicle handles. and inflation see Tires on These could cause you to lose page 10‑37 and Tire Pressure on control and crash. Also, page 10‑43 . Example Label overloading can shorten the There is also important loading life of the vehicle. A vehicle specific Tire and information on the vehicle Loading Information label is Certification/Tire label. It tells attached to the center pillar you the Gross Vehicle Weight (B-pillar) of your vehicle. With Rating (GVWR) and the Gross the driver's door open, you will Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for find the label attached below the the front and rear axle. See door lock post (striker). The tire “Certification/Tire Label” later in and loading information label this section. shows the number of occupant 9-12 Driving and Operating

Steps for Determining Correct the amount of available cargo Load Limit and luggage load capacity 1. Locate the statement “The is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 combined weight of (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). occupants and cargo should 5. Determine the combined never exceed XXX kg or weight of luggage and cargo XXX lbs” on your vehicle's being loaded on the vehicle. placard. That weight may not safely 2. Determine the combined exceed the available cargo weight of the driver and and luggage load capacity passengers that will be riding calculated in Step 4. Example 1 in your vehicle. 6. If your vehicle will be towing A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 3. Subtract the combined a trailer, the load from your Example 1 = 453 kg weight of the driver and trailer will be transferred to (1,000 lbs). passengers from XXX kg or your vehicle. Consult this XXX lbs. manual to determine how this B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ reduces the available cargo 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 4. The resulting figure equals and luggage load capacity for (300 lbs). the available amount of cargo your vehicle. and luggage load capacity. C. Available Occupant and For example, if the “XXX” See Trailer Towing on page 9‑48 Cargo Weight = 317 kg amount equals 1400 lbs and for important information on (700 lbs). there will be five 150 lb towing a trailer, towing safety passengers in your vehicle, rules and trailering tips. Driving and Operating 9-13

seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label

Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example (750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification/ C. Available Cargo C. Available Cargo Tire label is attached to the rear Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs). Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs). edge of the driver's door. Refer to your vehicle's tire and The label shows the gross loading information label for weight capacity of your vehicle. specific information about your This is called the Gross Vehicle vehicle's capacity weight and Weight Rating (GVWR). 9-14 Driving and Operating

The GVWR includes the weight If you put things inside your { WARNING of the vehicle, all occupants, vehicle — like suitcases, tools, fuel, and cargo. Do not load the vehicle any packages, or anything else, they The Certification/Tire label also heavier than the Gross will go as fast as the vehicle tells you the maximum weights Vehicle Weight Rating goes. If you have to stop or turn for the front and rear axles, (GVWR), or either the quickly, or if there is a crash, called the Gross Axle Weight maximum front or rear Gross they will keep going. Rating (GAWR). To find out the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). actual loads on your front and If you do, parts on the vehicle { WARNING rear axles, you need to go to a can break, and it can change Things you put inside your weigh station and weigh your the way your vehicle handles. vehicle can strike and injure vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can These could cause you to lose people in a sudden stop or help you with this. Be sure to control and crash. Also, turn, or in a crash. spread out your load equally on overloading can shorten the both sides of the centerline. life of the vehicle. . Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to Never exceed the GVWR for Notice : Overloading the spread the weight evenly. your vehicle or the GAWR for vehicle may cause damage. either the front or rear axle. . Never stack heavier Repairs would not be covered things, like suitcases, by the vehicle warranty. Do inside the vehicle so that not overload the vehicle. some of them are above the tops of the seats. (Continued) Driving and Operating 9-15

. Avoid making hard stops for WARNING (Continued) Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles) or Operating so. During this time the new . Do not leave an brake linings are not yet unsecured child restraint New Vehicle Break-In broken in. Hard stops with in your vehicle. new linings can mean Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier . When you carry something need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this inside the vehicle, secure will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every it whenever you can. if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake . Do not leave a seat folded . If you have all-wheel drive, linings. down unless you need to. keep your speed at 88 km/h . Do not tow a trailer during (55 mph) or less for the first break-in. See Driving 805 km (500 miles). Characteristics and Towing . Do not drive at any one Tips on page 9‑44 for the constant speed, fast or trailer towing capabilities of slow, for the first 805 km your vehicle and more (500 miles). Do not make information. full-throttle starts. Avoid Following break-in, engine speed downshifting to brake or and load can be gradually slow the vehicle. increased. 9-16 Driving and Operating

Ignition Positions and turn it only with your hand. R (ON/RUN): This position can be If the key cannot be turned by used to operate the electrical hand, see your dealer/retailer. accessories and to display some ( (LOCK/OFF): This position locks instrument panel warning and the ignition and transmission. The indicator lights. The switch stays in key can be removed in LOCK/OFF. this position when the engine is running. The transmission is also The shift lever must be in P (Park) unlocked in this position. If you to turn the ignition switch to leave the key in the ACC/ LOCK/OFF. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position The steering can bind with the with the engine off, the battery could wheels turned off center. If this be drained. You may not be able to happens, move the steering wheel start the vehicle if the battery is from right to left while turning the allowed to drain for an extended The ignition switch has four different key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this period of time. positions. doesn't work, then the vehicle needs / (START): This is the position service. In order to shift out of P (Park), the that starts the engine. When the ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is engine starts, release the key. The ACCESSORY and the brake pedal the position in which you can ignition switch will return to ON/RUN must be applied. operate the electrical accessories or for driving. items plugged into the accessory Notice: Using a tool to force the power outlets. This position unlocks key to turn in the ignition could the ignition and steering wheel. Use cause damage to the switch or this position if the vehicle must be break the key. Use the correct pushed or towed. key, make sure it is all the way in, Driving and Operating 9-17

Retained Accessory Starting the Engine components. If the ignition key is turned to the START position, Power (RAP) Move the shift lever to P (Park) or and then released when the These vehicle accessories can be N (Neutral). The engine will not start engine begins cranking, the used for up to 10 minutes after the in any other position. To restart the engine will continue cranking for ignition key is turned off: engine when the vehicle is already a few seconds or until the moving, use N (Neutral) only. vehicle starts. If the engine does . Audio System Notice: Do not try to shift to not start and the key is held in . Power Windows P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. START, cranking will be stopped . Sunroof (if equipped) If you do, you could damage the after 15 seconds to prevent transmission. Shift to P (Park) cranking motor damage. To Power to the windows and sunroof only when the vehicle is stopped. prevent gear damage, this will work up to 10 minutes or until a system also prevents cranking if door is opened. Starting Procedure the engine is already running. The radio continues to work for 1. With your foot off the accelerator Engine cranking can be stopped 10 minutes or until the driver's door pedal, turn the ignition to START. by turning the ignition switch to is opened. When the engine starts, let go of the ACC/ACCESSORY or the key. The idle speed will slow LOCK/OFF position. For an additional 10 minutes of down as the engine warms. Do operation, close all the doors and Notice: Cranking the engine for not race the engine immediately turn the key to ON/RUN and then long periods of time, by returning after starting it. Operate the back to LOCK/OFF. the key to the START position engine and transmission gently immediately after cranking has All these features will work when the to allow the oil to warm up and ended, can overheat and damage key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ lubricate all moving parts. the cranking motor, and drain the ACCESSORY positions. The vehicle has a battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Computer-Controlled Cranking between each try, to let the System. This feature assists in cranking motor cool down. starting the engine and protects 9-18 Driving and Operating

2. If the engine does not start after Notice: The engine is designed to should be plugged in at least four 5-10 seconds, especially in very work with the electronics in the hours before starting. Some models cold weather (below 0°F or vehicle. If you add electrical parts may have an internal thermostat in −18°C), it could be flooded with or accessories, you could change the cord which will prevent engine too much gasoline. Try pushing the way the engine operates. coolant heater operation at the accelerator pedal all the way Before adding electrical temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). to the floor and holding it there equipment, check with your as you hold the key in START dealer/retailer. If you do not, the To Use the Engine Coolant for up to a maximum of engine might not perform Heater 15 seconds. Wait at least properly. Any resulting damage 1. Turn off the engine. 15 seconds between each try, to would not be covered by the allow the cranking motor to cool vehicle warranty. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the down. When the engine starts, electrical cord. The cord is let go of the key and accelerator. Engine Heater located on the driver side of the If the vehicle starts briefly but engine compartment. It is routed then stops again, repeat these The engine coolant heater can around the windshield washer steps. This clears the extra provide easier starting and better fluid reservoir. gasoline from the engine. Do not fuel economy during engine 3. Plug the cord into a normal, race the engine immediately warm-up in cold weather conditions grounded 110-volt AC outlet. after starting it. Operate the at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles engine and transmission gently with an engine coolant heater until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts. Driving and Operating 9-19

Shifting Into Park 3. Turn the ignition key to { WARNING LOCK/OFF. Plugging the cord into an { WARNING 4. Remove the key and take it with ungrounded outlet could cause an you. If you can leave the vehicle electrical shock. Also, the wrong It can be dangerous to get out of with the ignition key in your kind of extension cord could the vehicle if the shift lever is not hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). fully in P (Park) with the parking overheat and cause a fire. You Leaving the Vehicle with the brake firmly set. The vehicle can could be seriously injured. Plug Engine Running the cord into a properly grounded roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. { WARNING If the cord will not reach, use a suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will heavy-duty three-prong extension It can be dangerous to leave the not move, even when you are on cord rated for at least 15 amps. vehicle with the engine running. fairly level ground, use the steps The vehicle could move suddenly that follow. If you are pulling a 4. Before starting the engine, be if the shift lever is not fully in sure to unplug and store the trailer, see Driving Characteristics P (Park) with the parking brake cord as it was before to keep it and Towing Tips on page 9 44. ‑ firmly set. And, if you leave the away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be 1. Hold the brake pedal down and vehicle with the engine running, it damaged. set the parking brake. See could overheat and even catch Parking Brake on page 9 27 for fire. You or others could be The length of time the heater should ‑ more information. injured. Do not leave the vehicle remain plugged in depends on with the engine running. several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) in the area where you will be by holding in the button on the If you have to leave the vehicle with parking the vehicle for the best shift lever and pushing the shift the engine running, be sure the advice on this. lever all the way toward the front vehicle is in P (Park) and the of the vehicle. parking brake is firmly set before 9-20 Driving and Operating you leave it. After you have moved Shifting Out of Park If the vehicle has an uncharged the shift lever into P (Park), hold the battery or a battery with low voltage, regular brake pedal down. Then, The vehicle is equipped with an try charging or jump starting the see if you can move the shift lever electronic shift lock release system. battery. See Jump Starting on away from P (Park) without first The shift lock release is page 10‑78 for more information. designed to: pushing the button. To shift out of P (Park): . Prevent ignition key removal If you can, it means that the shift 1. Apply the brake pedal. lever was not fully locked in unless the shift lever is in P (Park). P (Park) with the shift lever 2. Press the shift lever button. button fully released, and Torque Lock 3. Move the shift lever to the . Prevent movement of the shift desired position. Torque lock is when the weight lever out of P (Park), unless the of the vehicle puts too much ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ If you still are unable to shift out of force on the parking pawl in the ACCESSORY and the regular P (Park): transmission. This happens when brake pedal is applied. 1. Fully release the shift lever parking on a hill and shifting the The shift lock release is always button. transmission into P (Park) is not functional except in the case of an 2. While holding down the brake done properly and then it is difficult uncharged or low voltage (less than pedal, press the shift lever to shift out of P (Park). To prevent 9 volt) battery. button again. torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find 3. Move the shift lever to the out how, see “Shifting Into Park” desired position. listed previously. If you still cannot move the shift If torque lock does occur, your lever from P (Park), see your dealer/ vehicle may need to be pushed retailer. uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park). Driving and Operating 9-21

Parking Over Things Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued) That Burn { WARNING . There are holes or openings { WARNING in the vehicle body from Engine exhaust contains Carbon damage or after-market Things that can burn could touch Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: . The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows with poor ventilation (parking completely down. garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired that may block underbody immediately. airflow or tail pipes). Never park the vehicle with the . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. . The vehicle’s exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired. (Continued) 9-22 Driving and Operating

Running the Vehicle { WARNING Automatic While Parked Transmission It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic The automatic transmission has a engine running. But if you ever have shift lever located on the console to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake between the seats. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do { WARNING not leave the vehicle when the Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground, and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park). has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be sure P (Park): This position locks the the vehicle will not move. See Exhaust on page 9‑21. front wheels. It is the best position Shifting Into Park on page 9‑19. to use when starting the engine If parking on a hill and pulling a because the vehicle cannot move trailer, see Driving Characteristics easily. and Towing Tips on page 9‑44. Driving and Operating 9-23

system. You must fully apply the N (Neutral): In this position, the { WARNING regular brake first and then press engine does not connect with the the shift lever button before shifting wheels. To restart the engine when It is dangerous to get out of the from P (Park) when the ignition key the vehicle is already moving, use vehicle if the shift lever is not fully is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out N (Neutral) only. Also, use in P (Park) with the parking brake of P (Park), ease pressure on the N (Neutral) when the vehicle is firmly set. The vehicle can roll. shift lever, then push the shift lever being towed. Do not leave the vehicle when the all the way into P (Park) as you engine is running unless you maintain brake application. Then { WARNING have to. If you have left the press the shift lever button and engine running, the vehicle can move the shift lever into another Shifting into a drive gear while the move suddenly. You or others gear. See Shifting Out of Park on engine is running at high speed is page 9 20. could be injured. To be sure the ‑ dangerous. Unless your foot is vehicle will not move, even when R (Reverse): Use this gear to firmly on the brake pedal, the you are on fairly level ground, back up. vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit always set the parking brake and Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) people or objects. Do not shift move the shift lever to P (Park). while the vehicle is moving See Shifting Into Park on forward could damage the into a drive gear while the engine page 9‑19. If you are pulling a transmission. The repairs would is running at high speed. trailer, see Driving Characteristics not be covered by the vehicle Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or and Towing Tips on page 9‑44. warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped. N (Neutral) with the engine Make sure the shift lever is fully in running at high speed may To rock the vehicle back and forth to P (Park) before starting the engine. damage the transmission. The get out of snow, ice or sand without The vehicle has an automatic repairs would not be covered by damaging the transmission, see If transmission shift lock control the vehicle warranty. Be sure the the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑10. engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle. 9-24 Driving and Operating

D (Drive): This position is for Manual Mode Information Center (DIC) (With DIC normal driving. It provides the best Buttons) on page 5‑30 or Driver fuel economy. If you need more Electronic Range Select Information Center (DIC) (Without power for passing, and you are: (ERS) Mode DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30 for more information. The number . Going less than 56 km/h ERS mode allows you to choose the displayed in the DIC is the highest (35 mph), push the accelerator top-gear limit of the transmission gear that the transmission will be pedal about halfway down. and the vehicle's speed while allowed to operate in. This means driving down hill or towing a trailer. . Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or that all gears below that number are The vehicle has an electronic shift more, push the accelerator all available. For example, when position indicator within the the way down. 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L, instrument panel cluster. When 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are Notice: If the vehicle seems to using the ERS Mode a number will automatically shifted by the vehicle. accelerate slowly or not shift display next to the L, indicating the The transmission will not shift into gears when you go faster, and current gear that has been selected. you continue to drive the vehicle 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is that way, you could damage the To use this feature: used or you shift back into D (Drive). transmission. Have the vehicle 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). While in L (Low), the transmission serviced right away. You can 2. Press the plus/minus button will prevent shifting to a lower gear drive in L (Low) when you are located on the shift lever, to range if the engine speed is too driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph) increase or decrease the gear high. You have a brief period of time and D (Drive) for higher speeds range available. to slow the vehicle. If vehicle speed until then. is not reduced within the time When you shift from D (Drive) to L (Low): This position gives you allowed, the lower gear range shift L (Low), the transmission will shift to access to gear ranges. This will not be completed. You must a pre-determined lower gear range . provides more engine braking but further slow the vehicle, then press The highest gear available for this lower fuel economy than D (Drive). the − (Minus) button to the desired pre-determined range is displayed You can use it on very steep hills, lower gear range. next to the L in the DIC. See Driver or in deep snow or mud. Driving and Operating 9-25

Automatic Engine Grade braking is Automatic Engine Grade Drive Systems not available when the ERS is Braking active. It is available in D (Drive) for both normal and Tow/Haul mode. Automatic Engine Grade Braking All-Wheel Drive assists when driving on a downhill While using the ERS, cruise control With this feature, engine power is grade. It maintains vehicle speed by and the tow/haul mode can be used. always sent to all four wheels. It is automatically implementing a shift See Tow/Haul Mode following. fully automatic, and adjusts itself as schedule that uses the engine and needed for road conditions. the transmission to slow the vehicle. Tow/Haul Mode The system will automatically When using a compact spare tire on _ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may command downshifts to reduce an AWD vehicle, the system have a Tow/Haul mode. vehicle speed, until the brake pedal automatically detects the compact spare and disables AWD. To restore The button is located on the is no longer being pressed. AWD operation and prevent instrument panel under the climate While in the Electronic Range excessive wear on system, replace controls. Select (ERS) mode, grade braking the compact spare with a full-size is deactivated, allowing the driver to Push the button to activate the tire as soon as possible. See select a range and limiting the system. Push it again to deactivate Compact Spare Tire on page 10 77 highest gear available. Grade ‑ the system. You can use this feature for more information. to assist when towing or hauling a braking is available for normal heavy load. driving and in Tow/Haul mode. When Tow/Haul is activated the See Automatic Transmission on Tow/Haul symbol will come on the page 9‑22. instrument panel cluster. See “Tow/ Haul Mode” under Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9‑44 for more information. 9-26 Driving and Operating

Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it close to the vehicle in front of you, becomes necessary to slam on the there will not be enough time to brakes and continue braking to apply the brakes if that vehicle Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a suddenly slows or stops. Always System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels leave enough room up ahead to are slowing down. If one of the stop, even with ABS. This vehicle has the Antilock Brake wheels is about to stop rolling, the System (ABS), an advanced computer will separately work the Using ABS electronic braking system that helps brakes at each wheel. prevent a braking skid. Do not pump the brakes. Just hold ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal down firmly and let When the engine is started and the to each wheel, as required, faster ABS work. The ABS pump or motor vehicle begins to drive away, ABS than any driver could. This can help might be heard operating, and the checks itself. A momentary motor or the driver steer around the obstacle brake pedal might be felt to pulsate, clicking noise might be heard while while braking hard. but this is normal. this test is going on, and it might even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the Braking in Emergencies pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates ABS allows the driver to steer and on wheel speed and controls brake at the same time. In many braking pressure accordingly. emergencies, steering can help Remember: ABS does not change more than even the very best the time needed to get a foot up to braking. the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 5‑21. Driving and Operating 9-27

Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature This vehicle has a Brake Assist wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the driving. stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the To release the parking brake, hold power brake system under the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The foot up off the park brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake To set the parking brake, hold the If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake regular brake pedal down, then when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the push the parking brake pedal down. system warning light will be on and vehicle until the ABS activates. a chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsations or If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on. system warning light will come on. pedal movement during this time See Brake System Warning Light If you are towing a trailer and are is normal and the driver should on page 5‑20. parking on a hill, see Trailer Towing continue to apply the brake pedal on page 9‑48. as the driving situation dictates. The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased. 9-28 Driving and Operating

Ride Control Systems will be displayed on the Driver The system may be heard or felt Information Center (DIC): while it is working; this is normal. TRACTION CONTROL OFF, StabiliTrak System SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, The vehicle has the StabiliTrak SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these system which combines antilock conditions are observed, turn the brake, traction and stability control vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and systems and helps the driver then turn it back on again to reset maintain directional control of the the system. If any of these vehicle in most driving conditions. messages still appear on the Driver The traction control disable button is Information Center (DIC), the located on the instrument panel When you first start the vehicle and vehicle should be taken in for below the climate controls. begin to drive away, the system service. For more information on the The traction control part of performs several diagnostic checks DIC messages, see Driver StabiliTrak can be turned off by to ensure there are no problems. Information Center (DIC) (With DIC pressing and releasing the traction The system may be heard or felt Buttons) on page 5 24 or Driver ‑ control disable button. while it is working. This is normal Information Center (DIC) (Without and does not mean there is a DIC Buttons) on page 5‑30. Traction control can be turned on by problem with the vehicle. The pressing and releasing the traction system should initialize before the control disable button if not vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). automatically shut off for any other In some cases, it may take reason. approximately 3.2 km (2 miles) of driving before the system initializes. When the traction control system is turned off, the StabiliTrak light and If the system fails to turn on or the appropriate traction control off activate, the StabiliTrak light along The StabiliTrak light will flash on the message will be displayed on the with one of the following messages instrument panel cluster when the DIC to warn the driver. The vehicle system is both on and activated. will still have brake-traction control Driving and Operating 9-29 when traction control is off, but will applying brakes to each individual warranty. Reduce engine power not be able to use the engine speed wheel (brake-traction control) as and do not spin the wheel(s) management system. See “Traction necessary. excessively while these lights and Control Operation” next for more The traction control system is messages are displayed. information. enabled automatically when the The traction control system may When the traction control system vehicle is started. It will activate and activate on dry or rough roads or has been turned off, system noises the StabiliTrak light will flash if it under conditions such as heavy may be heard and felt as a result of senses that any of the wheels are acceleration while turning or the brake-traction control working. spinning or beginning to lose abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the It is recommended to leave the traction while driving. If traction transmission. When this happens, a system on for normal driving control is turned off, only the reduction in acceleration may be conditions, but it may be necessary brake-traction control portion of noticed, or a noise or vibration may to turn the system off if the vehicle traction control will work. The be heard. This is normal. is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, engine speed management will be If cruise control is being used when disabled. In this mode, engine and you want to “rock” the vehicle to the system activates, the StabiliTrak attempt to free it. It may also be power is not reduced automatically light will flash and cruise control will necessary to turn off the system and the driven wheels can spin automatically disengage. Cruise when driving in extreme off-road more freely. This can cause the control may be reengaged when conditions where high wheel spin is brake-traction control to activate road conditions allow. See Cruise constantly. required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck Control on page 9‑30. on page 9‑10. Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle StabiliTrak may also turn off is allowed to spin excessively Traction Control Operation automatically if it determines that a while the StabiliTrak, ABS and problem exists with the system. The traction control system is part of brake warning lights and any If the problem does not clear itself the StabiliTrak system. Traction relevant DIC messages are after restarting the vehicle, see your control limits wheel spin by reducing displayed, the transfer case could dealer/retailer for service. engine power to the wheels (engine be damaged. The repairs would speed management) and by not be covered by the vehicle 9-30 Driving and Operating

Cruise Control Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the With cruise control, a speed of parking brake is set, or if the master about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can cylinder brake fluid level is low. be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise The cruise control light on the control does not work at speeds instrument panel cluster comes on below about 40 km/h (25 mph). after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed. When the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged. { WARNING { WARNING The cruise control buttons are If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, Cruise control can be dangerous located on left side of the steering you might hit a button and go into where you cannot drive safely at wheel. cruise when you do not want to. a steady speed. So, do not use T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise You could be startled and even the cruise control on winding control on and off. The indicator lose control. Keep the cruise roads or in heavy traffic. comes on when cruise control is on. control switch off until you want to Cruise control can be dangerous + RES (Resume/Accelerate): use cruise control. on slippery roads. On such roads, Press to make the vehicle fast changes in tire traction can accelerate or resume to a previously 1. Press the I button. cause excessive wheel slip, and set speed. 2. Get up to the speed desired. you could lose control. Do not use SET– : Press to set the speed or cruise control on slippery roads. make the vehicle decelerate. [ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control. Driving and Operating 9-31

3. Press and release the SET– Increasing Speed While Using . To slow down in very small button located on the steering Cruise Control amounts, press the SET– button wheel. briefly. Each time this is done, There are two ways to increase the the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h 4. Take your foot off the vehicle speed while using cruise (1 mph) slower. accelerator. control: Passing Another Vehicle While . Press and hold the +RES button Resuming a Set Speed Using Cruise Control on the steering wheel until the If the cruise control is set at a desired speed is reached, then Use the accelerator pedal to desired speed and then the brakes release it. increase vehicle speed. When you are applied, the cruise control is take your foot off the pedal, the . To increase vehicle speed in disengaged. But it does not need to vehicle will slow down to the small increments, press the be reset. previously set cruise speed. +RES button briefly. Each time Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h this is done, the vehicle goes Using Cruise Control on Hills (25 mph) or greater, press the +RES about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. button on the steering wheel. The How well the cruise control will work vehicle returns to the previously set Reducing Speed While Using on hills depends upon the vehicle speed and stays there. Cruise Control speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, There are two ways to reduce the you might have to step on the vehicle speed while using cruise accelerator pedal to maintain the control: vehicle speed. When going . Press and hold the SET– button downhill, you might have to brake or on the steering wheel until the shift to a lower gear to keep the lower speed desired is reached, vehicle speed down. When the then release it. brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged. 9-32 Driving and Operating

Ending Cruise Control Object Detection { WARNING There are three ways to end cruise Systems control: The Ultrasonic Rear Parking . Step lightly on the brake pedal. Ultrasonic Parking Assist Assist (URPA) system does not replace driver vision. It cannot . Press the [ button. For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect: Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, . Press the button. . objects that are below the T it operates at speeds less than bumper, underneath the 8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the Erasing Speed Memory vehicle, or if they are too driver with parking and avoiding close or far from the vehicle The cruise control set speed objects while in R (Reverse). The memory is erased when the cruise sensors on the rear bumper are . children, pedestrians, control or the ignition is turned off. used to detect the distance to an bicyclists, or pets. object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the If you do not use proper care vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in) before and while backing; vehicle off the ground. damage, injury, or death could occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure to look for objects and check the vehicle's mirrors. Driving and Operating 9-33

How the System Works When the System Does Not . A tow bar is attached to the vehicle. URPA comes on automatically when Seem to Work Properly . the shift lever is moved into If the URPA system does not The vehicle's bumper is R (Reverse). A single tone sounds activate due to a temporary damaged. Take the vehicle to to indicate the system is working. condition, the message PARK your dealer/retailer to repair the system. URPA operates only at speeds less ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC than 5 mph (8 km/h). when the shift lever is moved into . Other conditions may affect R (Reverse). This may occur under system performance, such as An obstacle is indicated by audible the following conditions: vibrations from a jackhammer or beeps. The interval between the the compression of air brakes on . The driver disables the system. beeps becomes shorter as the a very large truck. vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. . The ultrasonic sensors are not When the distance is less than clean. Keep the vehicle's rear If the system is still disabled, after 30 cm (12 in) the beeps are bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, driving forward at least 25 km/h continuous. ice and slush. For cleaning (15 mph), take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer. To be detected, objects must be at instructions, see Exterior Care least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground on page 10‑86. and below liftgate level. Objects . A trailer was attached to the must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from vehicle, or a bicycle or an object the rear bumper. This distance may was hanging out of the liftgate be less during warmer or humid during the last drive cycle. Once weather. the attached object is removed, The system can be disabled through URPA will return to normal the Driver Information Center (DIC). operation. See “Park Assist” under Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42 for more information. 9-34 Driving and Operating

Rear Vision When the key is in the ON/RUN WARNING (Continued) position and the driver shifts the Camera (RVC) vehicle into R (Reverse), the video The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Your judged distances using the image automatically appears on the Camera system. Read this entire screen will differ from actual inside rear view mirror. Once the section before using it. distances. driver shifts out of R (Reverse), So if you do not use proper care the video image automatically { WARNING before backing up, you could hit a disappears from the inside rear view vehicle, child, pedestrian, mirror. The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) bicyclist, or pet, resulting in Turning the Rear Vision Camera system does not replace driver vehicle damage, injury, or death. System Off or On vision. RVC does not: Even though the vehicle has the To turn off the rear vision camera . Detect objects that are RVC system, always check system, press and hold , located outside the camera's field of carefully before backing up by z view, below the bumper, checking behind and around the on the inside rearview mirror, until or underneath the vehicle. vehicle. the left indicator light turns off. The rear vision camera display is now . Detect children, pedestrians, Vehicles Without Navigation disabled. bicyclists, or pets. System To turn the rear vision camera Do not back the vehicle by only system on again, press and looking at the RVC screen, or use The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when hold z until the left indicator light the screen during longer, higher backing up by displaying a view illuminates. The rear vision camera speed backing maneuvers or of the area behind the vehicle. system display is now enabled and where there could be cross-traffic. the display will appear in the mirror (Continued) normally. Driving and Operating 9-35

Vehicles With Navigation 3. Select the Rear Camera Options The delay that is received after System screen button. The Rear Camera shifting out of R (Reverse) is Options screen displays. approximately 10 seconds. The rear vision camera system is The delay can be cancelled by designed to help the driver when performing one of the following: backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. When . Pressing a hard key on the the driver shifts the vehicle into navigation system. R (Reverse), the video image . Shifting in to P (Park). automatically appears on the navigation screen. Once the driver . Reach a vehicle speed of shifts out of R (Reverse), the 5 mph (8 km/h). navigation screen will go back to the There is a message on the rear last screen that had been displayed, vision camera screen that states after a delay. “Check Surroundings for Safety”. Turning the Rear Vision Camera Adjusting the Brightness and System On or Off 4. Select the Video screen button. Contrast of the Screen To turn the rear vision camera When the Video screen button is To adjust the brightness and system on or off: highlighted the RVC system contrast of the screen, press the is on. 1. Shift into P (Park). MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display. Any 2. Press the MENU button to enter adjustments made will only affect the configure menu options, then the rear vision camera screen. press the MENU hard key to ] select Display or touch the (Brightness) : Touch the + Display screen button. (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen. 9-36 Driving and Operating

_ (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus) To turn the symbols on or off: Rear Vision Camera Error or – (minus) screen buttons to 1. Make sure that URPA has not Messages increase or decrease the contrast of been disabled. Service Rear Vision Camera the screen. 2. Shift into P (Park). System: This message can display Symbols when the system is not receiving 3. Press the MENU hard key to information it requires from other The navigation system may have a enter the configure menu vehicle systems. feature that lets the driver view options, then press the MENU symbols on the navigation screen hard key repeatedly until Display If any other problem occurs or if a while using the rear vision camera. is selected or touch the Display problem persists, see your dealer/ The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist screen button. retailer. (URPA) system must not be 4. Select the Rear Camera Options Rear Vision Camera Location disabled to use the caution symbols. screen button. The Rear Camera If URPA has been disabled and the Options screen will display. symbols have been turned on, the Rear Parking Assist Symbols 5. Touch the Symbols screen Unavailable error message may button. The screen button will be display. See Ultrasonic Parking highlighted when on. Assist on page 9‑32. The symbols appear when an object has been detected by the URPA system. The symbol may cover the object when viewing the navigation screen.

The camera is located above the license plate. Driving and Operating 9-37

The area displayed by the camera is When the System Does Not limited and does not display objects Seem To Work Properly that are close to either corner or under the bumper. The area The rear vision camera system displayed can vary depending on might not work properly or display a vehicle orientation or road clear image if: conditions. The distance of the . The RVC is turned off. See image that appears on the screen “Turning the Rear Camera differs from the actual distance. System On or Off” earlier in this The following illustration shows the section. field of view that the camera . It is dark. provides. . The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens. . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it with a soft cloth.

A. View displayed by the camera. B. Corner of the rear bumper. 9-38 Driving and Operating

. The back of the vehicle is in an . A fast flash may indicate that the accident, the position and display has been on for the Fuel mounting angle of the camera maximum allowable time during Use of the recommended fuel is an can change or the camera can a reverse cycle, or the display important part of the proper be affected. Be sure to have the has reached an Over maintenance of this vehicle. To help camera and its position and Temperature limit. keep the engine clean and maintain mounting angle checked at your The fast flash conditions are optimum vehicle performance, we dealer/retailer. used to protect the video device recommend the use of gasoline . There are extreme temperature from high temperature advertised as TOP TIER Detergent changes. conditions. Once conditions Gasoline. The rear vision camera system return to normal the device will Look for the TOP TIER label on the display in the rearview mirror may reset and the green indicator will fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets turn off or not appear as expected stop flashing. enhanced detergency standards due to one of the following During any of these fault conditions, developed by auto companies. A list conditions. If this occurs the left the display will be blank and the of marketers providing TOP TIER indicator light on the mirror will indicator will continue to flash as Detergent Gasoline can be found at flash. long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) www.toptiergas.com. or until the conditions return to . A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal, or no video normal. signal present during the reverse Pressing and holding z when the cycle. left indicator light is flashing will turn off the video display along with the left indicator light. Driving and Operating 9-39

Recommended Fuel California Fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline with Requirements a posted octane rating of 87 or If the vehicle is certified to meet higher. If the octane rating is less California Emissions Standards, it is than 87, an audible knocking noise, designed to operate on fuels that commonly referred to as spark meet California specifications. See knock, might be heard when driving. the underhood emission control If this occurs, use a gasoline rated label. If this fuel is not available in at 87 octane or higher as soon as states adopting California emissions possible. If heavy knocking is heard standards, the vehicle will operate when using gasoline rated at satisfactorily on fuels meeting 87 octane or higher, the engine federal specifications, but emission needs service. control system performance might be affected. The malfunction Gasoline Specifications indicator lamp could turn on and the At a minimum, gasoline vehicle might fail a smog-check test. should meet ASTM specification See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on D 4814 in the United States or page 5‑17. If this occurs, return to CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. your authorized dealer/retailer for Some gasolines contain an diagnosis. If it is determined that the octane-enhancing additive called condition is caused by the type of methylcyclopentadienyl manganese fuel used, repairs might not be tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend covered by the vehicle warranty. against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel Additives on page 9‑40 for additional information. 9-40 Driving and Operating

Fuels in Foreign Fuel Additives Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure Countries To provide cleaner air, all gasolines gasoline meets enhanced If you plan on driving in another in the United States are now detergency standards developed by country outside the United States or required to contain additives that the auto companies. A list of Canada, the proper fuel might be help prevent engine and fuel system marketers providing TOP TIER hard to find. Never use leaded deposits from forming, allowing the Detergent Gasoline can be found at gasoline or any other fuel not emission control system to work www.toptiergas.com. properly. In most cases, nothing recommended in the previous text For customers who do not use TOP on fuel. Costly repairs caused by should have to be added to the fuel. However, some gasolines contain TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, use of improper fuel would not be one bottle of GM Fuel System covered by the vehicle warranty. only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel To check the fuel availability, ask an Environmental Protection Agency tank at every engine oil change, can auto club, or contact a major oil regulations. To help keep fuel help clean deposits from fuel company that does business in the injectors and intake valves clean, injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel country where you will be driving. or if the vehicle experiences System Treatment PLUS is the only problems due to dirty injectors or gasoline additive recommended by valves, look for gasoline that is General Motors. It is available at advertised as TOP TIER Detergent your dealer/retailer. Driving and Operating 9-41

Gasolines containing oxygenates, Some gasolines that are Filling the Tank such as ethers and ethanol, and not reformulated for low reformulated gasolines might be emissions can contain an available in your area. We octane-enhancing additive called { WARNING recommend that you use these methylcyclopentadienyl manganese Fuel vapor burns violently and a gasolines, if they comply with the tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant fuel fire can cause bad injuries. specifications described earlier. where you buy gasoline whether the To help avoid injuries to you and However, E85 (85% ethanol) and fuel contains MMT. We recommend other fuels containing more than against the use of such gasolines. others, read and follow all the 10% ethanol must not be used in Fuels containing MMT can reduce instructions on the fuel pump vehicles that were not designed for the life of spark plugs and the island. Turn off the engine when those fuels. performance of the emission control refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when refueling the vehicle. Notice: This vehicle was not system could be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp might Do not use cellular phones. Keep designed for fuel that contains sparks, flames, and smoking methanol. Do not use fuel turn on. If this occurs, return to your materials away from fuel. Do not containing methanol. It can dealer/retailer for service. leave the fuel pump unattended corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic when refueling the vehicle. This is and rubber parts. That damage against the law in some places. would not be covered under the Do not re-enter the vehicle while vehicle warranty. pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle. 9-42 Driving and Operating

To open the fuel door, push the allow fuel to evaporate into the rearward center edge in and release { WARNING atmosphere. See Malfunction and it will open. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17. Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then { WARNING something ignites it, you could be If a fire starts while you are badly burned. This spray can refueling, do not remove the happen if the tank is nearly full, nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by and is more likely in hot weather. shutting off the pump or by Open the fuel cap slowly and wait notifying the station attendant. for any hiss noise to stop. Then Leave the area immediately. unscrew the cap all the way. Notice: If a new fuel cap is Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not needed, be sure to get the right top off or overfill the tank and wait a type of cap from your dealer/ To remove the fuel cap, turn it few seconds after you have finished retailer. The wrong type fuel cap slowly counterclockwise. The fuel pumping before removing the might not fit properly, might cap has a spring in it; if the cap is nozzle. Clean fuel from painted cause the malfunction indicator released too soon, it will spring back surfaces as soon as possible. See lamp to light, and could damage to the right. Exterior Care on page 10‑86. the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator While refueling, hang the tethered When replacing the fuel cap, turn it Lamp on page 5 17. fuel cap from the hook on the clockwise until it clicks. Make sure ‑ fuel door. the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would Driving and Operating 9-43

Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing Container . Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing { WARNING with the inside of the fill Information opening before operating the Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be Only use towing equipment that has while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is been designed for the vehicle. electricity discharge from the complete. Contact your dealer/retailer or container can ignite the fuel towing retailer for assistance with . Do not smoke while vapor. You can be badly burned preparing the vehicle for towing a pumping fuel. trailer. and the vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you . Do not use a cellular phone See the following trailer towing and others: while pumping fuel. information in this section: . Dispense fuel only into . For information on driving while approved containers. towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips. . Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see Trailer Towing. or on any surface other than . For information on equipment to the ground. tow a trailer, see Towing (Continued) Equipment. For information on towing a disabled vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑83. For information on towing the vehicle behind another 9-44 Driving and Operating vehicle — such as a motorhome, The vehicle can tow a trailer when Pulling A Trailer see Recreational Vehicle Towing on equipped with the proper trailer Here are some important points: page 10‑83. towing equipment. For trailering capacity, see Trailer Towing on . There are many laws, including Driving Characteristics page 9‑48. Trailering changes speed limit restrictions that apply and Towing Tips handling, acceleration, braking, to trailering. Check for legal durability and fuel economy. With requirements with state or the added weight, the engine, provincial police. { WARNING transmission, wheel assemblies and . Consider using sway control. tires are forced to work harder and See Towing Equipment on The driver can lose control when under greater loads. The trailer also page 9‑52. pulling a trailer if the correct adds wind resistance, increasing the equipment is not used or the pulling requirements. For safe . Do not tow a trailer at all during vehicle is not driven properly. For trailering, correctly use the proper the first 800 km (500 miles) the example, if the trailer is too trailering equipment. new vehicle is driven. The heavy, the brakes may not work engine, axle or other parts could The following information has well or even at all. The driver be damaged. — important trailering tips and rules for and passengers could be your safety and that of your . During the first 800 km seriously injured. The vehicle may passengers. Read this section (500 miles) that a trailer is also be damaged; the resulting carefully before pulling a trailer. towed, do not drive over 80 km/h repairs would not be covered by (50 mph) and do not make starts the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer at full throttle. This reduces wear only if all the steps in this section on the vehicle. have been followed. Ask your . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). dealer/retailer for advice and Use a lower gear if the information about towing a trailer transmission shifts too often. with the vehicle. See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in this section. Driving and Operating 9-45

. Obey speed limit restrictions During the trip, check regularly to be . Improve control of vehicle speed when towing a trailer. sure that the load is secure, and the while requiring less throttle pedal activity. . The vehicle is designed primarily lamps and trailer brakes are working as a passenger and load properly. . Increase the charging system carrying vehicle. If a trailer is Towing with a Stability Control voltage to assist in recharging a towed, the vehicle will require battery installed in a trailer. more frequent maintenance due System to the additional load. When towing, the sound of the stability control system might be Driving with a Trailer heard. The system is reacting to the Towing a trailer requires experience. vehicle movement caused by the Get familiar with handling and trailer, which mainly occurs during braking with the added trailer cornering. This is normal when weight. The vehicle is now longer towing heavier trailers. Press this button located on the and not as responsive as the console to turn on and turn off the vehicle is by itself. Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul mode. Check all trailer hitch parts and Tow/Haul assists when pulling a The Tow/Haul light on the attachments, safety chains, heavy trailer or a large or heavy instrument panel comes on to electrical connectors, lamps, tires load. The purpose of the Tow/Haul indicate that Tow/Haul mode has and mirror adjustments. If the trailer mode is to: been selected. . has electric brakes, start the vehicle Reduce the frequency and Tow/Haul may be turned off by and trailer moving and then apply improve the predictability of pressing the button again, at which the trailer brake controller by hand transmission shifts. time the indicator light on the to be sure the brakes are working. . Provide the same solid shift feel instrument panel will turn off. The as when the vehicle is unloaded. vehicle will automatically turn off Tow/Haul every time it is started. 9-46 Driving and Operating

Tow/Haul is designed to be most Following Distance Making Turns effective when the vehicle and Stay at least twice as far behind the Notice: Making very sharp turns trailer combined weight is at least vehicle ahead as you would when while trailering could cause the 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross driving the vehicle without a trailer. trailer to come in contact with the Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). This can help to avoid situations vehicle. The vehicle could be See Trailer Towing on page 9 48. ‑ that require heavy braking and damaged. Avoid making very Tow/Haul is most useful when sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering. pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load under the following Passing When turning with a trailer, make driving conditions: wider turns than normal so the More passing distance is needed trailer will not strike soft shoulders, . Travelling through rolling terrain. when towing a trailer. Because the curbs, road signs, trees or other . Travelling in stop and go traffic. rig is longer, it is necessary to go objects. Use the turn signal well in farther beyond the passed vehicle advance and avoid jerky or sudden . Travelling in busy parking lots before returning to the lane. where improved low speed maneuvers. control of the vehicle is desired. Backing Up Turn Signals When Towing a Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul Hold the bottom of the steering Trailer when lightly loaded or with no trailer wheel with one hand. To move the The turn signal indicators on the will not cause damage but there is trailer to the left, move that hand to instrument panel flash whenever no benefit. Such a selection when the left. To move the trailer to the signaling a turn or lane change. unloaded may result in unpleasant right, move your hand to the right. Properly hooked up, the trailer engine and transmission driving Always back up slowly and, lamps also flash, telling other characteristics and reduced fuel if possible, have someone drivers the vehicle is turning, economy. guide you. changing lanes or stopping. Driving and Operating 9-47

When towing a trailer, the arrows on avoid this, let the engine run while If parking the rig on a hill: the instrument panel flash for turns parked, preferably on level ground, 1. Press the brake pedal, but do even if the bulbs on the trailer are with the transmission in P (Park) for not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn burned out. Check occasionally to a few minutes before turning the the wheels into the curb if facing be sure the trailer bulbs are still engine off. If the overheat warning downhill or into traffic if facing working. comes on, see Engine Overheating uphill. on page 10‑18. Driving On Grades 2. Have someone place chocks On a long uphill grade, shift down under the trailer wheels. Reduce speed and shift to a and reduce the vehicle speed to lower gear before starting down a around 88 km/h (55 mph) to reduce 3. When the wheel chocks are in long or steep downgrade. If the the possibility of the engine and the place, release the brake pedal transmission is not shifted down, the transmission overheating. until the chocks absorb the load. brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then no longer work well. apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). { WARNING Use a lower gear if the transmission 5. Release the brake pedal. shifts too often. Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill When towing at high altitude on dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal steep uphill grades, engine coolant wrong, the rig could start to move. while you: will boil at a lower temperature than People can be injured, and both at normal altitudes. If the engine is . Start the engine. the vehicle and the trailer can be turned off immediately after towing . damaged. When possible, always Shift into a gear. at high altitude on steep uphill . grades, the vehicle may show signs park the rig on a flat surface. Release the parking brake. similar to engine overheating. To 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 9-48 Driving and Operating

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is Engine Cooling When Trailer Weight of the Trailer clear of the chocks. Towing How heavy can a trailer safely be? 4. Stop and have someone pick up The cooling system may temporarily Speed, altitude, road grades, and store the chocks. overheat during severe operating outside temperature, special Maintenance When Trailer conditions. See Engine Overheating equipment, and the amount of on page 10 18. Towing ‑ tongue weight the vehicle can carry must be considered. See “Weight of The vehicle needs service more Trailer Towing the Trailer Tongue” later in this often when pulling a trailer. See this section for more information. manual's Maintenance Schedule or Three important considerations Index for more information. Things have to do with weight: Maximum trailer weight is calculated that are especially important in . The weight of the trailer assuming only the driver is in the trailer operation are automatic tow vehicle and it has all the . The weight of the trailer tongue transmission fluid, engine oil, axle required trailering equipment. lubricant, belts, cooling system and . The total weight on the vehicle's The weight of additional optional brake system. Inspect these before tires equipment, passengers and cargo in and during the trip. the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Driving and Operating 9-49

Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options. Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR Front-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,250 lbs (4 649 kg) All-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,450 lbs (4 740 kg) *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the will also reduce the trailer weight the trailering information or advice. See curb weight of the vehicle, any vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, Customer Assistance Offices on cargo carried in it, and the people the tongue load must be added to page 13‑4 for more information. who will be riding in the vehicle. the GVW because the vehicle will If there are a lot of options, be carrying that weight, too. See Weight of the Trailer Tongue equipment, passengers or cargo in Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10 The tongue load (A) of any trailer is the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue an important weight to measure weight the vehicle can carry, which because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross 9-50 Driving and Operating

Trailering may be limited by the Combination Weight Rating) of vehicle's ability to carry tongue 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailer weight. Tongue weight cannot cause rating should be: the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight. Consider the following example: Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg A vehicle model base weight is If a weight-carrying hitch or a (850 lbs)) and because the weight is 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg weight-distributing hitch is being applied well behind the rear axle, (2,800 lbs) at the front axle and used, the trailer tongue (A) should the effect on the rear axle is greater 1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear axle. weigh 10-15 percent of the total than just the weight itself, as much It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg loaded trailer weight (B). as 1.5 times as much. The weight at (7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg the rear axle could be 386 kg After loading the trailer, weigh the (4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (Gross trailer and then the tongue, (850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs). separately, to see if the weights are Since the rear axle already weighs proper. If they are not, adjustments 1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg might be made by moving some (1,275 lbs) brings the total to items around in the trailer. 1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs). Driving and Operating 9-51

If the vehicle has many options and exceeding GVWR. But the effect Total Weight on the Vehicle's there is a front seat passenger and on the rear axle must still be Tires two rear seat passengers with some considered. Because the rear axle luggage and gear in the vehicle as now weighs 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs), Inflate the vehicle's tires to the well. 136 kg (300 lbs) could be 408 kg (900 lbs) can be put on the upper limit for cold tires. These added to the front axle weight and rear axle without exceeding numbers can be found on the 181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axle RGAWR. The effect of tongue Certification label or see Vehicle weight. The vehicle now weighs: weight is about 1.5 times the actual Load Limits on page 9‑10 for more weight. Dividing the 408 kg (900 lbs) information. Do not go over the by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg (600 lbs) GVW limit for the vehicle, or the of tongue weight that can be GAWR, including the weight of the handled. Since tongue weight is trailer tongue. If using a weight usually at least 10 percent of total distributing hitch, do not go over the loaded trailer weight, expect that rear axle limit before applying the the largest trailer the vehicle can weight distribution spring bars. Weight is still below 3 266 kg properly handle is 2 722 kg (7,200 lbs) and you might think (6,000 lbs). 318 additional kilograms (700 lbs) It is important that the vehicle should be subtracted from the does not exceed any of its trailering capacity to stay within ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, GCWR limits. The maximum trailer Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue would only be 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs). Weight. The only way to be sure it is You may go further and think the not exceeding any of these ratings tongue weight should be limited to is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. less than 454 kg (1,000 lbs) to avoid 9-52 Driving and Operating

Towing Equipment Weight-Distributing Hitches and Safety Chains Weight Carrying Hitches Hitches Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the It is important to have the correct safety chains under the tongue of hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large the trailer to help prevent the tongue trucks going by and rough roads are from contacting the road if it a few reasons why the right hitch is becomes separated from the hitch. needed. Always leave just enough slack so . The rear bumper on the vehicle the rig can turn. Never allow safety is not intended for hitches. Do chains to drag on the ground. not attach rental hitches or other Trailer Brakes bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that A loaded trailer that weighs more does not attach to the bumper. than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to have its own brake system that is . A. Body-to-Ground Distance Will any holes be made in the adequate for the weight of the body of the vehicle when the B. Front of Vehicle trailer. Be sure to read and follow trailer hitch is installed? If there the instructions for the trailer brakes are, then be sure to seal the When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so so they are installed, adjusted and holes when the hitch is removed. maintained properly. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, that the distance (A) remains the water, and deadly carbon same both before and after coupling Because the vehicle has antilock monoxide (CO) from the exhaust the trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the may get into the vehicle. See vehicle's hydraulic brake system. Engine Exhaust on page 9‑21. If you do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all. Driving and Operating 9-53

Trailer Wiring Harness *The fuse for this circuit is installed Electric Trailer Brake Control in the underhood electrical center, Wiring Provisions Basic Trailer Wiring but the wires are not connected. These wiring provisions for an The trailer wiring harness, with a They should be connected by your electric trailer brake controller are seven-pin connector, is located at dealer/retailer or a qualified service included with the vehicle as part of the rear of the vehicle and is tied to center. the trailer wiring package. The the vehicle's frame. The harness If the back-up lamp circuit is not instrument panel contains blunt cut connector can be plugged into a functional, contact your dealer/ wires behind the steering column for seven-pin universal heavy-duty retailer. the electric trailer brake controller. trailer connector available through The harness contains the following your dealer/retailer. If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is being charged, press the Tow/Haul wires: The seven-wire harness contains mode switch located on the center . Red/Black: Power Supply the following trailer circuits: console near the climate controls. . White: Brake Switch Signal . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal This will boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the . Gray: Illumination . Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn battery. If the trailer is too light for Signal . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal Tow/Haul mode, turn on the . Brown: Taillamps headlamps (Non-HID only) as a . Black: Ground . Black: Ground second way to boost the vehicle The electric trailer brake controller system and charge the battery. should be installed by your dealer/ . Light Green: Back-up Lamps retailer or a qualified service center. . Red/Black: Battery Feed . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* 9-54 Driving and Operating

Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer/ retailer first. Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is not operating. The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑41 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑42. Vehicle Care 10-1

Overheated Engine Taillamps, Turn Signal, Vehicle Care Protection Sidemarker, and Operating Mode ...... 10-20 Stoplamps ...... 10-28 Power Steering Fluid ...... 10-20 License Plate Lamp ...... 10-29 General Information Washer Fluid ...... 10-21 Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-29 General Information ...... 10-2 Brakes ...... 10-22 California Proposition Brake Fluid ...... 10-23 Electrical System 65 Warning ...... 10-3 Battery ...... 10-24 High Voltage Devices and California Perchlorate All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-25 Wiring ...... 10-30 Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Starter Switch Check ...... 10-25 Electrical System Accessories and Automatic Transmission Shift Overload ...... 10-30 Modifications ...... 10-3 Lock Control System Fuses and Circuit Vehicle Checks Check ...... 10-25 Breakers ...... 10-31 Ignition Transmission Lock Engine Compartment Fuse Doing Your Own Block ...... 10-31 Service Work ...... 10-4 Check ...... 10-26 Park Brake and P (Park) Instrument Panel Fuse Hood ...... 10-5 Block ...... 10-34 Engine Compartment Mechanism Check ...... 10-26 Overview ...... 10-6 Wiper Blade Wheels and Tires Engine Cover ...... 10-7 Replacement ...... 10-26 Tires ...... 10-37 Engine Oil ...... 10-8 Headlamp Aiming Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-37 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-27 Tire Designations ...... 10-39 Automatic Transmission Tire Terminology and Fluid ...... 10-12 Bulb Replacement Definitions ...... 10-40 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Tire Pressure ...... 10-43 Cooling System ...... 10-14 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-28 Tire Pressure Monitor Engine Coolant ...... 10-14 High Intensity Discharge System ...... 10-44 Engine Overheating ...... 10-18 (HID) Lighting ...... 10-28 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation ...... 10-46 10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Inspection ...... 10-49 Jump Starting General Information Tire Rotation ...... 10-49 Jump Starting ...... 10-78 When It Is Time for New For service and parts needs, visit Tires ...... 10-51 Towing your dealer/retailer. You will receive Buying New Tires ...... 10-51 Towing the Vehicle ...... 10-83 genuine Saturn parts and Different Size Tires and Recreational Vehicle Saturn-trained and supported Wheels ...... 10-53 Towing ...... 10-83 service people. Uniform Tire Quality Appearance Care Genuine Saturn parts have one of Grading ...... 10-53 Exterior Care ...... 10-86 these marks. Wheel Alignment and Tire Interior Care ...... 10-90 Balance ...... 10-55 Floor Mats ...... 10-93 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-55 Tire Chains ...... 10-56 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-57 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 10-59 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 10-66 Tire Changing ...... 10-67 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-76 Compact Spare Tire ...... 10-77 Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other 65 Warning Modifications systems on the vehicle. Your GM Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non-dealer/non-retailer dealer/retailer can accessorize the one, contain and/or emit chemicals accessories to the vehicle can affect vehicle using genuine GM known to the State of California to vehicle performance and safety, Accessories. When you go to your cause cancer and birth defects or including such things as airbags, GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM other reproductive harm. Engine braking, stability, ride and handling, Accessories, you will know that exhaust, many parts and systems, emissions systems, aerodynamics, GM-trained and supported service many fluids, and some component durability, and electronic systems technicians will perform the work wear by-products contain and/or like antilock brakes, traction control, using genuine GM Accessories. emit these chemicals. and stability control. Some of these Also, see Adding Equipment to the accessories could even cause Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on malfunction or damage not covered California Perchlorate page 3‑42. Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty. Damage to vehicle components Certain types of automotive resulting from the installation or use applications, such as airbag of non-GM certified parts, including initiators, seat belt pretensioners, control module modifications, are and lithium batteries contained in not covered under the terms of the remote keyless transmitters, may vehicle warranty and may affect contain perchlorate materials. remaining warranty coverage for Special handling may be necessary. affected parts. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. 10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service WARNING (Continued) work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the proper about how to service the vehicle Service Work nuts, bolts, and other than this manual can. To order the fasteners. English and metric proper service manual, see Service fasteners can be easily { WARNING Publications Ordering Information on confused. If the wrong page 13‑11. fasteners are used, parts You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system. can later break or fall off. vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own try to do service work on a vehicle You could be hurt. service work, see Airbag System without knowing enough about it. Check on page 3‑43. . Be sure you have sufficient Keep a record with all parts receipts knowledge, experience, and list the mileage and the date the proper replacement of any service work performed. parts, and tools before See Maintenance Records on attempting any vehicle page 11‑9. maintenance task. (Continued) Vehicle Care 10-5

Hood 2. At the front of the vehicle, pull Pull the hood down to close. Lower up on the center of the hood, the hood until the lifting pressure of To open the hood, do the following: and push the secondary hood the struts is reduced. Then allow the release to the right. hood to fall and latch into place 3. After you have partially under its own weight. Check to lifted the hood, gas struts will make sure the hood is closed. If the automatically take over to lift and hood does not fully latch, gently hold the hood in the fully open push the hood down at the front and position. center of the hood until it is completely latched. 1. Pull the hood release handle Before closing the hood, be sure all with this symbol on it. It is filler caps are on properly. located under the instrument panel on the driver's side of the vehicle. 10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Radiator Pressure Cap . See H. Engine Cover on page 10‑7. Engine Cover Cooling System on page 10‑14. I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. “Checking Engine Oil” under See Cooling System on Engine Oil on page 10‑8. page 10‑14. J. Automatic Transmission Fluid C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. Dipstick. See “Checking the See Jump Starting on Fluid Level” under Automatic page 10‑78. Transmission Fluid on D. Engine Compartment Fuse page 10‑12. Block on page 10‑31. K. Brake Master Cylinder E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” See Jump Starting on under Brakes on page 10‑22. page 10‑78. L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on A. Oil Fill Cap F. Power Steering Reservoir and page 10‑12. Cap (under engine cover). See M. Windshield Washer Fluid B. Engine Cover Power Steering Fluid on Reservoir. See “Adding Washer To remove: page 10 20. Fluid under Washer Fluid on ‑ ” 1. Remove the oil fill cap (A). G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When page 10‑21. “ 2. Raise the engine cover (B) to to Add Engine Oil under Engine ” release from the retainers. Oil on page 10‑8. 3. Lift and remove the engine cover. 4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall engine cover. 10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must See Engine Compartment Overview be on level ground. on page 10‑6 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. The engine oil dipstick handle If the oil is below the cross-hatched is a yellow loop. See Engine area at the tip of the dipstick, add Add enough oil to put the level Compartment Overview on at least one quart/liter of the somewhere in the proper operating recommended oil. This section range in the cross-hatched area. page 10‑6 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. explains what kind of oil to use. Push the dipstick all the way back in For engine oil crankcase capacity, when through. 1. Turn off the engine and give the see Capacities and Specifications oil several minutes to drain back on page 12‑2. into the oil pan. If this is not done, the oil dipstick might not Notice: Do not add too much oil. show the actual level. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it cross-hatched area that shows with a paper towel or cloth, then the proper operating range, the push it back in all the way. engine could be damaged. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. Vehicle Care 10-9

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use . GM6094M Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Look for three things: Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute . SAE 5W-30 Certified For Gasoline Engines SAE 5W-30 is best for the starburst symbol. Failure to use vehicle. These numbers on an the recommended oil can result oil container show its viscosity, in engine damage not covered by or thickness. Do not use other the vehicle warranty. viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Cold Temperature Operation . American Petroleum Institute If in an area of extreme cold, (API) starburst symbol where the temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required specification, GM6094M. See “What Oils meeting these requirements Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for more should have the starburst information. symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). 10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Additives / Engine indicated can vary considerably. For If the system is ever reset Oil Flushes the oil life system to work properly, accidentally, the oil must be the system must be reset every time changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) Do not add anything to the oil. The the oil is changed. since the last oil change. recommended oils with the starburst When the system has calculated Remember to reset the oil life symbol that meet GM Standard system whenever the oil is changed. GM6094M are all that is needed for that oil life has been diminished, it good performance and engine indicates that an oil change is How to Reset the Engine Oil protection. necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE Life System OIL SOON message comes on. Engine oil system flushes are not Change the oil as soon as possible The Engine Oil Life System recommended and could cause within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). calculates when to change the engine damage not covered by the It is possible that, if driving under engine oil and filter based on vehicle warranty. the best conditions, the oil life vehicle use. Whenever the oil is system might not indicate that an oil changed, reset the system so it can Engine Oil Life System change is necessary for over a year. calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs When to Change Engine Oil However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a where the oil is changed prior to a This vehicle has a computer system year and at this time the system CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON that indicates when to change the must be reset. Your dealer/retailer message being turned on, reset the engine oil and filter. This is based has trained service people who will system. on engine revolutions and engine perform this work using genuine temperature, and not on mileage. parts and reset the system. It is also Based on driving conditions, the important to check the oil regularly mileage at which an oil change is and keep it at the proper level. Vehicle Care 10-11

If the vehicle does not have Driver If the vehicle has Driver Information What to Do with Used Oil Information Center (DIC) buttons: Center (DIC) buttons: Used engine oil contains certain 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, elements that can be unhealthy for with the engine off. The vehicle with the engine off. your skin and could even cause must be in P (Park) to access 2. Press the vehicle information cancer. Do not let used oil stay on this display. Press the trip button until OIL LIFE your skin for very long. Clean your odometer reset stem until OIL REMAINING displays. skin and nails with soap and water, LIFE REMAINING displays. or a good hand cleaner. Wash or 3. Press and hold the set/reset 2. Press and hold the trip odometer properly dispose of clothing or rags button until 100% is displayed. containing used engine oil. See the reset stem until OIL LIFE Three chimes sound and the REMAINING shows 100%. manufacturer's warnings about the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON use and disposal of oil products. Three chimes sound and the message goes off. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Used oil can be a threat to the message goes off. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. environment. If you change your 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON own oil, be sure to drain all the oil message comes back on when the from the filter before disposal. Never If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL vehicle is started, the engine oil life dispose of oil by putting it in the SOON message comes back on system has not reset. Repeat the trash, pouring it on the ground, into when the vehicle is started, the procedure. sewers, or into streams or bodies of engine oil life system has not water. Recycle it by taking it to a reset. Repeat the procedure. place that collects used oil. 10-12 Vehicle Care

Automatic Transmission The transmission fluid will not reach How to Inspect the Engine Air the end of the dipstick unless the Cleaner/Filter Fluid transmission is at operating It is not necessary to check temperature. If you need to check To inspect the air cleaner/filter, the transmission fluid level. the transmission fluid level, please remove the filter from the vehicle A transmission fluid leak is the only take the vehicle to your dealer/ and lightly shake the filter (away reason for fluid loss. If a leak retailer. from vehicle) to release loose dust occurs, take the vehicle to the and dirt. If the filter remains caked dealer/retailer and have it repaired Engine Air Cleaner/Filter with dirt, a new filter is required. as soon as possible. To inspect or replace the engine air When to Inspect the Engine Air cleaner/filter: Change the fluid at the intervals Cleaner/Filter listed in Scheduled Maintenance on 1. Remove the engine cover. See page 11‑2, and be sure to use Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Engine Cover on page 10‑7. the transmission fluid listed in Maintenance II intervals and replace Recommended Fluids and it at the first oil change after each Lubricants on page 11‑7. 80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval. See Scheduled Maintenance on Notice: Use of the incorrect page 11 2 for more information. automatic transmission fluid may ‑ If you are driving in dusty/dirty damage the vehicle, and the conditions, inspect the filter at each damages may not be covered by engine oil change. the vehicle's warranty. Always use the automatic transmission See Engine Compartment Overview fluid listed in Recommended on page 10‑6 for the location of the Fluids and Lubricants on engine air cleaner/filter. page 11‑7. A. Ventilation Tube B. Sensor Vehicle Care 10-13

2. Disconnect the cover fitting from 5. Loosen the six housing the ventilation tube (A). cover (C) screws (B). WARNING (Continued) 3. Disconnect the wiring harness 6. Remove the housing cover (C) cleaner not only cleans the air; it connector from the sensor (B). with outlet duct. helps to stop flames if the engine 7. Remove the filter (D) and any backfires. If it is not there and the loose debris that may be found engine backfires, you could be in the base (E). burned. Do not drive with it off, 8. Inspect or replace the filter (D). and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/ 9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to filter off. reinstall the housing cover and reconnect the electrical Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is connector to the sensor. off, a backfire can cause a 10. Reinstall the engine cover. See damaging engine fire. And, dirt Engine Cover on page 10‑7. can easily get into the engine, which will damage it. Always { WARNING have the air cleaner/filter in place A. Clamp when you are driving. B. Screws Operating the engine with the air C. Housing Cover cleaner/filter off can cause you or D. Filter others to be burned. The air (Continued) E. Base 4. Loosen the outlet duct clamp (A). 10-14 Vehicle Care

Cooling System Notice: Using coolant other than { WARNING DEX-COOL® can cause premature The cooling system allows the engine, heater core, or radiator engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan corrosion. In addition, the engine working temperature. under the hood can start up even coolant could require changing when the engine is not running sooner, at 50 000 km and can cause injury. Keep (30,000 miles) or 24 months, hands, clothing, and tools away whichever occurs first. Any from any underhood electric fan. repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant { WARNING in the vehicle. Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle is hot. Do not touch them. If you do, ® you can be burned. filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. The coolant is designed to A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank Do not run the engine if there is a remain in the vehicle for five years leak. If you run the engine, it or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), B. Radiator Pressure Cap could lose all coolant. That could whichever occurs first. C. Engine Cooling Fans cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling could be burned. Get any leak system and how to check and add fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 10‑18. Vehicle Care 10-15

What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If extra inhibitors drinkable water and DEX-COOL and/or additives are used in the { WARNING coolant. If using this mixture, vehicle's cooling system, the nothing else needs to be added. vehicle could be damaged. Use Adding only plain water to This mixture: only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this the cooling system can be . Gives freezing protection down dangerous. Plain water, or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside manual for the cooling system. other liquid such as alcohol, can temperature. See Recommended Fluids and boil before the proper coolant Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more . Gives boiling protection up to information. mixture will. The vehicle's coolant 129°C (265°F), engine warning system is set for the temperature. Checking Coolant proper coolant mixture. With plain . The vehicle must be on a level water or the wrong mixture, the Protects against rust and surface when checking the coolant engine could get too hot but you corrosion. level. would not get the overheat . Will not damage aluminum parts. Check to see if coolant is visible in warning. The engine could catch . Helps keep the proper engine the coolant recovery tank. If the fire and you or others could be temperature. burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of coolant inside the coolant recovery clean, drinkable water and Notice: If an improper coolant tank is boiling, do not do anything DEX-COOL® coolant. mixture is used, the engine could else until it cools down. If coolant is overheat and be badly damaged. visible but the coolant level is not at The repair cost would not be or above the FULL COLD mark, add covered by the vehicle warranty. a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Too much water in the mixture water and DEX-COOL coolant at the can freeze and crack the engine, coolant recovery tank, but be sure radiator, heater core, and other parts. 10-16 Vehicle Care the cooling system is cool before How to Add Coolant to the How to Add Coolant to the this is done. See Cooling System on Recovery Tank Radiator page 10‑14 for more information. { WARNING { WARNING

You can be burned if you spill An electric engine cooling fan coolant on hot engine parts. under the hood can start up even Coolant contains ethylene glycol when the engine is not running and it will burn if the engine parts and can cause injury. Keep are hot enough. Do not spill hands, clothing, and tools away The coolant recovery tank cap has coolant on a hot engine. from any underhood electric fan. this symbol on it. When the engine is cold, the coolant Notice: This vehicle has a level should be at or above the specific coolant fill procedure. { WARNING FULL COLD line marked on the Failure to follow this procedure recovery tank. could cause the engine to Steam and scalding liquids from a When the engine is hot, the level overheat and be severely hot cooling system can blow out damaged. could be higher than the FULL and burn you badly. They are COLD line. If the coolant is below If coolant is needed, add the proper under pressure, and if you turn the FULL COLD line when the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the the surge tank pressure engine is hot, there could be a leak coolant recovery tank. cap — even a little — they can in the cooling system. come out at high speed. Never If the coolant is low, add the coolant turn the cap when the cooling or take the vehicle to a dealer/ system, including the surge tank retailer for service. pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the (Continued) Vehicle Care 10-17

2. Remove the radiator pressure WARNING (Continued) cap when the cooling system, including the upper radiator cooling system and surge tank hose, is no longer hot. pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full If coolant is needed, add the proper turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for mixture directly to the radiator, but that to stop. A hiss means there be sure the cooling system is cool is still some pressure left in the before this is done. system.

6. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL COLD mark. 7. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank but leave the radiator pressure cap off. 3. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it. 4. Fill the radiator to the base of the filler neck with the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture. 5. When coolant begins to flow out 1. Detach fasteners and lift off of the filler neck, reinstall the the panel that covers the pressure cap. Be sure to secure radiator cap. it tightly. 10-18 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the pressure cap is not If you do decide to lift the hood , tightly installed, coolant loss and make sure the vehicle is parked on possible engine damage may a level surface. occur. Be sure the cap is properly Then check to see if the engine and tightly secured. cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans Engine Overheating should be running. If they are not, The vehicle has several indicators do not continue to run the engine to warn of engine overheating. and have the vehicle serviced. There is an engine coolant Notice: Engine damage from temperature gage on the instrument running the engine without coolant is not covered by the 8. Start the engine and let it run panel cluster. See Engine Coolant warranty. until the upper radiator hose Temperature Gage on page 5‑14. feels warm. Any time during this The vehicle may also display an Notice: If the engine catches fire procedure, watch out for the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE while driving with no coolant, the engine cooling fan(s). ENGINE and ENGINE vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be 9. If the coolant level inside the OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE covered by the vehicle warranty. radiator filler neck is low, add message in the Driver Information See Overheated Engine more of the proper DEX-COOL Center (DIC). See Warning Lights, Protection Operating Mode on coolant mixture through the filler Gages, and Indicators on page 10 20 for information on neck until the level is back up page 5‑11. ‑ driving to a safe place in an to the base of the filler neck. You may decide not to lift the hood emergency. Replace the pressure cap. when this warning appears, but Be sure to secure it tightly. instead get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 13‑5. Vehicle Care 10-19

If Steam Is Coming From The If the overheat warning is displayed Engine Compartment WARNING (Continued) with no sign of steam: See Overheated Engine 1. Turn the air conditioning off. { WARNING Protection Operating Mode on 2. Turn the heater on to the highest page 10‑20 for information on Steam from an overheated engine temperature and to the highest driving to a safe place in an fan speed. Open the windows as can burn you badly, even if you emergency. necessary. just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear 3. If in a traffic jam, shift to If No Steam Is Coming From N (Neutral), otherwise, shift steam coming from it. Turn it off The Engine Compartment and get everyone away from the to the highest gear while vehicle until it cools down. Wait If an engine overheat warning is driving — D (Drive) or L (Low). until there is no sign of steam or displayed but no steam can be seen If the temperature overheat gage is coolant before you open or heard, the problem may not be no longer in the overheat zone or the hood. too serious. Sometimes the engine an overheat warning no longer can get a little too hot when the displays, the vehicle can be driven. If you keep driving when the vehicle: Continue to drive the vehicle slow vehicles engine is overheated, . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe the liquids in it can catch fire. You vehicle distance from the car in front . Stops after high-speed driving. or others could be badly burned. of you. If the warning does not come Stop the engine if it overheats, . Idles for long periods in traffic. back on, continue to drive normally. and get out of the vehicle until the . Tows a trailer. engine is cool. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle (Continued) right away. 10-20 Vehicle Care

If there is no sign of steam, idle the Notice: After driving in the When to Check Power Steering engine for three minutes while overheated engine protection Fluid parked. If the warning is still operating mode, to avoid engine displayed, turn off the engine until it damage, allow the engine to cool It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless cools down. Also, see “Overheated before attempting any repair. you suspect there is a leak in the Engine Protection Operating Mode” The engine oil will be severely next in this section. degraded. Repair the cause of system or you hear an unusual coolant loss, change the oil and noise. A fluid loss in this system reset the oil life system. See could indicate a problem. Have the Overheated Engine system inspected and repaired. Protection Engine Oil on page 10‑8. Operating Mode How to Check Power Steering Power Steering Fluid Fluid This emergency operating mode lets To check the power steering fluid: the vehicle be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation. If an 1. Turn the key off and let the overheated engine condition exists, engine compartment cool down. an overheat protection mode which 2. Remove the engine cover. See alternates firing groups of cylinders Engine Cover on page 10‑7. helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, there is a significant loss The power steering fluid reservoir is 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the in power and engine performance. located under the engine cover on reservoir clean. The temperature gage indicates an the passenger side of the vehicle. 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the overheat condition exists. Driving See Engine Compartment Overview dipstick with a clean rag. extended distances and/or towing a on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. trailer in the overheat protection 5. Replace the cap and completely mode should be avoided. tighten it. 6. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. Vehicle Care 10-21

The fluid level should be in an area where the temperature Notice: somewhere between MAX and may fall below freezing, use a fluid . When using concentrated MIN line on the dipstick in room that has sufficient protection against washer fluid, follow the temperature. If the fluid is on or freezing. manufacturer's instructions below MIN line, you should add for adding water. fluid close to MAX Line. Adding Washer Fluid When the windshield washer fluid . Do not mix water with What to Use reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID ready-to-use washer fluid. To determine what kind of fluid to LOW ADD FLUID message will be Water can cause the solution use, see Recommended Fluids and displayed on the Driver Information to freeze and damage your Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid washer fluid tank and other use the proper fluid. Messages on page 5‑41 for more parts of the washer system. information. Also, water does not clean as Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid well as washer fluid. may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by . Fill the washer fluid tank only the vehicle's warranty. Always three-quarters full when it is use the correct fluid listed in very cold. This allows for Recommended Fluids and fluid expansion if freezing Lubricants on page 11‑7. occurs, which could damage the tank if it is Open the cap with the washer completely full. Washer Fluid symbol on it. Add washer fluid . Do not use engine coolant until the tank is full. See Engine What to Use (antifreeze) in your Compartment Overview on windshield washer. It can When adding windshield washer page 10‑6 for reservoir location. fluid, be sure to read the damage the vehicle's manufacturer's instructions before windshield washer system use. If the vehicle will be operating and paint. 10-22 Vehicle Care

Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment can cause a brake squeal when the Every time the brakes are applied, This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brakes are first applied or lightly with or without the vehicle moving, brake pads have built-in wear applied. This does not mean the brakes adjust for wear. indicators that make a high-pitched something is wrong with the brakes. warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed specifications in Capacities and { WARNING and tested with top-quality brake Specifications on page 12‑2. parts. When parts of the braking The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts. not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might Brake Pedal Travel an accident. When the brake not work properly. For example, wear warning sound is heard, See your dealer/retailer if the brake installing disc brake pads that are wrong for the vehicle, can change have the vehicle serviced. pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase the balance between the front and Notice: Continuing to drive with in pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The worn-out brake pads could result that brake service might be braking performance expected can in costly brake repair. required. change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed. Vehicle Care 10-23

Brake Fluid There are only two reasons why the installed. Add or remove brake fluid, brake fluid level in the reservoir as necessary, only when work is might go down: done on the brake hydraulic system. . The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining { WARNING wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes If too much brake fluid is added, it back up. can spill on the engine and burn, The brake master cylinder reservoir if the engine is hot enough. You . A fluid leak in the brake is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as or others could be burned, and hydraulic system can also cause indicated on the reservoir cap. See the vehicle could be damaged. a low fluid level. Have the brake Engine Compartment Overview on Add brake fluid only when work hydraulic system fixed, since a page 10 6 for the location of the is done on the brake hydraulic ‑ leak means that sooner or later reservoir. the brakes will not work well. system. Do not top off the brake fluid. When the brake fluid falls to a low Adding fluid does not correct a leak. level, the brake warning light comes If fluid is added when the linings are on. See Brake System Warning worn, there will be too much fluid Light on page 5‑20. when new brake linings are 10-24 Vehicle Care

What to Add damage brake hydraulic Vehicle Storage Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid system parts so badly that from a sealed container. See they will have to be replaced. { WARNING Recommended Fluids and Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. Lubricants on page 11‑7. Batteries have acid that can burn . If brake fluid is spilled on you and gas that can explode. Always clean the brake fluid You can be badly hurt if you are reservoir cap and the area around the vehicle's painted not careful. See Jump Starting on the cap before removing it. This surfaces, the paint finish can page 10 78 for tips on working helps keep dirt from entering the be damaged. Be careful not ‑ reservoir. to spill brake fluid on the around a battery without vehicle. If you do, wash it getting hurt. off immediately. { WARNING Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable from the With the wrong kind of fluid in Battery battery to keep the battery from the brake hydraulic system, the Refer to the replacement number on running down. brakes might not work well. This the original battery label when a could cause a crash. Always use new battery is needed. Extended Storage: Remove the the proper brake fluid. black, negative (−) cable from the { DANGER battery or use a battery trickle Notice: charger. . Using the wrong fluid can Battery posts, terminals, and badly damage brake related accessories contain lead hydraulic system parts. For and lead compounds, chemicals example, just a few drops of known to the State of California to mineral-based oil, such as cause cancer and reproductive engine oil, in the brake harm. Wash hands after handling. hydraulic system can Vehicle Care 10-25

All-Wheel Drive 2. Firmly apply both the parking Automatic Transmission brake and the regular brake. It is not necessary to check the See Parking Brake on Shift Lock Control all–wheel drive lubricant levels. page 9‑27. System Check A fluid leak is the only reason for Do not use the accelerator fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the { WARNING vehicle to the dealer/retailer as soon pedal, and be ready to turn off as possible. the engine immediately if it starts. When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could Starter Switch Check 3. Try to start the engine in each move suddenly. If the vehicle gear. The vehicle should start moves, you or others could be { WARNING only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). injured. If the vehicle starts in any other When you are doing this position, contact your dealer/ 1. Before starting this check, be inspection, the vehicle could retailer for service. sure there is enough room move suddenly. If the vehicle around the vehicle. It should be moves, you or others could be parked on a level surface. injured. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on 1. Before starting this check, be page 9‑27. sure there is enough room around the vehicle. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 10-26 Vehicle Care

3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park) . To check the P (Park) ignition to ON/RUN, but do not mechanism's holding ability: start the engine. Without Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to applying the regular brake, try to P (Park). Then release the move the shift lever out of { WARNING parking brake followed by the P (Park) with normal effort. If the regular brake. When you are doing this check, shift lever moves out of P (Park), Contact your dealer/retailer if contact your dealer/retailer for the vehicle could begin to move. service is required. service. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Wiper Blade Replacement Ignition Transmission Make sure there is room in front Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear or cracking. While parked, and with the parking brake at once should the vehicle See Scheduled Maintenance on brake set, try to turn the ignition to begin to move. page 11‑2 for more information. LOCK/OFF in each shift lever Replacement blades come in position. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the different types and are removed in . The ignition should turn to vehicle facing downhill. Keeping different ways. To replace the wiper LOCK/OFF only when the shift your foot on the regular brake, set blade assembly: the parking brake. lever is in P (Park). 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm . . The ignition key should come To check the parking brake's away from the windshield. out only in LOCK/OFF. holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in Contact your dealer/retailer if N (Neutral), slowly remove foot service is required. pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. Vehicle Care 10-27

Backglass Wiper Blade Headlamp Aiming To replace the backglass wiper Headlamp aim has been preset at blade: the factory and should need no 1. Pull the wiper blade assembly further adjustment. away from the backglass. However, if your vehicle is damaged The backglass wiper blade will in a crash, the headlamp aim may not lock in a vertical position so be affected. Aim adjustment to the care should be used when low-beam headlamps may be pulling it away from the vehicle. necessary if oncoming drivers flash 2. Rotate the wiper blade their high-beam headlamps at you assembly, hold the wiper arm in (for vertical aim). 2. Press the button in the middle of position, and push the blade If the headlamps need to be the wiper arm connector and pull away from the wiper arm. re-aimed, it is recommended that the wiper blade away from the you take the vehicle to your dealer/ arm connector. 3. Replace the wiper blade. retailer for service. 3. Install the new wiper blade and 4. Return the wiper arm and blade make sure the wiper blade locks assembly to the rest position on into place. the glass. For the proper size and type see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 11‑8. 10-28 Vehicle Care

Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge Taillamps, Turn Signal, For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting Sidemarker, and bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Stoplamps page 10‑29. { WARNING For any bulb changing procedure The low beam high intensity not listed in this section, contact discharge lighting system your dealer/retailer. operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the Halogen Bulbs system components, you could be seriously injured. Have your { WARNING dealer/retailer or a qualified technician service them. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you The up–level vehicle has HID drop or scratch the bulb. You or headlamps. The park lamp function others could be injured. Be sure is also a function of the HID A. Sidemarker Lamp to read and follow the instructions headlamp. After an HID headlamp B. Taillamp on the bulb package. bulb has been replaced, the beam might be a slightly different shade To replace one of these bulbs: than it was originally. This is normal. 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2‑9. 2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle has one. 3. Remove the two taillamp hex nut covers. Vehicle Care 10-29

4. Remove the two hex nuts License Plate Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket holding the taillamp assembly in counterclockwise and pull the place. To replace one of these bulbs: bulb straight out of the socket. 5. Pull out the taillamp assembly. 1. Remove the two screws holding 4. Install the new bulb. each of the license plate lamps 6. Turn the bulb socket to the liftgate trim. 5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 to counterclockwise and pull it reinstall the license plate lamp. straight out to remove it. 7. Replace the old bulb with a Replacement Bulbs new one. Bulb Exterior Lamp 8. Reverse Steps 3 through 6 to Number reinstall the taillamp assembly. License Plate Lamp 194 When reinstalling the taillamp Rear 194 assembly, make sure the plastic Sidemarker Lamp pin on the taillamp assembly Rear Turn Signal lines up and is inserted correctly 3157K into the opening of the vehicle. and Taillamps For replacement bulbs not listed 2. Turn and pull the license plate here, contact your dealer/retailer. lamp forward through the lift gate trim opening. 10-30 Vehicle Care

Electrical System Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Overload An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in High Voltage Devices and The vehicle has fuses and circuit some cases to remain off. Have the Wiring breakers to protect against an headlamp wiring checked right away electrical system overload. if the lamps go on and off or { WARNING When the current electrical load is remain off. too heavy, the circuit breaker opens Exposure to high voltage can and closes, protecting the circuit Windshield Wipers cause shock, burns, and even until the current load returns to If the wiper motor overheats due to death. The high voltage systems normal or the problem is fixed. heavy snow or ice, the windshield in your vehicle can only be This greatly reduces the chance of wipers will stop until the motor cools serviced by technicians with circuit overload and fire caused by and will then restart. special training. electrical problems. Although the circuit is protected High voltage devices are Fuses and circuit breakers protect from electrical overload, overload identified by labels. Do not the following in the vehicle: due to heavy snow or ice, may remove, open, take apart, . Headlamp Wiring cause wiper linkage damage. or modify these devices. High Always clear ice and heavy snow voltage cable or wiring has . Windshield Wiper Motor from the windshield before using the orange covering. Do not probe, . Power Windows and other windshield wipers. tamper with, cut, or modify high Power Accessories If the overload is caused by an voltage cable or wiring. electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed. Vehicle Care 10-31

Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the Breakers Fuse Block vehicle may damage it. Always The wiring circuits in your vehicle The underhood fuse block is located keep the covers on any electrical are protected from short circuits by in the engine compartment, on the component. a combination of fuses, circuit passenger side of the vehicle. To remove fuses, hold the end of breakers and fusible thermal links. the fuse between your thumb and This greatly reduces the chance of index finger and pull straight out. fires caused by electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out. Replace the fuse as soon as you can. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/ relay block. 10-32 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage Air Conditioning A/C CLUTCH Clutch Antilock Braking ABS MTR System (ABS) Motor Adaptive Forward AFS Lighting System AIRBAG Airbag System AUX POWER Auxiliary Power AUX Auxiliary VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump All-Wheel-Drive AWD System BATT 1 Battery 1 BATT 2 Battery 2 BATT 3 Battery 3 Engine Control ECM Module Engine Control ECM 1 Module 1 EMISSION 1 Emission 1 Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage EMISSION 2 Emission 2 Trailer Left Right LT TRLR RT PRK Stoplamp and Turn Parking Lamp EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils STOP/TRN Signal Trailer Right FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 RT TRLR ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Signal Powertrain Control PCM IGN FOG LAMP Fog Lamps Module Ignition Regulated Voltage RVC SNSR Control Sensor Fuel System PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate FSCM Control Module S/ROOF/ PWR Sunroof Power Outlet SUNSHADE HORN Horn OUTLET SERVICE Service Repair Heated Outside REAR HTD MIR Rear Camera Rearview Mirror CAMERA SPARE Spare Heating, Ventilation Rear Accessory Stop Lamps Stop Lamps RR APO and Air Power Outlet (China Only) (China Only) HVAC BLWR Conditioning RR DEFOG Rear Defogger STRTR Starter Blower Rear Climate Transmission Left High-Beam RR HVAC TCM LT HI BEAM Control System Control Module Headlamp Right High-Beam TRANS Transmission Left Low-Beam RT HI BEAM LT LO BEAM Headlamp Headlamp TRLR Trailer Back-up Right Low-Beam BCK/UP Lamps LT PRK Left Parking Lamp RT LO BEAM Headlamp TRLR BRK Trailer Brake 10-34 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage TRLR Trailer Parking High Intensity TRLR Trailer Back-up PRK LAMP Lamps HID/ Discharge (HID) BCK/UP Lamps LO BEAM Low-Beam TRLR PWR Trailer Power WPR Windshield Wiper Headlamps Windshield Wiper/ Windshield Wiper WPR/WSW HORN Horn WPR HI Washer High Speed IGN Ignition Main Relays Usage Trailer Left Instrument Panel Fuse LT TRLR A/C Stoplamp and Turn Block Air Conditioning STOP/TRN CMPRSR Signal Lamp Compressor Clutch The instrument panel fuse block is CLTCH PRK LAMP Park Lamp located under the instrument panel on the passenger side of the AUX Auxiliary PWR/TRN Powertrain VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump vehicle. Pull down on the cover to Rear Window access the fuse block. RR DEFOG CRNK Switched Power Defogger FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 Trailer Right RT TRLR Stoplamp and Turn FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 STOP/TRN Signal Lamp FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 Stop Lamps Stop Lamps FOG LAMP Fog Lamps (China Only) (China Only) High-Beam HI BEAM Headlamps Vehicle Care 10-35

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage AIRBAG Airbag Heating, Ventilation HVAC and Air AMP Amplifier Conditioning BCK/ Back-up Lamp/ INADV/ Inadvertent UP/STOP Stoplamp PWR/LED Power LED Body Control BCM INFOTMNT Infotainment Module Driver Side Turn CNSTR/ LT/TRN/SIG Canister Vent Signal VENT Memory Seat CTSY Courtesy MSM Module DR/LCK Door Locks Power Mirrors, PDM Daytime Running Liftgate Release DRL Lamps PWR MODE Power Mode GMC HID Only/ PWR/MIR Power Mirrors DRL 2 Rear Fog Lamps-China Only RDO Radio DSPLY Display REAR WPR Rear Wiper Front Windshield Passenger Side FRT/WSW RT/TRN/SIG Washer Turn Signal Fuse Side HTD/ Heated/Cooling SPARE Spare COOL SEAT Seats STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel ILLUM Illumination 10-36 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage Relays Usage LT/ Driver Side Power Daytime Running DRL PWR/SEAT Seat Relay Lamps Relay RT/ Passenger Side SPARE Spare PWR/SEAT Power Seat Relay Front Windshield FRT/WSW Power Windows Washer Relay PWR/WNDW Relay PWR/ Power Steering COLUMN Column Relay L/GATE Liftgate Relay LCK Power Lock Relay Rear Window REAR/WSW Washer Relay Power Unlock UNLCK Relay Daytime Running DRL2 Lamps 2 Relay Driver Side Unlock LT/UNLCK Relay Relay Side Vehicle Care 10-37

Tire Sidewall Labeling Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) Useful information about a tire is Tires . Underinflated tires pose the molded into its sidewall. The same danger as overloaded examples below show a typical Your new vehicle comes with tires. The resulting accident high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. passenger vehicle tire and a leading tire manufacturer. If you Check all tires frequently to compact spare tire sidewall. ever have questions about your maintain the recommended tire warranty and where to pressure. Tire pressure obtain service, see your vehicle should be checked when your Warranty booklet for details. tires are cold. See Tire For additional information refer Pressure on page 10‑43. to the tire manufacturer. . Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured { WARNING or broken by a sudden impact — such as when you Poorly maintained and improperly hit a pothole. Keep tires at used tires are dangerous. the recommended pressure.

. . Worn, old tires can cause Overloading your tires can Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example cause overheating as a result accidents. If your tread is of too much flexing. You badly worn, or if your tires (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a could have an air-out and a have been damaged, combination of letters and serious accident. See Vehicle replace them. numbers used to define a Load Limits on page 9‑10. particular tire's width, height, (Continued) aspect ratio, construction type, 10-38 Vehicle Care and service description. See the Tire Identification Number (TIN). “Tire Size” illustration later in this The TIN shows the section for more detail. manufacturer and plant code, (B) TPC Spec (Tire tire size, and date the tire was Performance Criteria manufactured. The TIN is Specification): Original molded onto both sides of the equipment tires designed to tire, although only one side may GM's specific tire performance have the date of manufacture. criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material: The type code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in GM's TPC specifications meet the sidewall and under the tread. Compact Spare Tire Example or exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire (A) Tire Ply Material: The type (C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in Transportation): The grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread. Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear, (B) Temporary Use Only: The (DOT) code indicates that traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary the tire is in compliance resistance. For more information use tire has a tread life of with the U.S. Department of see Uniform Tire Quality approximately 5 000 km Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading on page 10‑53 . (3,000 miles) and should not be Safety Standards. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation driven at speeds over 105 km/h (D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load (65 mph). The compact spare (TIN): The letters and numbers that can be carried and the tire is for emergency use when a following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to regular road tire has lost air and of Transportation) code is the support that load. gone flat. If your vehicle has a Vehicle Care 10-39 compact spare tire, see (E) Tire Inflation: The Tire Designations Compact Spare Tire on temporary use tire or compact page 10‑77 and If a Tire Goes spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size Flat on page 10‑57 . 420 kPa (60 psi). For more The following illustration shows (C) Tire Identification Number information on tire pressure and an example of a typical (TIN): The letters and numbers inflation see Tire Pressure on passenger vehicle tire size. following the DOT (Department page 10‑43 . of Transportation) code is the (F) Tire Size : A combination of Tire Identification Number letters and numbers define a (TIN). The TIN shows the tire's width, height, aspect ratio, manufacturer and plant code, construction type, and service tire size, and date the tire was description. The letter T as the manufactured. The TIN is first character in the tire size (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: molded onto both sides of the means the tire is for temporary The United States version of a tire, although only one side may use only. metric tire sizing system. The have the date of manufacture. (G) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in (D) Maximum Cold Inflation Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger Load Limit: Maximum load Specification): Original vehicle tire engineered to that can be carried and the equipment tires designed to standards set by the U.S. Tire maximum pressure needed to GM's specific tire performance and Rim Association. support that load. criteria have a TPC specification (B) Tire Width: The three-digit code molded onto the sidewall. number indicates the tire section GM's TPC specifications meet width in millimeters from or exceed all federal safety sidewall to sidewall. guidelines. 10-40 Vehicle Care

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit (F) Service Description: These accessories are, automatic number that indicates the tire characters represent the load transmission, power steering, height-to-width measurements. index and speed rating of the power brakes, power windows, For example, if the tire size tire. The load index represents power seats, and air aspect ratio is 60, as shown in the load carry capacity a tire is conditioning. item C of the illustration, it would certified to carry. The speed Aspect Ratio: The relationship mean that the tire's sidewall is rating is the maximum speed a of a tire's height to its width. 60 percent as high as it is wide. tire is certified to carry a load. Belt: A rubber coated layer of (D) Construction Code: A cords that is located between letter code is used to indicate Tire Terminology and Definitions the plies and the tread. Cords the type of ply construction in may be made from steel or other the tire. The letter R means Air Pressure: The amount of reinforcing materials. radial ply construction; the air inside the tire pressing letter D means diagonal or bias outward on each square inch Bead: The tire bead contains ply construction; and the letter B of the tire. Air pressure is steel wires wrapped by steel means belted-bias ply expressed in psi (pounds per cords that hold the tire onto construction. square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of Accessory Weight: This the wheel in inches. means the combined weight in which the plies are laid at of optional accessories. alternate angles less than Some examples of optional 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Vehicle Care 10-41

Cold Tire Pressure: The identify the tire manufacturer, Load Index: An assigned amount of air pressure in a tire, production plant, brand, and number ranging from 1 to 279 measured in psi (pounds per date of production. that corresponds to the load square inch) or kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight carrying capacity of a tire. before a tire has built up heat Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits Maximum Inflation Pressure: from driving. See Tire Pressure on page 9‑10 . The maximum air pressure to on page 10‑43 . GAWR FRT: Gross Axle which a cold tire can be inflated. Curb Weight: The weight of a Weight Rating for the front axle. The maximum air pressure is motor vehicle with standard and See Vehicle Load Limits on molded onto the sidewall. optional equipment including the page 9‑10 . Maximum Load Rating: The maximum capacity of fuel, oil, GAWR RR: Gross Axle load rating for a tire at the and coolant, but without maximum permissible inflation passengers and cargo. Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Vehicle Load Limits on pressure for that tire. DOT Markings: A code molded page 9‑10 . Maximum Loaded Vehicle into the sidewall of a tire Intended Outboard Sidewall: Weight: The sum of curb signifying that the tire is in weight, accessory weight, compliance with the U.S. The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward vehicle capacity weight, and Department of Transportation production options weight. (DOT) motor vehicle safety when mounted on a vehicle. standards. The DOT code Kilopascal (kPa): The metric Normal Occupant Weight: The includes the Tire Identification unit for air pressure. number of occupants a vehicle Number (TIN), an alphanumeric is designed to seat multiplied by designator which can also Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle tire used on light duty trucks and Load Limits on page 9‑10 . some multipurpose passenger vehicles. 10-42 Vehicle Care

Occupant Distribution: Pressure on page 9‑10 and Tread: The portion of a tire Designated seating positions. Vehicle Load Limits on that comes into contact with Outward Facing Sidewall: The page 9‑10 . the road. side of an asymmetrical tire that Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow has a particular side that faces tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear outward when mounted on a extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the vehicle. The side of the tire that 90 degrees to the centerline of tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm contains a whitewall, bears the tread. (1/16 inch) of tread remains. white lettering, or bears Rim: A metal support for a tire See When It Is Time for New manufacturer, brand, and/or and upon which the tire beads Tires on page 10‑51 . model name molding that is are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire higher or deeper than the same Quality Grading Standards): moldings on the other sidewall Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. A tire information system that of the tire. provides consumers with Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A Speed Rating: An ratings for a tire's traction, tire used on passenger cars and alphanumeric code assigned to temperature, and treadwear. some light duty trucks and a tire indicating the maximum Ratings are determined by multipurpose vehicles. speed at which a tire can tire manufacturers using operate. Recommended Inflation government testing procedures. Pressure: Vehicle Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the manufacturer's recommended the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform tire inflation pressure as shown The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on on the tire placard. See Tire page 10‑53 . Vehicle Care 10-43

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air number of designated seating (over-inflation), you can get positions multiplied by Tires need the correct amount the following: 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated of air pressure to operate . Unusual wear cargo load. See Vehicle Load effectively. Limits on page 9‑10 . Notice: Do not let anyone tell . Poor handling Vehicle Maximum Load on the you that under-inflation or . Rough ride over-inflation is all right. It is Tire: Load on an individual tire . not. If your tires do not have Needless damage from due to curb weight, accessory road hazards weight, occupant weight, and enough air (under-inflation), cargo weight. you can get the following: A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is . Too much flexing Vehicle Placard: A label attached to your vehicle. This permanently attached to a . Too much heat label shows your vehicle's vehicle showing the vehicle's . Tire overloading original equipment tires and the capacity weight and the original correct inflation pressures for . equipment tire size and Premature or your tires when they are cold. recommended inflation pressure. irregular wear The recommended cold tire See “Tire and Loading . Poor handling inflation pressure, shown on the Information Label” under Vehicle . Reduced fuel economy label, is the minimum amount of Load Limits on page 9‑10 . air pressure needed to support your vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity. 10-44 Vehicle Care

For additional information How to Check If the inflation pressure is low, regarding how much weight your Use a good quality pocket-type add air until you reach the vehicle can carry, and an gage to check tire pressure. recommended amount. example of the Tire and Loading You cannot tell if your tires are If you overfill the tire, release air Information label, see Vehicle properly inflated simply by by pushing on the metal stem in Load Limits on page 9‑10 . How looking at them. Radial tires may the center of the tire valve. you load your vehicle affects look properly inflated even when Re-check the tire pressure with vehicle handling and ride they are under-inflated. Check the tire gage. comfort. Never load your vehicle the tire's inflation pressure when Be sure to put the valve caps with more weight than it was the tires are cold. Cold means designed to carry. back on the valve stems. They your vehicle has been sitting for help prevent leaks by keeping When to Check at least three hours or driven no out dirt and moisture. more than 1.6 km (1 mile). Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to check Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure Monitor the compact spare tire, if the tire valve stem. Press the tire System vehicle has one. The compact gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the The Tire Pressure Monitor System spare should be at 60 psi (TPMS) uses radio and sensor (420 kPa). For additional cold tire inflation pressure technology to check tire pressure information regarding the matches the recommended levels. The TPMS sensors monitor compact spare tire, see pressure on the Tire and the air pressure in your vehicle's Compact Spare Tire on Loading Information label, no tires and transmit tire pressure page 10‑77 . further adjustment is necessary. readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-45

Each tire, including the spare tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS (if provided), should be checked vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety monthly when cold and inflated to ability. of reasons, including the installation the inflation pressure recommended Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or by the vehicle manufacturer on the not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent vehicle placard or tire inflation maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly. pressure label. (If your vehicle has responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction tires of a different size than the size pressure, even if under-inflation has telltale after replacing one or more indicated on the vehicle placard or not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to tire inflation pressure label, you illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or should determine the proper tire pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the inflation pressure for those tires.) TPMS to continue to function Your vehicle has also been properly. As an added safety feature, your equipped with a TPMS malfunction vehicle has been equipped with a indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor tire pressure monitoring system system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10‑46 for (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire The TPMS malfunction indicator is additional information. pressure telltale when one or more combined with the low tire pressure Federal Communications of your tires is significantly telltale. When the system detects a under-inflated. Commission (FCC) and malfunction, the telltale will flash for Industry and Science Canada Accordingly, when the low tire approximately one minute and then pressure telltale illuminates, you remain continuously illuminated. See Radio Frequency Statement on should stop and check your tires as This sequence will continue upon page 13‑16 for information soon as possible, and inflate them subsequent vehicle start-ups as regarding Part 15 of the Federal to the proper pressure. Driving on a long as the malfunction exists. Communications Commission (FCC) significantly under-inflated tire Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry When the malfunction indicator is and Science Canada. causes the tire to overheat and can illuminated, the system may not be lead to tire failure. Under-inflation able to detect or signal low tire also reduces fuel efficiency and tire 10-46 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure Monitor At the same time a message to A Tire and Loading Information check the pressure in a specific tire label, attached to your vehicle, Operation appears on the Driver Information shows the size of your vehicle's This vehicle may have a Tire Center (DIC) display. The low tire original equipment tires and the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). pressure warning light and the DIC correct inflation pressure for your The TPMS is designed to warn the warning message come on at each vehicle's tires when they are cold. driver when a low tire pressure ignition cycle until the tires are See Vehicle Load Limits on condition exists. TPMS sensors are inflated to the correct inflation page 9‑10, for an example of the mounted onto each tire and wheel pressure. Using the DIC, tire Tire and Loading Information label assembly, excluding the spare tire pressure levels can be viewed by and its location on your vehicle. and wheel assembly, if the vehicle the driver. For additional information Also see Tire Pressure on has one. The TPMS sensors and details about the DIC operation page 10‑43. monitor the air pressure in the and displays see Driver Information Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you vehicle's tires and transmits the tire Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on about a low tire pressure condition pressure readings to a receiver page 5‑24 or Driver Information but it does not replace normal tire located in the vehicle. Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) maintenance. See Tire Inspection on page 5 30 and Tire Messages ‑ on page 10‑49, Tire Rotation on on page 5 39. ‑ page 10‑49 and Tires on The low tire pressure warning light page 10‑37. may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator that the When a low tire pressure condition air pressure in the tire(s) are getting is detected, the TPMS illuminates low and need to be inflated to the the low tire pressure warning light proper pressure. located on the instrument panel cluster. Vehicle Care 10-47

Notice: Using non-approved tire TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching sealants could damage the Tire Message process was started but not Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) completed or not completed sensors. TPMS sensor damage The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the caused by using an incorrect tire if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle's tires. The DIC message sealant is not covered by the are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light vehicle warranty. Always use system detects a malfunction, the should go off once the TPMS the GM approved tire sealant low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process is available through your dealer/ about one minute and then stays on performed successfully. See retailer. for the remainder of the ignition “TPMS Sensor Matching cycle. A DIC warning message is Process” later in this section. Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits also displayed. The low tire warning . use a GM approved liquid tire light and DIC warning message One or more TPMS sensors are sealant. Using non-approved tire come on at each ignition cycle until missing or damaged. The DIC sealants could damage the TPMS the problem is corrected. Some of message and the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and the conditions that can cause the malfunction light should go off Compressor Kit on page 10‑59 for malfunction light and DIC message when the TPMS sensors are information regarding the inflator kit to come on are: installed and the sensor materials and instructions. matching process is performed . One of the road tires has been successfully. See your dealer/ replaced with the spare tire, retailer for service. if your vehicle has one. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re-install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor. 10-48 Vehicle Care

. Replacement tires or wheels do TPMS Sensor Matching You have two minutes to match the not match your vehicle's original Process first tire/wheel position, and equipment tires or wheels. Tires five minutes overall to match all four and wheels other than those Each TPMS sensor has a unique tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer recommended for your vehicle identification code. Any time you than two minutes, to match the first could prevent the TPMS from rotate your vehicle's tires or replace tire and wheel, or more than functioning properly. See Buying one or more of the TPMS sensors, five minutes to match all four tire New Tires on page 10‑51. the identification codes will need to and wheel positions the matching be matched to the new tire/wheel . Operating electronic devices or process stops and you need to position. The sensors are matched start over. being near facilities using radio to the tire/wheel positions in the wave frequencies similar to the following order: driver side front tire, The TPMS sensor matching process TPMS could cause the TPMS passenger side front tire, passenger is outlined below: sensors to malfunction. side rear tire, and driver side rear 1. Set the parking brake. If the TPMS is not functioning it tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. cannot detect or signal a low tire See your dealer/retailer for service. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off. condition. See your dealer/retailer The TPMS sensors can also be for service if the TPMS malfunction matched to each tire/wheel position 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry light and DIC message comes on by increasing or decreasing the (RKE) transmitter's LOCK and and stays on. tire's air pressure. If increasing the UNLOCK buttons at the same tire's air pressure, do not exceed time for approximately the maximum inflation pressure five seconds. The horn sounds indicated on the tire's sidewall. twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE To decrease air-pressure out of a LEARNING ACTIVE message tire you can use the pointed end of displays on the DIC screen. the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key. 4. Start with the driver side front tire. Vehicle Care 10-49

5. Remove the valve cap from the active. The TIRE LEARNING Tire Rotation valve cap stem. Activate the ACTIVE message on the DIC TPMS sensor by increasing or display screen goes off. Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to decreasing the tire's air pressure 9. Turn the ignition switch to for five seconds, or until a horn LOCK/OFF. 13 000 km). See Scheduled chirp sounds. The horn chirp, Maintenance on page 11‑2 . which may take up to 10. Set all four tires to the 30 seconds to sound, confirms recommended air pressure The purpose of a regular tire that the sensor identification level as indicated on the Tire rotation is to achieve a uniform code has been matched to this and Loading Information label. wear for all tires on the vehicle. tire and wheel position. 11. Put the valve caps back on the This will ensure that the vehicle 6. Proceed to the passenger side valve stems. continues to perform most like it front tire, and repeat the did when the tires were new. procedure in Step 5. Tire Inspection Any time you notice unusual 7. Proceed to the passenger side We recommend that you wear, rotate the tires as soon rear tire, and repeat the regularly inspect your vehicle's as possible and check wheel procedure in Step 5. tires, including the spare tire, alignment. Also check for 8. Proceed to the driver side rear if the vehicle has one, for signs damaged tires or wheels. tire, and repeat the procedure in of wear or damage. See When It See When It Is Time for New Step 5. The horn sounds two Is Time for New Tires on Tires on page 10‑51 and Wheel times to indicate the sensor page 10‑51 for more information. Replacement on page 10‑55 . identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer 10-50 Vehicle Care

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear { WARNING inflation pressures as shown on Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the the Tire and Loading Information parts to which it is fastened, can label. See Tire Pressure on make wheel nuts become loose page 10‑43 and Vehicle Load after time. The wheel could come Limits on page 9‑10 . off and cause an accident. When Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor changing a wheel, remove any System. See Tire Pressure rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In Monitor Operation on page 10‑46 . an emergency, use a cloth or a When rotating the vehicle's tires, Make certain that all wheel nuts paper towel to do this; but be sure always use the correct rotation are properly tightened. See to use a scraper or wire brush pattern shown here. “Wheel Nut Torque” under later, if needed, to get all the rust Capacities and Specifications on or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat If the vehicle has a compact page 12‑2 . on page 10‑57. spare tire, do not include it in the tire rotation. Make sure the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, tighten the cable. See Tire Changing on page 10‑67 . Vehicle Care 10-51

When It Is Time for New The vehicle needs new tires if any care and maintenance tires typically of the following statements are true: wear out before they degrade due to Tires age. If you are unsure about the . You can see the indicators at Various factors, such as three or more places around need to replace the tires as they get maintenance, temperatures, driving the tire. older, consult the tire manufacturer speeds, vehicle loading, and road for more information. conditions influence when you need . You can see cord or fabric new tires. showing through the tire's Buying New Tires rubber. GM has developed and matched . The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to specific tires for your vehicle. show cord or fabric. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, . The tire has a bump, bulge, when it was new, were designed or split. to meet General Motors . The tire has a puncture, cut, Tire Performance Criteria or other damage that cannot be Specification (TPC Spec) repaired well because of the size system rating. If you need or location of the damage. replacement tires, GM strongly The rubber in tires degrades over recommends that you get tires time. This is also true for the spare with the same TPC Spec rating. One way to tell when it is time for tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it This way, your vehicle will new tires is to check the treadwear is not being used. Multiple continue to have tires that are indicators, which appear when the conditions affect how fast this aging tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or takes place, including temperatures, designed to give the same less of tread remaining. loading conditions, and inflation performance and vehicle safety, pressure maintenance. With proper during normal use, as the original tires. 10-52 Vehicle Care

GM's exclusive TPC Spec See Tire Inspection on page 10‑49 { WARNING system considers over a dozen and Tire Rotation on page 10‑49 critical specifications that impact for information on proper tire If you use bias-ply tires on the the overall performance of your rotation. vehicle, the wheel rim flanges vehicle, including brake system could develop cracks after performance, ride and handling, { WARNING many miles of driving. A tire traction control, and tire Mixing tires could cause you and/or wheel could fail pressure monitoring suddenly, causing a crash. performance. GM's TPC Spec to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different Use only radial-ply tires with number is molded onto the tire's the wheels on the vehicle. sidewall near the tire size. If the sizes, brands, or types (radial tires have an all-season tread and bias-belted tires), the If you must replace your design, the TPC Spec number vehicle may not handle vehicle's tires with those that do will be followed by an MS for properly, and you could have not have a TPC Spec number, mud and snow. See Tire a crash. Using tires of different make sure they are the same Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑37 sizes, brands, or types may size, load range, speed rating, for additional information. also cause damage to your and construction type (radial and vehicle. Be sure to use the GM recommends replacing tires bias-belted tires) as your correct size, brand, and type vehicle's original tires. in sets of four. This is because of tires on all wheels. It is all uniform tread depth on all tires right to drive with your will help keep your vehicle compact spare temporarily, as performing most like it did when it was developed for use on the tires were new. Replacing your vehicle. See Compact less than a full set of tires can Spare Tire on page 10‑77 . affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-53

Vehicles that have a tire Different Size Tires and WARNING (Continued) pressure monitoring system Wheels could give an inaccurate recommended for those wheels low-pressure warning if non-TPC If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original are selected. You may increase Spec rated tires are installed on the chance that you will crash and your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec equipment wheels and tires, this may affect the way your vehicle suffer serious injury. Only use rated tires may give a performs, including its braking, ride Saturn specific wheel and tire low-pressure warning that is and handling characteristics, systems developed for your higher or lower than the proper stability, and resistance to rollover. vehicle, and have them properly warning level you would get with Additionally, if your vehicle has installed by a Saturn certified TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire electronic systems such as, technician. Pressure Monitor System on anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags, page 10‑44 . traction control, and stability control, See Buying New Tires on the performance of these systems page 10‑51 and Accessories and Your vehicle's original can be affected. Modifications on page 10‑3 for equipment tires are listed on the additional information. Tire and Loading Information { WARNING Label. See Vehicle Load Limits Uniform Tire Quality on page 9‑10 , for more If you add different sized wheels, Grading information about the Tire and your vehicle may not provide an Loading Information Label and acceptable level of performance Quality grades can be found its location on your vehicle. and safety if tires not where applicable on the tire (Continued) sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: 10-54 Vehicle Care

Treadwear 200 Traction AA While the tires available on a half (1.5) times as well on the Temperature A General Motors passenger cars government course as a tire The following information relates and light trucks may vary with graded 100. The relative to the system developed by the respect to these grades, they performance of tires depends United States National Highway must also conform to federal upon the actual conditions of Traffic Safety Administration safety requirements and their use, however, and may (NHTSA), which grades tires additional General Motors Tire depart significantly from the by treadwear, traction, and Performance Criteria (TPC) norm due to variations in driving temperature performance. This standards. habits, service practices, and differences in road applies only to vehicles sold in Treadwear the United States. The grades characteristics and climate. The treadwear grade is a are molded on the sidewalls of comparative rating based on the Traction – AA, A, B, C most passenger car tires. The wear rate of the tire when tested The traction grades, from Uniform Tire Quality Grading under controlled conditions on highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, (UTQG) system does not apply a specified government test and C. Those grades represent to deep tread, winter-type snow course. For example, a tire the tire's ability to stop on wet tires, space-saver, or temporary graded 150 would wear one and pavement as measured under use spare tires, tires with controlled conditions on nominal rim diameters of specified government test 25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 inches), surfaces of asphalt and or to some limited-production concrete. A tire marked C may tires. have poor traction performance. Vehicle Care 10-55

Temperature – A, B, C temperature grade for this tire is Wheel Replacement established for a tire that is The temperature grades are A Replace any wheel that is bent, (the highest), B, and C, properly inflated and not cracked or badly rusted or corroded. representing the tire's resistance overloaded. Excessive speed, If wheel nuts keep coming loose, to the generation of heat and its underinflation, or excessive the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel ability to dissipate heat when loading, either separately or in nuts should be replaced. If the tested under controlled combination, can cause heat wheel leaks air, replace it (except conditions on a specified indoor buildup and possible tire failure. some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your laboratory test wheel. Sustained Wheel Alignment and Tire dealer/retailer if any of these high temperature can cause the conditions exist. material of the tire to degenerate Balance and reduce tire life, and Your dealer/retailer will know the The tires and wheels on the vehicle kind of wheel you need. excessive temperature can lead were aligned and balanced carefully to sudden tire failure. The grade at the factory to give the longest tire Each new wheel should have the C corresponds to a level of life and best overall performance. same load-carrying capacity, performance which all Adjustments to wheel alignment and diameter, width, offset and be passenger car tires must meet tire balancing will not be necessary mounted the same way as the one it replaces. under the Federal Motor Vehicle on a regular basis. However, if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. pulls to one side or the other, the Grades B and A represent alignment should be checked. If the higher levels of performance on vehicle vibrates when driving on a the laboratory test wheel than smooth road, the tires and wheels the minimum required by law. might need to be rebalanced. See It should be noted that the your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis. 10-56 Vehicle Care

If you need to replace any of your Notice: The wrong wheel can Tire Chains wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, also cause problems with bearing replace them only with new Saturn life, brake cooling, speedometer original equipment parts. This way, or odometer calibration, { WARNING you will be sure to have the right headlamp aim, bumper height, Do not use tire chains. There is wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts vehicle ground clearance, and tire not enough clearance. Tire chains for your vehicle. or tire chain clearance to the used on a vehicle without the body and chassis. proper amount of clearance can { WARNING See If a Tire Goes Flat on cause damage to the brakes, page 10‑57 for more information. Using the wrong replacement suspension or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Used Replacement Wheels nuts on your vehicle can be chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or dangerous. It could affect the { WARNING braking and handling of your others may be injured in a crash. vehicle, make your tires lose air Putting a used wheel on your Use another type of traction and make you lose control. You vehicle is dangerous. You cannot device only if its manufacturer could have a collision in which know how it has been used or recommends it for use on the you or others could be injured. how far it has been driven. vehicle and tire size combination Always use the correct wheel, It could fail suddenly and cause a and road conditions. Follow that wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for crash. If you have to replace a manufacturer's instructions. replacement. wheel, use a new Saturn original (Continued) equipment wheel. Vehicle Care 10-57

But if you should ever have a WARNING (Continued) blowout, here are a few tips about { WARNING what to expect and what to do: To help avoid damage to the Lifting a vehicle and getting under vehicle, drive slowly, readjust If a front tire fails, the flat tire it to do maintenance or repairs is or remove the device if it is creates a drag that pulls the vehicle dangerous without the contacting the vehicle, and do not toward that side. Take your foot off appropriate safety equipment and spin the vehicle's wheels. If you the accelerator pedal and grip the training. If a jack is provided with steering wheel firmly. Steer to do find traction devices that will the vehicle, it is designed only for maintain lane position, and then fit, install them on the front tires. changing a flat tire. If it is used for gently brake to a stop well out of anything else, you or others could the traffic lane. If a Tire Goes Flat be badly injured or killed if the A rear blowout, particularly on a vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack It is unusual for a tire to blowout curve, acts much like a skid and is provided with the vehicle, only while you are driving, especially if may require the same correction use it for changing a flat tire. you maintain your vehicle's tires you would use in a skid. In any rear properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is blowout remove your foot from the If a tire goes flat, avoid further much more likely to leak out slowly. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle tire and wheel damage by under control by steering the way driving slowly to a level place. you want the vehicle to go. It may Turn on the hazard warning be very bumpy and noisy, but you flashers. See Hazard Warning can still steer. Gently brake to a Flashers on page 6‑4. stop, well off the road if possible. 10-58 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Changing a tire can be To be certain the vehicle will not dangerous. The vehicle can slip move, put blocks at the front and off the jack and roll over or fall on rear of the tire farthest away from you or other people. You and they the one being changed. That could be badly injured or even would be the tire on the other killed. Find a level place to side, at the opposite end of the change your tire. To help prevent vehicle. the vehicle from moving: This vehicle may come with a jack 1. Set the parking brake firmly. and spare tire or a tire sealant and A. Wheel Block 2. Put an automatic compressor kit. To use the jacking transmission shift lever in equipment to change a spare tire B. Flat Tire P (Park), or shift a manual safely, follow the instructions below. The following information explains transmission to 1 (First) or Then see Tire Changing on how to repair or change a tire. R (Reverse). page 10‑67. To use the tire sealant 3. Turn off the engine and do and compressor kit, see Tire not restart while the vehicle Sealant and Compressor Kit on is raised. page 10‑59. 4. Do not allow passengers to When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), remain in the vehicle. use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement (Continued) of wheel blocks (A). Vehicle Care 10-59

Tire Sealant and If this vehicle has a tire sealant and { WARNING compressor kit, there may not be a Compressor Kit spare tire, tire changing equipment, Over-inflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not { WARNING the tire to rupture and you or be a place to store a tire. others could be injured. Be sure Idling a vehicle in an enclosed to read and follow the tire sealant The tire sealant and compressor area with poor ventilation is and compressor kit instructions can be used to temporarily seal dangerous. Engine exhaust may and inflate the tire to its punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. It can enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust recommended pressure. Do not also be used to inflate an under contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) exceed the recommended inflated tire. which cannot be seen or smelled. pressure. It can cause unconsciousness If the tire has been separated from and even death. Never run the the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, engine in an enclosed area that { WARNING or has a large puncture, the tire is has no fresh air ventilation. For too severely damaged for the tire more information, see Engine Storing the tire sealant and sealant and compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Assistance Exhaust on page 9‑21. compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger Program on page 13‑5. compartment of the vehicle could Read and follow all of the tire cause injury. In a sudden stop or sealant and compressor kit collision, loose equipment could instructions. strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location. 10-60 Vehicle Care

This vehicle may have one of the Tire Sealant following tire sealant and Read and follow the safe handling compressor kits. The kit includes: instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer/ retailer. See “Removal and A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or Installation of the Sealant Canister” Air Only) following. B. On/Off Button There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After usage, the sealant C. Pressure Gage canister and sealant/air hose D. Pressure Deflation Button assembly must be replaced. See (If equipped) “Removal and Installation of the E. Tire Sealant Canister Sealant Canister” following. F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) Using the Tire Sealant G. Air Only Hose (Black) and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a H. Power Plug Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage. Vehicle Care 10-61

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power plug (H). 3. Place the kit on the ground. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. 4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise. 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve stem. Turn it When using the tire sealant and clockwise until it is tight. compressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the heated environment for 5 minutes. accessory power outlet in the This will help to inflate the tire vehicle. Unplug all items from faster. other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets on Always do a safety check first. See page 5‑9. If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑57. Do not remove any objects that If the vehicle has an accessory have penetrated the tire. power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage If the vehicle only has a cigarette location. See Storing the Tire lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Sealant and Compressor Kit on Do not pinch the power plug page 10‑66. cord in the door or window. 10-62 Vehicle Care

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle on the Tire and Loading The tire is not sealed and will must be running while using the Information label. See Tire continue to leak air until the air compressor. Pressure on page 10‑43. vehicle is driven and the 8. Turn the selector switch (A) The pressure gage (C) may sealant is distributed in the tire, counterclockwise to the Sealant read higher than the actual tire therefore, Steps 12 through + Air position. pressure while the compressor 18 must be done immediately after Step 11. 9. Press the on/off (B) button to is on. Turn the compressor off turn the tire sealant and to get an accurate pressure Be careful while handling the compressor kit on. reading. The compressor may tire sealant and compressor kit be turned on/off until the as it could be warm after The compressor will inject correct pressure is reached. usage. sealant and air into the tire. Notice: If the recommended 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from The pressure gage (C) will pressure cannot be reached after the accessory power outlet in initially show a high pressure approximately 25 minutes, the the vehicle. while the compressor pushes the vehicle should not be driven 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) sealant into the tire. Once the farther. The tire is too severely sealant is completely dispersed counterclockwise to remove it damaged and the tire sealant and from the tire valve stem. into the tire, the pressure will compressor kit cannot inflate the quickly drop and start to rise tire. Remove the power plug from 14. Replace the tire valve again as the tire inflates with the accessory power outlet and stem cap. air only. unscrew the inflating hose from 15. Replace the sealant/air 10. Inflate the tire to the the tire valve. See Roadside hose (F), and the power recommended inflation Assistance Program on plug (H) back in their original pressure using the pressure page 13‑5. location. gage (C). The recommended 11. Press the on/off button (B) to inflation pressure can be found turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off. Vehicle Care 10-63

19. Stop at a safe location and 20. Wipe off any sealant from the check the tire pressure. Refer wheel, tire, and vehicle. to Steps 1 through 11 under 21. Dispose of the used sealant “Using the Tire Sealant and canister (E) and sealant/air Compressor Kit without hose (F) assembly at a local Sealant to Inflate a Tire dealer/retailer or in accordance 16. If the flat tire was able to inflate (Not Punctured).” with local state codes and to the recommended inflation If the tire pressure has fallen practices. pressure, remove the more than 10 psi (68 kPa) 22. Replace it with a new canister maximum speed label from the below the recommended sealant canister (E) and place available from your dealer/ inflation pressure, stop driving retailer. it in a highly visible location. the vehicle. The tire is too The label is a reminder not to severely damaged and the tire 23. After temporarily sealing a tire exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until sealant cannot seal the tire. using the tire sealant and the damaged tire is repaired or See Roadside Assistance compressor kit, take the replaced. Program on page 13‑5. vehicle to an authorized dealer/ retailer within a 100 miles 17. Return the equipment to its If the tire pressure has original storage location in the (161 km) of driving to have the not dropped more than tire repaired or replaced. vehicle. 10 psi (68 kPa) from the 18. Immediately drive the vehicle recommended inflation 5 miles (8 km) to distribute the pressure, inflate the tire to sealant in the tire. the recommended inflation pressure. 10-64 Vehicle Care

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured) To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only and not sealant:

Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑57. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 10‑66. 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) and the power plug (H). 3. Place the kit on the ground. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. Vehicle Care 10-65

4. Remove the tire valve stem cap 9. Press the on/off (B) button to reached. This option is only from the flat tire by turning it turn the compressor on. functional when using the air counterclockwise. The compressor will inflate the only hose (G). 5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto tire with air only. 11. Press the on/off button (B) to the tire valve stem by turning it 10. Inflate the tire to the turn the tire sealant and clockwise until it is tight. recommended inflation compressor kit off. 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the pressure using the pressure Be careful while handling the accessory power outlet in the gage (C). The recommended tire sealant and compressor kit vehicle. Unplug all items from inflation pressure can be found as it could be warm after other accessory power outlets. on the Tire and Loading usage. See Power Outlets on Information label. See Tire 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from page 5‑9. Pressure on page 10‑43. the accessory power outlet in If the vehicle has an accessory The pressure gage (C) may the vehicle. power outlet, do not use the read higher than the actual tire 13. Disconnect the air only hose cigarette lighter. pressure while the compressor (G) from the tire valve stem, by If the vehicle only has a cigarette is on. Turn the compressor off turning it counterclockwise, and lighter, use the cigarette lighter. to get an accurate reading. The replace the tire valve stem cap. compressor may be turned on/ Do not pinch the power plug off until the correct pressure is 14. Replace the air only hose (G) cord in the door or window. reached. and the power plug (H) and 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle cord back in its original If you inflate the tire higher location. must be running while using the than the recommended air compressor. pressure you can adjust the 15. Place the equipment in the 8. Turn the selector switch (A) excess pressure by pressing original storage location in the clockwise to the Air Only the pressure deflation vehicle. position. button (D), if equipped, until the proper pressure reading is 10-66 Vehicle Care

Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister To remove the sealant canister: 1. Unwrap the sealant hose. 2. Press the canister release button. 3. Pull up and remove the canister. 4. Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer/retailer. The tire sealant and compressor kit 1. Press down on the latch tab and 5. Push the new canister into pull the cover off to access the has an accessory adapter located in place. a compartment on the bottom of its storage compartment. housing that may be used to inflate Storing the Tire Sealant 2. Press the two tabs on the quick air mattresses, balls, etc. release buckle to release the tire and Compressor Kit sealant and compressor kit The tire sealant and compressor kit strap. is located in the storage 3. Remove the sealant and compartment on the driver side, at compressor kit from its tray. the rear of the vehicle. To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the steps. Vehicle Care 10-67

Tire Changing 4. Turn the jack on its side, with the bottom facing toward you. Removing Tools 5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom The tools needed to remove the first. spare tire are located in the storage compartment on the driver side, at the rear of the vehicle. 1. Open the jack storage compartment by pulling on the latch tab, located toward the rear of the vehicle, and pulling the cover off. A. Tool Bag B. Wing Bolt C. Jack 2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by turning it counterclockwise The tools you will be using include 3. Push the jack (C) up out of the the jack (A) and lug wrench (B). holding bracket. 10-68 Vehicle Care

Removing the Spare Tire E. Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is located F. Retainer under the vehicle, in front of the rear G. Hoist Shaft Assembly bumper. See Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑77 for more information 1. Open the storage compartment about the compact spare. door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate and remove the cap on the bottom of the storage compartment. 2. Open the carpet cutout that is located through the hole of the storage compartment. 3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft. 4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the wrench until A. Rear Convenience Center the spare tire can be pulled out B. Lug Wrench from under the vehicle. C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole D. Hoist Shaft 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening to remove the spare tire from the cable. Vehicle Care 10-69

6. Turn the wrench clockwise to Do the following to check the cable: 5. If you still cannot lower the raise the cable back up after 1. Check under the vehicle to see if spare tire to the ground, see removing the spare tire. the cable is visible. Secondary Latch System on page 10‑76. Do not store a full-size or a flat 2. If it is not visible, see Secondary road tire under the vehicle. See Latch System on page 10‑76. Removing the Flat Tire and “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Tools” later in this section. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the lug 1. Do a safety check before To continue changing the flat tire, wrench clockwise until you hear proceeding. See If a Tire Goes see Removing the Flat Tire and “ two clicks or feel it skip twice. Flat on page 10‑57 for more Installing the Spare Tire” later in this You cannot over-tighten the information. section. cable. 2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, 3. Loosen the cable by turning the loosen the plastic nut caps with wrench counterclockwise three the wheel wrench. They will not or four turns. come off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry 4. If the spare tire has not lowered, along the edge of the cover until tighten the cable all the way and it comes off. Be careful; the then loosen it at least two times. edges may be sharp. Do not try If the spare tire did lower to the to remove the cover with your ground, continue with Step 5 bare hands. under Removing the Spare “ Store the wheel cover securely Tire (Vehicles with the Rear in the rear of the vehicle until Convenience Center) listed ” you have the flat tire repaired or previously. If the spare tire will not lower, the replaced. secondary latch could be engaged. 10-70 Vehicle Care

If the vehicle has aluminum Notice: If this vehicle has wheel Notice: If a jack is used to raise wheels, remove the wheel nut locks and an impact wrench is the vehicle without positioning it caps using the wheel wrench. used to remove the wheel nuts, correctly, the vehicle could be the lock nut or wheel lock key damaged. When raising the could be damaged. Do not use an vehicle on a jack, avoid contact impact wrench to remove the with the rear axle control arms. wheel nuts if this vehicle has 5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put wheel locks. the compact spare tire near you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. 4. To identify the appropriate Never get under a vehicle when it 3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do jacking location, find the is supported only by a jack. not remove them — using the triangle (A) about 12 inches lug wrench. For wheels with a (30.5 cm) from the front tire wheel lock key, use the wheel or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm) lock key between the lock nut from the rear tire. { WARNING and lug wrench. The key is The triangle is located near each Raising your vehicle with the jack supplied in the front passenger wheel on the vehicle's exterior. improperly positioned can door pocket. damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. (Continued) Vehicle Care 10-71

clockwise in the jack. Raise the WARNING (Continued) vehicle far enough off the { WARNING ground so that there is enough To help avoid personal injury and room for the spare tire to fit Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the vehicle damage, be sure to fit the under the wheel well. parts to which it is fastened, can jack lift head into the proper make wheel nuts become loose location before raising the 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and after time. The wheel could come vehicle. the flat tire. off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any 6. Attach the lug wrench to the rust or dirt from places where the jack, and turn the wrench wheel attaches to the vehicle. In clockwise to raise the jack head an emergency, use a cloth or a 3 inches (7.6 cm). paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑57.

{ WARNING 9. Remove the plastic spare tire Never use oil or grease on bolts heat shield by pulling the rubber latch. Store the plastic spare tire or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel heat shield. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” later in could fall off, causing a crash. 7. Place the jack under the vehicle this section for more information. as identified in Step 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the lug wrench 10-72 Vehicle Care

10. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting { WARNING surfaces, and spare wheel. Wheel nuts that are improperly or 11. Place the spare tire on the incorrectly tightened can cause wheel mounting surface. the wheels to become loose or 12. Put the nuts on by hand by come off. The wheel nuts should turning them clockwise until the be tightened with a torque wrench wheel is held against the to the proper torque specification mounting surface. Make sure after replacing. Follow the torque the rounded end is toward the specification supplied by the wheel. aftermarket manufacturer when 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching using accessory locking wheel 14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in the lug wrench to the jack nuts. See Capacities and a crisscross sequence, as and turning the wrench Specifications on page 12‑2 for shown. counterclockwise. Lower the original equipment wheel nut Notice: Wheel covers will not fit jack completely. torque specifications. on your vehicle's compact spare. Notice: Improperly tightened If you try to put a wheel cover on wheel nuts can lead to brake the compact spare, the cover or pulsation and rotor damage. To the spare could be damaged. avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 12‑2 for the wheel nut torque specification. Vehicle Care 10-73

Storing the Spare Tire 4. When the compact spare tire is { WARNING almost in the stored position, { WARNING turn the tire so the valve is Storing a jack, a tire, or other toward the rear of the vehicle. equipment in the passenger The underbody-mounted spare compartment of the vehicle could This position helps when tire needs to be stored with the cause injury. In a sudden stop or checking the air pressure in the valve stem pointing down. If the collision, loose equipment could compact spare tire. spare tire is stored with the valve strike someone. Store all these in 5. Raise the tire fully against the stem pointing upwards, the the proper place. underside of the vehicle. secondary latch will not work Continue turning the lug wrench properly and the spare tire could To store the spare tire: until you feel more than two loosen and suddenly fall from the 1. Lay the compact spare tire near clicks. This indicates that the vehicle. If this happened when compact spare tire is secure and the vehicle was being driven, the the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem down. the cable is tight. The spare tire tire might contact a person or hoist cannot be overtightened. another vehicle, causing injury 2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire and damage to itself. Be sure the heat shield on the compact underbody-mounted spare tire is spare tire. stored with the valve stem 3. Slide the cable retainer through pointing down. the center of the wheel and start to raise the compact spare tire. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 10-74 Vehicle Care

3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle.

6. Make sure the tire is stored 5. Hook the cable onto the outside securely. Push, pull (A), and then portion of the liftgate hinges (B). try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the lug wrench to 6. Hook the other end of the cable tighten the cable. onto the outside portion of the 4. Pull the cable (A) through the liftgate hinge on the other side of Storing the Flat Tire door striker (E), the center of the the vehicle. 1. Remove the cable package from wheel (D), and the plastic spare 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it the jack storage area. tire heat shield (C), as shown. is secure. 2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels. Vehicle Care 10-75

Storing the Tools 3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning clockwise. 4. To replace the cover, line up the tab at the front of the cover with the notch in the cover opening. Push the cover in place and make sure that the rear clips are in the slots and push the cover closed. Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. When 8. Make sure the metal tube is you replace the compact spare with centered at the striker. Push the a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on tube toward the front of the A. Tool Bag wheel covers or the center cap. vehicle. B. Wing Bolt Hand-tighten them over the wheel 9. Close the liftgate and make sure C. Jack nuts, using the lug wrench. it is latched properly. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. 1. Ensure that the bottom of the jack is facing toward you. 2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place down on the holding bracket. 10-76 Vehicle Care

Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch: This vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly that { has a secondary latch system. It is WARNING designed to stop the compact spare Someone standing too close tire from suddenly falling off the during the procedure could be vehicle if the cable holding the injured by the jack. If the spare spare tire is damaged. For the tire does not slide off the jack secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem completely, make sure no one is pointing down. See Tire Changing behind you or on either side of on page 10‑67 for instructions on you as you pull the jack out from storing the spare tire correctly. under the spare. All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown 2. Turn the lug wrench 1. If the cable is not visible, start { WARNING counterclockwise until this procedure at Step 3. approximately 6 inches (15 cm) Before beginning this procedure of cable is exposed. read all the instructions. Failure to 3. Attach the lug wrench to the jack read and follow the instructions and raise the jack at least could damage the hoist assembly 10 turns. and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the 4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. instructions listed next. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. Vehicle Care 10-77

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to Have the hoist shaft assembly raise the jack until it lifts the inspected as soon as you can. You secondary latch spring. will not be able to store a spare tire 6. Keep raising the jack until the using the hoist assembly until it has spare tire stops moving upward been repaired or replaced. and is held firmly in place. This lets you know that the secondary Compact Spare Tire latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. { WARNING

Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a time could 8. Disconnect the lug wrench from result in loss of braking and the jack and carefully remove handling. This could lead to a the jack. Use one hand to push crash and you or others could be against the spare tire while firmly injured. Use only one compact pulling the jack out from under spare tire at a time. the spare tire with the other hand. The compact spare tire, if the 9. Tilt the retainer and slip it vehicle has one, was fully inflated through the wheel opening when when the vehicle was new, however, the spare tire has been it can lose air after a time. Check 7. Lower the jack by turning the lug completely lowered. the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). wrench counterclockwise. Keep 10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise lowering the jack until the spare to raise the cable back up if the tire slides off the jack. cable is hanging. 10-78 Vehicle Care

After installing the compact spare And do not mix the compact spare Jump Starting on the vehicle, stop as soon as tire or wheel with other wheels or possible and make sure the spare tires. They will not fit. Keep the If the vehicle's battery has run tire is correctly inflated. The spare tire and its wheel together. down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to compact spare is made to perform The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system start your vehicle. Be sure to use well at speeds up to 65 mph will be automatically disabled when the following steps to do it safely. (105 km/h) for distances up to you use the compact spare. To 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can restore the AWD and prevent finish your trip and have the full-size excessive wear on the clutch in your { WARNING tire repaired or replaced at your AWD, replace the compact spare convenience. Of course, it is best to tire with a full-size tire as soon as Batteries can hurt you. They can replace the spare with a full-size tire possible. be dangerous because: as soon as possible. The spare tire . They contain acid that can will last longer and be in good Notice: Tire chains will not fit the burn you. shape in case it is needed again. compact spare. Using them can damage the vehicle and can . They contain gas that can Notice: When the compact spare damage the chains too. Do not explode or ignite. is installed, do not take the use tire chains on the compact . They contain enough vehicle through an automatic car spare. wash with guide rails. The electricity to burn you. compact spare can get caught on If you do not follow these steps the rails which can damage the exactly, some or all of these tire, wheel and other parts of the things can hurt you. vehicle. Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles. Vehicle Care 10-79

Notice: Ignoring these steps your vehicle, and the bad 3. Turn off the ignition on both could result in costly damage to grounding could damage the vehicles. Unplug unnecessary the vehicle that would not be electrical systems. accessories plugged into the covered by the warranty. To avoid the possibility of the cigarette lighter or the accessory Trying to start the vehicle by vehicles rolling, set the parking power outlets. Turn off the radio pushing or pulling it will not brake firmly on both vehicles and all lamps that are not work, and it could damage the involved in the jump start needed. This will avoid sparks vehicle. procedure. Put an automatic and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio! 1. Check the other vehicle. It must transmission in P (Park) or a have a 12-volt battery with a manual transmission in Neutral 4. Open the hoods and locate the negative ground system. before setting the parking brake. positive (+) and negative (−) If one of the vehicles is a terminal locations on the other Notice: If the other vehicle's four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure vehicle. Your vehicle has a system is not a 12-volt system the transfer case is not in remote positive (+) and a remote with a negative ground, both Neutral. negative (−) jump starting vehicles can be damaged. Only terminal. See Engine use vehicles with 12-volt systems Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the Compartment Overview on with negative grounds to jump page 10‑6 for more information start your vehicle. jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs on the terminal locations. 2. Get the vehicles close enough would not be covered by the so the jumper cables can reach, warranty. Always turn off the but be sure the vehicles are not radio and other accessories when touching each other. If they are, jump starting the vehicle. it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would not be able to start 10-80 Vehicle Care

Before you connect the cables, { WARNING WARNING (Continued) here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go Using a match near a battery can Battery fluid contains acid that to positive (+) or to a remote cause battery gas to explode. can burn you. Do not get it on positive (+) terminal if the vehicle People have been hurt doing this, you. If you accidentally get it in has one. Negative (−) will go to a and some have been blinded. your eyes or on your skin, flush heavy, unpainted metal engine Use a flashlight if you need more the place with water and get part or to a remote negative (−) light. medical help immediately. terminal if the vehicle has one. Be sure the batteries have Do not connect positive (+) to enough water. You do not need to negative (−) or you will get a add water to the ACDelco® { WARNING short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts battery (or batteries) installed in Fans or other moving engine too. And do not connect the your new vehicle. But if a battery parts can injure you badly. Keep has filler caps, be sure the right negative (−) cable to the your hands away from moving negative (−) terminal on the dead amount of fluid is there. If it is low, parts once the engine is running. add water to take care of that battery because this can cause sparks. first. If you do not, explosive gas 5. Check that the jumper cables do could be present. not have loose or missing (Continued) insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Vehicle Care 10-81

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part, 6. Connect the red positive (+) or to a remote negative (−) 9. Connect the other end of the cable to the positive (+) terminal terminal on the vehicle with the negative (−) cable at least of the dead battery. dead battery. 18 inches (45 cm) away from the Use a remote positive (+) dead battery, but not near terminal if the vehicle has one. engine parts that move. 7. Do not let the other end touch The electrical connection is just metal. Connect it to the as good there, and the chance positive (+) terminal of the of sparks getting back to the good battery. Use a remote battery is much less. positive (+) terminal if the Your vehicle has a remote vehicle has one. negative (−) terminal for this purpose. 10-82 Vehicle Care

10. Now start the vehicle with the To disconnect the jumper cables good battery and run the from both vehicles, do the following: engine for a while. 1. Disconnect the black 11. Try to start the vehicle that had negative (−) cable from the the dead battery. If it will not vehicle that had the dead start after a few tries, it battery. probably needs service. 2. Disconnect the black Notice: If the jumper cables are negative (−) cable from the connected or removed in the vehicle with the good battery. wrong order, electrical shorting 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) may occur and damage the cable from the vehicle with the vehicle. The repairs would not be Jumper Cable Removal good battery. covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) jumper cables in the correct Part or Remote Negative (−) cable from the other vehicle. order, making sure that the Terminal cables do not touch each other or B. Good Battery or Remote other metal. Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal Vehicle Care 10-83

Recreational Vehicle . What is the distance that will be Towing travelled? Some vehicles have Towing restrictions on how far and how Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means long they can tow. To avoid damage, the disabled towing the vehicle behind another . Is the proper towing equipment vehicle should be towed with all four vehicle – such as behind a going to be used? See your wheels off the ground. Consult your motorhome. The two most common dealer/retailer or trailering dealer/retailer or a professional types of recreational vehicle towing professional for additional towing service if the disabled are known as dinghy towing and advice and equipment vehicle must be towed. dolly towing. Dinghy towing is recommendations. towing the vehicle with all four To tow the vehicle behind another . wheels on the ground. Dolly towing Is the vehicle ready to be vehicle for recreational is towing the vehicle with two towed? Just as preparing the purposes such as behind a — wheels on the ground and two vehicle for a long trip, make sure motorhome, see Recreational wheels up on a device known as a the vehicle is prepared to be Vehicle Towing following. dolly. towed. Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing: . What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recommendations. 10-84 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing For vehicles being dinghy towed, 6. To prevent the battery from the vehicle should be run at the draining while the vehicle is beginning of each day and at each being towed, remove the 50 amp RV fuel stop for about five minutes. BATT1 fuse from the underhood This will ensure proper lubrication of fuse block and store in a safe transmission components. Re-install location. See Engine the fuse to start the vehicle. Compartment Fuse Block on To tow the vehicle from the front page 10‑31. with all four wheels on the ground: 7. Release the parking brake. 1. Position the vehicle to be towed, Notice: If the vehicle is towed shift the transmission to without performing each of the P (Park), and turn the ignition to steps listed under “Dinghy LOCK/OFF. Towing,” the automatic transmission could be damaged. If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it 2. Secure the vehicle to the towing vehicle. Be sure to follow all steps of the can be dinghy towed from the front. dinghy towing procedure prior to These vehicles may also be towed 3. Set the parking brake. and after towing the vehicle. by putting the front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this 4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is section. ACCESSORY. exceeded while towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it 5. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral). Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) can be dinghy towed from the front. while towing the vehicle. These vehicles can also be towed by placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground. These vehicles cannot be towed using a dolly. Vehicle Care 10-85

Once the destination is reached: Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Dolly Towing 1. Set the parking brake. Vehicles) (Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Only) 2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse to the underhood fuse block. 3. Shift the transmission to P (Park), turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the key from the ignition. 4. Disconnect the vehicle from the towing vehicle. Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire. Towing with All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be two different tire sizes on the towed with two wheels on the To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle front of the vehicle can cause ground. To properly tow these from the front with two wheels on severe damage to the vehicles, they should be placed on the ground: transmission. a platform trailer with all four wheels 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. off of the ground or dinghy towed from the front. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park). 3. Set the parking brake. 10-86 Vehicle Care

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a Appearance Care straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing. Exterior Care 5. Remove the key from the Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ ignition. Lenses 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. Use only lukewarm or cold water, a 7. Release the parking brake. soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Towing the Vehicle From Follow instructions under “Washing the Rear the Vehicle” later in this section. Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, Finish Care repairs would not be covered by Occasional waxing or mild polishing the vehicle warranty. Never have of the vehicle by hand may be the vehicle towed from the rear. necessary to remove residue from Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. If the vehicle has a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. Vehicle Care 10-87

Notice: Machine compounding or Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Notice: Certain cleaners contain aggressive polishing on a Parts chemicals that can damage the basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Bright metal parts should be emblems or nameplates on the may damage it. Use only cleaned regularly to keep their vehicle. Check the cleaning non-abrasive waxes and polishes luster. Wash with water or use product label. If it states that it that are made for a basecoat/ chrome polish on chrome or should not be used on plastic clearcoat paint finish on the stainless steel trim, if necessary. parts, do not use it on the vehicle vehicle. or damage may occur and it Use special care with aluminum Foreign materials such as calcium would not be covered by the trim. To avoid damaging protective warranty. chloride and other salts, ice melting trim, never use auto or chrome agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, polish, steam or caustic soap to Do not use cleaning agents that are bird droppings, chemicals from clean aluminum. A coating of petroleum based or that contain industrial chimneys, etc., can wax, rubbed to high polish, is acid or abrasives, as they can damage the vehicle's finish if they recommended for all bright metal damage the paint, metal or plastic remain on painted surfaces. Wash parts. on the vehicle. Approved cleaning the vehicle as soon as possible. products can be obtained from If necessary, use non-abrasive Washing the Vehicle your dealer/retailer. Follow all cleaners that are marked safe for manufacturer directions regarding To preserve the vehicle's finish, painted surfaces to remove foreign correct product usage, necessary keep it clean by washing it often. matter. safety precautions and appropriate Do not wash the vehicle in direct Exterior painted surfaces are disposal of any vehicle care sunlight and use a car subject to aging, weather and product. washing soap. chemical fallout that can take their Rinse the vehicle well, before toll over a period of years. To keep washing and after to remove all the paint finish looking new, keep cleaning agents completely. If they the vehicle garaged or covered are allowed to dry on the surface, whenever possible. they could stain. 10-88 Vehicle Care

Dry the finish with a soft, clean frequent application may be Notice: Using strong soaps, chamois or an all-cotton towel to required. See Recommended Fluids chemicals, abrasive polishes, avoid surface scratches and water and Lubricants on page 11‑7. cleaners, brushes, or cleaners spotting. that contain acid on aluminum or Wheels and Trim — Aluminum chrome-plated wheels, could High pressure car washes could or Chrome cause water to enter the vehicle. damage the surface of the Avoid using high pressure washes The vehicle may have either wheel(s). The repairs would not closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use only approved surface of the vehicle. Use of power Keep the wheels clean using a soft washers exceeding 8,274 kPa cleaners on aluminum or clean cloth with mild soap and chrome-plated wheels. (1,200 psi) can result in damage or water. Rinse with clean water. After removal of paint and decals. rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft The surface of these wheels is Notice: Conveyor systems on clean towel. A wax may then be similar to the painted surface of the some automatic car washes could applied. vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, damage the vehicle. There may chemicals, abrasive polishes, Notice: Chrome wheels and other abrasive cleaners, cleaners with not be enough clearance for the chrome trim may be damaged if undercarriage. Check with the car acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes the vehicle is not washed after on them because the surface could wash manager before using the driving on roads that have been automatic car wash. be damaged. Do not use chrome sprayed with magnesium, calcium polish on aluminum wheels. Weatherstrips or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for Notice: Using chrome polish on Silicone grease on weatherstrips will conditions such as ice and dust. aluminum wheels could damage make them last longer, seal better, Always wash the vehicle's the wheels. The repairs would not and not stick or squeak. Apply chrome with soap and water after be covered by the vehicle silicone grease with a clean cloth. exposure. warranty. Use chrome polish on During very cold, damp weather chrome wheels only. Vehicle Care 10-89

Use chrome polish only on blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and Sheet Metal Damage chrome-plated wheels, but avoid a buildup of vehicle wash/wax If the vehicle is damaged and any painted surface of the wheel, treatments may cause wiper requires sheet metal repair or and buff off immediately after streaking. Replace the wiper blades replacement, make sure the body application. if they are worn or damaged. repair shop applies anti-corrosion Notice: Driving the vehicle Wipers can be damaged by: material to parts repaired or through an automatic car wash . Extreme dusty conditions replaced to restore corrosion that has silicone carbide tire protection. cleaning brushes, could damage . Sand and salt Original manufacturer replacement the aluminum or chrome-plated . Heat and sun parts will provide the corrosion wheels. The repairs would not be . protection while maintaining the covered by the vehicle warranty. Snow and ice, without proper vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has removal aluminum or chrome-plated Tires Finish Damage wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to Any stone chips, fractures or deep tire cleaning brushes. clean the tires. scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will Windshield and Wiper Blades Notice: Using petroleum-based corrode quickly and may develop tire dressing products on the into major repair expense. Clean the outside of the windshield vehicle may damage the paint with glass cleaner. finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials Clean the rubber blades using a lint a tire dressing, always wipe off available from your dealer/retailer. free cloth or paper towel soaked any overspray from all painted Larger areas of finish damage can with windshield washer fluid or a surfaces on the vehicle. be corrected in your dealer's/ mild detergent. Wash the windshield retailer's body and paint shop. thoroughly when cleaning the 10-90 Vehicle Care

Underbody Maintenance discolorations, and small, irregular cleaned. Permanent damage can dark spots etched into the paint result from using cleaners on Chemicals used for ice and snow surface. surfaces for which they were not removal and dust control can collect intended. Apply the cleaner directly on the underbody. If these are not to the cleaning cloth to prevent removed, corrosion and rust can Interior Care over-spray. Remove any accidental develop on the underbody parts The vehicle's interior will continue to over-spray from other surfaces such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, look its best if it is cleaned often. immediately. and exhaust system even though Dust and dirt can accumulate on the they have corrosion protection. upholstery and cause damage to Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on At least every spring, flush these the carpet, fabric, leather, and the vehicle, could scratch the materials from the underbody with plastic surfaces. Stains should be glass and/or cause damage to the plain water. Clean any areas where removed quickly as extreme heat rear window defogger. When mud and debris can collect. Dirt could cause them to set rapidly. cleaning the glass on the vehicle, packed in close areas of the frame Lighter colored interiors may use only a soft cloth and glass should be loosened before being require more frequent cleaning. cleaner. flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an Newspapers and garments that can underbody car washing system can transfer color to home furnishings Cleaners can contain solvents that do this. can also transfer color to the can become concentrated in the vehicle's interior. vehicle's interior. Before using Chemical Paint Spotting cleaners, read and adhere to all Remove dust from small buttons safety instructions on the label. Some weather and atmospheric and knobs with a small brush with conditions can create a chemical While cleaning the vehicle's interior, soft bristles. fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall maintain adequate ventilation by upon and attack painted surfaces on Your dealer/retailer has products for opening the vehicle's doors and the vehicle. This damage can take cleaning the vehicle's interior. When windows. two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces that are being Vehicle Care 10-91

Do not clean the interior using the . Do not heavily saturate the To clean: upholstery while cleaning. following cleaners or techniques: 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white . Never use a knife or any other . Damage to the vehicle's interior cloth with water or club soda. may result from the use of many sharp object to remove a soil 2. Remove excess moisture. from any interior surface. organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. 3. Start on the outside edge of the . Never use a stiff brush. It can soil and gently rub toward the cause damage to the vehicle's Fabric/Carpet center. Continue cleaning, using interior surfaces. Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft a clean area of the cloth each . Never apply heavy pressure or brush attachment to remove dust time it becomes soiled. rub aggressively with a cleaning and loose dirt. A canister vacuum 4. Continue to gently rub the cloth. Use of heavy pressure can with a beater bar in the nozzle may soiled area. damage the interior and does only be used on floor carpet and not improve the effectiveness of carpeted floor mats. For soils, 5. If the soil is not completely soil removal. always try to remove them first with removed, use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning . plain water or club soda. Before Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. process with plain water. Avoid laundry detergents or cleaning, gently remove as much of dishwashing soaps with the soil as possible using one of the If any of the soil remains, a degreasers. Using too much following techniques: commercial fabric cleaner or spot soap will leave a residue that . For liquids: gently blot the lifter may be necessary. Test a small leaves streaks and attracts dirt. remaining soil with a paper hidden area for colorfastness before For liquid cleaners, about towel. Allow the soil to absorb using a commercial upholstery 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of into the paper towel until no cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally water is a good guide. more can be removed. cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result, . For solid dry soils: remove as clean the entire surface. much as possible and then vacuum. 10-92 Vehicle Care

A paper towel can be used to blot Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Some commercial products may excess moisture from the fabric or Other Plastic Surfaces increase gloss on the instrument carpet after the cleaning process. panel. The increase in gloss may To remove dust, a soft cloth cause annoying reflections in the Leather dampened with water can be used. windshield and even make it difficult If a more thorough cleaning is To remove dust, a soft cloth to see through the windshield under necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with water can be used. certain conditions. dampened with a mild soap solution If a more thorough cleaning is can be used to gently remove dust necessary, a soft cloth dampened Care of Safety Belts and dirt. Never use spot lifters or with a mild soap solution can be Keep belts clean and dry. removers on plastic surfaces. used. Allow the leather to dry Many commercial cleaners and naturally. Do not use heat, steam, coatings that are sold to preserve { WARNING or spot lifters or spot removers, and protect soft plastic surfaces or shoe polish on leather. Many may permanently change the Do not bleach or dye safety belts. commercial leather cleaners and appearance and feel of the interior It may severely weaken them. In coatings that are sold to preserve and are not recommended. Do not a crash, they might not be able to and protect leather may use silicone or wax-based products, provide adequate protection. permanently change the or those containing organic solvents Clean safety belts only with mild appearance and feel of the leather to clean the vehicle's interior soap and lukewarm water. and are not recommended. Do not because they can alter the use silicone or wax-based products, appearance by increasing the gloss or those containing organic solvents in a non-uniform manner. to clean the vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Vehicle Care 10-93

Floor Mats If the floor mat has a snap retainer, a grommet in the driver side floor mat attaches to a hook on the floor of the vehicle to secure the floor mat. To remove the floor mat, pull the mat towards the rear of the vehicle until the grommet can be removed from the hook. If the floor mat has a knob retainer, a grommet in the floor mat attaches to a knob on the floor of the vehicle to secure the floor mat. To remove the floor mat, turn the knob till it is aligned with the slot in the floor mat grommet and pull the floor mat up. To reinstall, center the slot in the floor mat grommet with the knob on the floor and set the mat in place. Then turn the knob until it is perpendicular to the slot in the grommet to lock the mat in place. 10-94 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES Service and Maintenance 11-1

General Information The maintenance schedule is for Service and vehicles that: Notice: Maintenance intervals, Maintenance . carry passengers and cargo checks, inspections, within recommended limits on recommended fluids, and the Tire and Loading Information lubricants are necessary to keep General Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits this vehicle in good working General Information ...... 11-1 on page 9 10. condition. Damage caused by ‑ Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled . are driven on reasonable road Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 maintenance might not be surfaces within legal driving covered by the vehicle warranty. limits. Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Proper vehicle maintenance helps to . use the recommended fuel. Recommended Fluids and keep the vehicle in good working See Recommended Fuel on Lubricants ...... 11-7 condition, improves fuel economy, page 9‑39. Maintenance Replacement and reduces vehicle emissions for Parts ...... 11-8 better air quality. Maintenance Records Because of all the different ways people use vehicles, maintenance Maintenance Records ...... 11-9 needs vary. The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services. Please read the information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer. 11-2 Service and Maintenance

The proper replacement parts, Scheduled { WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Maintenance Performing maintenance work can Lubricants on page 11‑7 and be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑8. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer/ Change engine oil and filter. See have the required know-how and retailer. Engine Oil on page 10‑8. An the proper tools and equipment. Emission Control Service. If in doubt, see your dealer/ Rotation of New Tires retailer to have a qualified To maintain ride, handling, and When the Change Engine Oil Soon technician do the work. See performance of the vehicle, it is message displays, service is Doing Your Own Service Work on important that the first rotation required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within the next 1 000 km/ page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km 600 miles. If driving under the best At your General Motors dealer/ (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire conditions, the engine oil life system retailer, you can be certain that you Rotation on page 10‑49. might not indicate the need for will receive the highest level of vehicle service for more than a year. service available. Your dealer/ The engine oil and filter must be retailer has specially trained service changed at least once a year and technicians, uses genuine GM the oil life system must be reset. replacement parts, as well as, up to Your dealer/retailer has trained date tools and equipment to ensure service technicians who will perform fast and accurate diagnostics. this work and reset the system. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service. Reset the oil life Service and Maintenance 11-3 system whenever the oil is changed. . Windshield washer fluid level Maintenance II See Engine Oil Life System on check. See Washer Fluid on . Perform all services described in page 10 10. page 10‑21. ‑ Maintenance I. When the Change Engine Oil Soon . Tire inflation check. See Tire . Steering and suspension message displays, certain services, Pressure on page 10‑43. inspection. Visual inspection for checks, and inspections are . Tire wear inspection. See Tire damaged, loose, or missing required. The services described for Inspection on page 10‑49. parts or signs of wear. Maintenance I should be performed . at every engine oil change. The Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation . Engine cooling system services described for Maintenance on page 10‑49. inspection. Visual inspection of II should be performed when: . Fluids visual leak check (or hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and replacement, . Maintenance I was performed every 12 months, whichever if needed. the last time the engine oil was occurs first). A leak in any changed. system must be repaired and the . Windshield wiper blade fluid level checked. inspection for wear, cracking, . It has been 10 months or more . or contamination and windshield since the Change Engine Oil Engine air cleaner filter and wiper blade cleaning, Soon message has displayed or inspection (vehicles driven in if contaminated. See Exterior since the last service. dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Care on page 10‑86. Worn or Maintenance I page 10‑12. damaged wiper blade replacement. See Wiper Blade . Change engine oil and filter. See . Brake system inspection (or Replacement on page 10‑26. Engine Oil on page 10‑8. An every 12 months, whichever Emission Control Service. occurs first). . Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on page 10‑14. 11-4 Service and Maintenance

. Body hinges and latches, key Additional Required Services . See Ignition Transmission Lock lock cylinders, hood latch Check on page 10‑26. assemblies, secondary latches, At Each Fuel Stop . See Park Brake and P (Park) pivots, spring anchor and . Engine oil level check. See Mechanism Check on release pawl, hood and door Engine Oil on page 10‑8. page 10‑26. hinges, rear folding seats, and liftgate hinges lubrication. See . Engine coolant level check. See . Engine cooling system and Recommended Fluids and Engine Coolant on page 10‑14. pressure cap pressure check. Lubricants on page 11‑7. More . Windshield washer fluid level Radiator and air conditioning frequent lubrication may be check. See Washer Fluid on condenser outside cleaning. See required when vehicle is page 10‑21. Cooling System on page 10‑14. exposed to a corrosive . Exhaust system and nearby heat Once a Month environment. Applying silicone shields inspection for loose or grease on weatherstrips with a . Tire inflation check. See Tire damaged components. clean cloth makes them last Pressure on page 10‑43. longer, seal better, and not stick . Accelerator pedal check for . or squeak. Tire wear inspection. See Tire damage, high effort, or binding. Inspection on page 10‑49. Replace if needed. . Restraint system component check. See Safety System Once a Year . If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit, check the Check on page 3‑28. . See Starter Switch Check on sealant expiration date printed . page 10‑25. Engine air cleaner filter on the instruction label of the kit. inspection. See Engine Air . See Automatic Transmission See Tire Sealant and Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑12. Shift Lock Control System Compressor Kit on page 10‑59. Check on page 10‑25. Service and Maintenance 11-5

First Engine Oil Change After maintenance, if a power washer from the underbody, care should Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles is used to clean mud and dirt be taken to not directly spray from the underbody, care should the transfer case output seals. . Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks. be taken to not directly spray High pressure water can the transfer case output seals. overcome the seals and First Engine Oil Change After High pressure water can contaminate the transfer case Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles overcome the seals and fluid. Contaminated fluid will . Engine air cleaner filter contaminate the transfer case decrease the life of the transfer replacement. See Engine Air fluid. Contaminated fluid will case and should be replaced. decrease the life of the transfer Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑12. case and should be replaced. First Engine Oil Change After . Automatic transmission fluid Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles First Engine Oil Change After change (severe service) for . Engine cooling system drain, vehicles mainly driven in heavy Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles flush, and refill, cooling system city traffic in hot weather, in hilly . Automatic transmission fluid and cap pressure check, and or mountainous terrain, when change (normal service). See cleaning of outside of radiator frequently towing a trailer, Automatic Transmission Fluid on and air conditioning condenser or used for taxi, police, page 10‑12. (or every 5 years, whichever or delivery service. See . occurs first). See Cooling Automatic Transmission Fluid on Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires inspection. An System on page 10‑14. An page 10‑12. Emission Control Service. Emission Control Service. . All-wheel drive only: Transfer . . Engine accessory drive belt case fluid change (severe All-wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change (normal inspection for fraying, excessive service) for vehicles mainly cracks, or obvious damage and driven when frequently towing a service). During any maintenance, if a power washer replacement, if needed. An trailer, or used for taxi, police, Emission Control Service. or delivery service. During any is used to clean mud and dirt 11-6 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Service Maintenance I II Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • • Engine coolant level check. • • Windshield washer fluid level check. • • Tire inflation pressures check. • • Tire wear inspection. • • Rotate tires. • • Fluids visual leak check. • • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • • Brake system inspection. • • Steering and suspension inspection. • Engine cooling system inspection. • Windshield wiper blades inspection. • Body components lubrication. • Restraint system components check. • Automatic transmission fluid level check. • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). • Service and Maintenance 11-7

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst Engine Oil symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil on page 10‑8. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant. Engine Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 10‑14. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, in Hydraulic Brake System Canada 88862807). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in Hydraulic Power Steering System Canada 89021186). Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Carrier Assembly Differential (Rear — SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Drive Module) and Transfer Case Canada 89021678). (Power Transfer Unit) Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Key Lock Cylinders Canada 10953474). 11-8 Service and Maintenance

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges and Rear Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Folding Seat Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107 Wiper Blades Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 15254805 — Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 15254804 — Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 15276259 — Service and Maintenance 11-9

Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading 11-10 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Service and Maintenance 11-11

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading 11-12 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine, Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications” Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications Label ...... 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's engine code. Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications ...... 12-2 Service Parts Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 This legal identifier is in the front Identification Label corner of the instrument panel, on This label, on the inside of the glove the left side of the vehicle. It can be box, has the following information: seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification outside. The VIN also appears on Number (VIN) the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title . Model designation and registration. . Paint information . Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. 12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information. Capacities Application Metric English For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt Engine Oil with Filter 5.2 L 5.5 qt Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft *See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑12 for information on checking fluid level. All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing 3.6L V6 Engine 12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES Customer Information 13-1

Reporting Safety Defects Customer Information Customer Reporting Safety Defects to Information the United States Government ...... 13-13 Customer Satisfaction Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are Customer Satisfaction Government ...... 13-13 important to your retailer and to Procedure ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn. Together we are committed General Motors ...... 13-14 Customer Assistance to providing our customers with Offices ...... 13-4 Vehicle Data Recording and unparalleled service, before, during, Customer Assistance for Text Privacy and after the purchase of a Saturn Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4 vehicle, for total customer Online Owner Center ...... 13-5 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ...... 13-14 satisfaction. We call this the Saturn GM Mobility Reimbursement Difference. Normally, any concerns Program ...... 13-5 Event Data Recorders ...... 13-14 Navigation System ...... 13-15 with the sales transaction or the Roadside Assistance operation of the vehicle are resolved Program ...... 13-5 Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ...... 13-16 by the retailer's sales or service Scheduling Service departments. If, for any reason, your Appointments ...... 13-7 Radio Frequency Statement ...... 13-16 ownership experience falls below Courtesy Transportation your expectations, we suggest you Program ...... 13-8 take the following action: Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 Service Publications STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Ordering Information ...... 13-11 Customer Assistance Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level. 13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO : Should you need . The name of your selling and The BBB Auto Line Program is an additional assistance, in the U.S., servicing retail facility. out-of-court program administered contact the Saturn Customer . Vehicle delivery date and by the Council of Better Business Assistance Center by calling present mileage. Bureaus to settle automotive 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call the disputes regarding vehicle repairs or . Saturn Customer Communication Your daytime and evening phone the interpretation of the New Vehicle Centre at 1-800-263-1999. A Saturn numbers. Limited Warranty. This program is Customer Assistance Center team When contacting Saturn, please available at no cost to you, our member will handle your call and remember that your concern will customer. assist in providing product and likely be resolved at a retailer's Although you may be required to warranty information, the nearest facility. That is why we suggest you resort to this informal dispute retailer location, roadside follow Step One first. resolution program prior to filing a assistance, brochures, literature STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): court action, use of the program is and discuss any concerns you Both Saturn and its retailers are free of charge and your case is may have. committed to making sure you are generally heard within 40 days. We encourage you to call the completely satisfied with your If you do not agree with the decision toll-free number in order to give your Saturn vehicle. However, if you given in your case, you can reject it inquiry prompt attention. Please continue to remain unsatisfied after and proceed with any other venue have the following information following the procedure outlined in for relief available to you. available to give the Customer Steps One and Two, Saturn and Assistance Representative: its retailers offer the additional . Vehicle Identification Number assistance of a neutral party (VIN). This 17-digit number through our voluntary participation can be found on the vehicle in a mediation/arbitration program registration or title, on the upper called Better Business Bureau driver side corner of the (BBB) Auto Line. instrument panel, or on your roadside assistance key card. Customer Information 13-3

Contact the BBB Auto Line Program STEP THREE (Canadian Owners): For further information concerning by using the toll-free telephone eligibility in the Canadian Motor number or by writing them at the General Motors Participation in Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), the Mediation/Arbitration Program following address: call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. In the event that you do not feel BBB Auto Line Program Alternatively, you may call the Council of Better Business your concerns have been addressed Saturn Customer Communication Bureaus, Inc. after following the procedure Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or you may outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General 4200 Wilson Boulevard write to: Motors of Canada Limited has Suite 800 Mediation/Arbitration Program committed to binding arbitration Arlington, VA 22203-1838 c/o Customer Communication of owner disputes involving Centre Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited dr.bbb.org/goauto claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 the review of the facts involved by This program is available in all 1908 Colonel Sam Drive an impartial third party arbiter, and 50 states and the District of Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Columbia. Eligibility is limited by may include an informal hearing vehicle age, mileage and other before the arbiter. The program is Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 factors. Saturn Corporation reserves designed so that the entire dispute Your inquiry should be accompanied the right to change eligibility settlement process, from the time by the Vehicle Identification limitations and/or discontinue its you file your complaint to the final Number (VIN). participation in this program. decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge. 13-4 Customer Information

Customer Assistance In Canada, write to: Customer Assistance for Offices Saturn Customer Communication Text Telephone (TTY) Centre Users Saturn encourages customers to General Motors of Canada Ltd. call the toll-free number for CA1-163-005 To assist owners who have hearing assistance. If a customer wishes to 1908 Colonel Sam Drive difficulties, Saturn has installed write to Saturn, the letter should be Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 special TDD (Telecommunication addressed to: GMcanada.com Devices for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer Assistance Saturn Customer Assistance Center 1-800-263-1999 Center. P.O. Box 33173 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Detroit, MI 48232-5173 Telephone devices (TTYs)) Any hearing or speech-impaired 1-800-553-6000 Roadside Assistance: customer who has access to a TDD 1-800-833-6000 (For Text 1-800-268-6800 or to a conventional Text Telephone Telephone devices (TTYs)) (TTY) can communicate with Saturn Roadside Assistance: by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY 1-800-553-6000 users in Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830. Customer Information 13-5

Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links: The offer is available for a very Saturn − www.saturn.com limited period of time from the date Online Owner Center (U.S.) — of vehicle purchase/lease. For more www.gmownercenter.com/ Saturn Merchandise — details, or to determine your saturn www.saturncollection.com vehicle's eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM Information and services Help Center — www.saturn.com/ helpcenter Mobility Assistance Center at customized for your specific 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone vehicle — all in one convenient . FAQ (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. place. . Contact Us General Motors of Canada also . Digital owner manual, warranty has a Mobility Program. Call information, and more GM Mobility 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) . Online service and maintenance Reimbursement Program for details. TTY users call records 1-800-263-3830. . Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide Roadside Assistance . Exclusive privileges and offers Program . Recall notices for your specific For U.S. purchased vehicles, call vehicle 1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438). . OnStar® and GM Cardmember This program, available to qualified Services Earnings summaries applicants, can reimburse you up to For Canadian purchased vehicles, $1,000 of the cost of eligible call 1-800-268-6800. aftermarket adaptive equipment Service is available 24 hours a day, required for your vehicle, such as 365 days a year. hand controls or a wheelchair/ scooter lift. 13-6 Customer Information

Calling for Assistance Roadside Assistance is not a part of . Emergency Tow From a Public the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Road or Highway: Tow to the When calling Roadside Assistance, Saturn and General Motors of nearest Saturn retailer for have the following information Canada Limited reserve the right to warranty service, or if the vehicle ready: make any changes or discontinue was in a crash and cannot be . Your name, home address, and the Roadside Assistance program at driven. Assistance is also given home telephone number any time without notification. when the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or snow. . Telephone number of your Saturn and General Motors of location Canada Limited reserve the right to . Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a flat tire . Location of the vehicle limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the with the spare tire. The spare . Model, year, color, and license claims are made too often, or the tire, if equipped, must be in good plate number of the vehicle same type of claim is made many condition and properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility for . Odometer reading, Vehicle times. the repair or replacement of the Identification Number (VIN), and Services Provided tire if it is not covered by the delivery date of the vehicle . Emergency Fuel Delivery: warranty. . Description of the problem Delivery of enough fuel for the . Battery Jump Start: Service is Coverage vehicle to get to the nearest provided to jump start a dead service station. battery. Services are provided up to 5 years/ 100,000 miles (160 000 km), . Lock-Out Service: Service is Services Not Included in whichever comes first. provided to unlock the vehicle if Roadside Assistance you are locked out. A remote In the U.S., anyone driving the unlock may be available if you . Impound towing caused by vehicle is covered. In Canada, a have OnStar®. For security violation of any laws. person driving the vehicle without reasons, the driver must present . Legal fines. permission from the owner is not identification before this service covered. is given. Customer Information 13-7

. Mounting, dismounting or . Trip Interruption Benefits and Scheduling Service changing of snow tires, chains, Assistance: Must be over or other traction devices. 250 kilometres from where Appointments your trip was started to . Towing or services for vehicles When your vehicle requires driven on a non-public road or qualify. General Motors of warranty service, contact your highway. Canada Limited requires dealer/retailer and request an pre-authorization, original appointment. By scheduling a Services Specific to Canadian detailed receipts, and a copy service appointment and advising Purchased Vehicles of the repair orders. Once your service consultant of your authorization has been received, transportation needs, your dealer/ . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement the Roadside Assistance advisor is approximately $5 Canadian. retailer can help minimize your will help you make arrangements inconvenience. Diesel fuel delivery may be and explain how to receive restricted. Propane and other payment. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled fuels are not provided through into the service department this service. . Alternative Service: If immediately, keep driving it until it assistance cannot be provided . can be scheduled for service, Lock-Out Service: Vehicle right away, the Roadside registration is required. unless, of course, the problem is Assistance advisor may give safety-related. If it is, please call . Trip Routing Service: Detailed you permission to get local your dealership/retailer, let them maps of North America are emergency road service. You will know this, and ask for instructions. provided when requested either receive payment, up to $100, with the most direct route or the after sending the original receipt If the dealer/retailer requests you to most scenic route. There is a to Roadside Assistance. bring the vehicle for service, you are limit of six requests per year. Mechanical failures may be urged to do so as early in the work Additional travel information is covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for the also available. Allow three parts and labor for repairs not same day repair. weeks for delivery. covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility. 13-8 Customer Information

Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the Warranty service can generally be Program maximum amount allowed by GM completed while you wait. However, To enhance your ownership for shuttle service. In addition, for if you are unable to wait, GM helps experience, we and our participating U.S. customers, should you arrange to minimize your inconvenience by dealers are proud to offer Courtesy transportation through a friend or providing several transportation Transportation, a customer support relative, limited reimbursement for options. Depending on the program for vehicles with the reasonable fuel expenses may be circumstances, your dealer can Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty available. Claim amounts should offer you one of the following: Coverage period in Canada) and reflect actual costs and be extended powertrain, and hybrid Shuttle Service supported by original receipts. specific warranty in both the U.S. See your dealer for information Shuttle service is the preferred and Canada. regarding the allowance amounts means of offering Courtesy for reimbursement of fuel or other Several courtesy transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide transportation costs. options are available to assist in you with shuttle service to get you reducing your inconvenience when to your destination with minimal Courtesy Rental Vehicle warranty repairs are required. interruption of your daily schedule. Your dealer may arrange to provide This includes one-way or round trip Courtesy Transportation is not a you with a courtesy rental vehicle or shuttle service within reasonable part of the New Vehicle Limited reimburse you for a rental vehicle time and distance parameters of the Warranty. A separate booklet that you obtain if your vehicle is dealer's area. entitled “Warranty and Owner kept for an overnight warranty Assistance Information” furnished Public Transportation or Fuel repair. Rental reimbursement will be with each new vehicle provides Reimbursement limited and must be supported by detailed warranty coverage original receipts. This requires that If your vehicle requires overnight information. you sign and complete a rental warranty repairs, and public agreement and meet state/ transportation is used instead of the provincial, local, and rental vehicle dealer's shuttle service, the expense provider requirements. Customer Information 13-9

Requirements vary and may include pursuant to the terms and of Genuine GM parts can help minimum age requirements, conditions described herein at its maintain your GM New Vehicle insurance coverage, credit card, sole discretion. Limited Warranty. etc. You are responsible for fuel Recycled original equipment parts usage charges and may also be Collision Damage Repair may also be used for repair. These responsible for taxes, levies, usage parts are typically removed from fees, excessive mileage, or rental If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the vehicles that were total losses in usage beyond the completion of the prior crashes. In most cases, the repair. damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper parts being recycled are from It may not be possible to provide a equipment and quality replacement undamaged sections of the vehicle. like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. parts. Poorly performed collision A recycled original equipment GM repairs diminish your vehicle's part, may be an acceptable choice Additional Program to maintain your vehicle's originally Information resale value, and safety performance can be compromised designed appearance and safety All program options, such as shuttle in subsequent collisions. performance, however, the history of service, may not be available at these parts is not known. Such parts every dealer. Please contact your Collision Parts are not covered by your GM New dealer for specific information Genuine GM Collision parts are new Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any about availability. All Courtesy parts made with the same materials related failures are not covered by Transportation arrangements will be and construction methods as the that warranty. administered by appropriate dealer parts with which your vehicle was Aftermarket collision parts are also personnel. originally built. Genuine GM available. These are made by General Motors reserves the right to Collision parts are your best choice companies other than GM and may unilaterally modify, change or to ensure that your vehicle's not have been tested for your discontinue Courtesy Transportation designed appearance, durability, vehicle. As a result, these parts may at any time and to resolve all and safety are preserved. The use fit poorly, exhibit premature questions of claim eligibility 13-10 Customer Information durability/corrosion problems, and quality of coverage afforded by If a Crash Occurs may not perform properly in various insurance policy terms. If there has been an injury, call subsequent collisions. Aftermarket Many insurance policies provide emergency services for help. Do not parts are not covered by your GM reduced protection to your GM leave the scene of a crash until all New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and vehicle by limiting compensation for matters have been taken care of. any vehicle failure related to such damage repairs by using Move the vehicle only if its position parts are not covered by that aftermarket collision parts. Some puts you in danger, or you are warranty. insurance companies will not instructed to move it by a police specify aftermarket collision parts. officer. Repair Facility When purchasing insurance, we We recommend that you choose a recommend that you assure your Give only the necessary information collision repair facility that meets vehicle will be repaired with GM to police and other parties involved your needs before you ever need original equipment collision parts. in the crash. collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer If such insurance coverage is not For emergency towing see may have a collision repair center available from your current Roadside Assistance Program on insurance carrier, consider switching with GM-trained technicians and page 13‑5. state of the art equipment, or be to another insurance carrier. Gather the following information: able to recommend a collision repair If your vehicle is leased, the leasing center that has GM-trained company may require you to have . Driver's name, address, phone technicians and comparable insurance that assures repairs with number equipment. Genuine GM Original Equipment . Driver's license number Insuring Your Vehicle Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Owner's name, address, phone Protect your investment in your GM parts. Read your lease carefully, as number vehicle with comprehensive and you may be charged at the end of . Vehicle license plate collision insurance coverage. There your lease for poor quality repairs. are significant differences in the . Vehicle make, model and model year Customer Information 13-11

. Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember, Service Publications Number (VIN) recycled parts will not be covered by Ordering Information . Insurance company and policy your GM vehicle warranty. number Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Manuals . General description of the but you must live with the repair. A variety of publications are damage to the other vehicle Depending on your policy limits, available to you. Saturn service your insurance company may manuals are written for trained Choose a reputable repair facility initially value the repair using that uses quality replacement parts. technicians, and in some cases, aftermarket parts. Discuss this with specialized tools and equipment are See “Collision Parts” earlier in this your repair professional, and insist section. necessary to complete certain on Genuine GM parts. Remember if repairs. However, the manuals are If the airbag has inflated, see What your vehicle is leased you may be available to owners who either have Will You See After an Airbag obligated to have the vehicle the training, or wish to gain a Inflates? on page 3‑35. repaired with Genuine GM parts, greater understanding of the even if your insurance coverage technical aspect of their Saturn. Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost. Repair Process For additional publications If another party's insurance information or to order publications In the event that your vehicle company is paying for the repairs, in the United States, call toll free requires damage repairs, GM you are not obligated to accept a 1-800-2-SATURN or visit recommends that you take an active repair valuation based on that Saturn-publications.com to order role in its repair. If you have a insurance company's collision on-line. pre-determined repair facility of policy repair limits, as you have no choice, take your vehicle there, contractual limits with that company. In Canada, Saturn service manuals or have it towed there. Specify to In such cases, you can have control are available by calling toll free the facility that any required of the repair and parts choices as 1-800-551-4123. replacement collision parts be long as cost stays within reasonable original equipment parts, either new limits. Genuine GM parts or recycled 13-12 Customer Information

Owner Publications Service Bulletins Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or unexpected Information on how to obtain Saturn regularly sends its retailers condition. Others describe a quicker product bulletins and as described useful service bulletins about Saturn way to fix your vehicle. They can below is applicable only in the fifty products. Saturn monitors product help a technician service your U.S. states and the District of performance in the field. We then vehicle better. Columbia, and only for cars and prepare bulletins for servicing our light trucks with a Gross Vehicle products better. You can get these Most bulletins apply to conditions Weight Rating (GVWR) less than bulletins, too. affecting a small number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies Bulletins cover various subjects. qualified technician may have to of individual bulletins are also at Some pertain to the proper use and determine if a specific bulletin your participating Saturn retailer. care of your vehicle. Some describe applies to your vehicle. To order You can ask to see them. costly repairs. Others describe Saturn bulletins, call Saturn In Canada, information relating to inexpensive repairs which, if done Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or product service bulletins can be on time with the latest parts, may visit saturn-publications.com to obtained by contacting your Saturn avoid future costly repairs. order online. retailer. Customer Information 13-13

Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects become involved in individual to the Canadian Defects problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. Government Reporting Safety Defects To contact NHTSA, you may call If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline Government safety defect, notify Transport toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Canada immediately, in addition to If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to notifying General Motors of Canada has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or Limited. Call them at a crash or could cause injury or write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to: death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Road Safety Branch Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 2780 Sheffield Road (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 General Motors. You can also obtain other information about motor If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov. investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. 13-14 Customer Information

Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Transport Canada) in a situation like of an EDR is to record, in certain this, please notify Saturn. Your GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations, sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or Call 1-800-553-6000, or write: information about the vehicle’s hitting a road obstacle, data that will Saturn Customer Assistance Center performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a P. O. Box 33173 For example, your vehicle uses vehicle's systems performed. The Detroit, MI 48232-5173 computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, safety systems for a short period of or write: performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment time, typically 30 seconds or less. Saturn Customer Communication and deploy airbags in a crash and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed Centre if so equipped, to provide antilock to record such data as: General Motors of Canada Limited braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in your CA1-163-005 vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating 1908 Colonel Sam Drive data to help your dealer/retailer . Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 technician service your vehicle. Whether or not the driver and Some modules may also store data passenger safety belts were about how you operate the vehicle, buckled/fastened such as rate of fuel consumption or . How far, if at all, the driver was average speed. These modules may pressing the accelerator and/or also retain the owner’s personal brake pedal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, . How fast the vehicle was seat positions, and temperature traveling settings. Customer Information 13-15

This data can help provide a better To read data recorded by an EDR, GM's defense of litigation through understanding of the circumstances special equipment is required, and the discovery process; or, as in which crashes and injuries occur. access to the vehicle or the EDR is required by law. Data that GM Important: EDR data is recorded needed. In addition to the vehicle collects or receives may also be by your vehicle only if a non-trivial manufacturer, other parties, such as used for GM research needs or may crash situation occurs; no data is law enforcement, that have the be made available to others for recorded by the EDR under normal special equipment, can read the research purposes, where a need is driving conditions and no personal information if they have access to shown and the data is not tied to a data (e.g., name, gender, age, and the vehicle or the EDR. specific vehicle or vehicle owner. crash location) is recorded. GM will not access this data or However, other parties, such as law share it with others except: with the Navigation System enforcement, could combine the consent of the vehicle owner or, If your vehicle has a navigation EDR data with the type of if the vehicle is leased, with the system, use of the system may personally identifying data routinely consent of the lessee; in response result in the storage of destinations, acquired during a crash to an official request of police or addresses, telephone numbers, and investigation. similar government office; as part of other trip information. Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions. 13-16 Customer Information

Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) Statement RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC) connection with conveniences such Rules and with RSS-210/211 of as key fobs for remote door locking/ Industry and Science Canada. unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions: door openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause personal information or link with any interference. other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any personal information. interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. INDEX i-1

A Airbags Audio Players ...... 7-12 Adding Equipment to the CD ...... 7-12 Accessories and Vehicle ...... 3-42 MP3 ...... 7-21, 7-27 Modifications ...... 10-3 Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16 Audio System Accessory Power ...... 9-17 Readiness Light ...... 5-15 Radio Reception ...... 7-11 Add-On Electrical Servicing Airbag-Equipped Rear Seat (RSA) ...... 7-43 Equipment ...... 9-54 Vehicles ...... 3-41 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 Adding Equipment to the System Check ...... 3-29 Automatic Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-42 Alarm System Door Locks ...... 2-8 Adjustments Anti-Theft ...... 2-13 Automatic Transmission ...... 9-22 Lumbar, Front Seats ...... 3-5 All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-25, 9-25 Fluid ...... 10-12 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12 AM-FM Radio ...... 7-6 Manual Mode ...... 9-24 Air Vents ...... 8-12 Antenna Shiftlock Control System Airbag System Multi-Band ...... 7-11 Check ...... 10-25 Check ...... 3-43 Anti-Theft Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-33 How Does an Airbag Alarm System ...... 2-13 Restrain? ...... 3-35 Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-38 Passenger Sensing B Antilock Brake System ...... 3-37 Battery ...... 10-24 System (ABS) ...... 9-26 What Makes an Airbag Jump Starting ...... 10-78 Warning Light ...... 5-21 Inflate? ...... 3-34 Load Management ...... 6-7 Appearance Care What Will You See After Power Protection ...... 6-8 Exterior ...... 10-86 an Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-35 Voltage and Charging Interior ...... 10-90 When Should an Airbag Messages ...... 5-33 Armrest Stoarge ...... 4-1 Inflate? ...... 3-33 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26 Assistance Program, Where Are the Airbags? ...... 3-31 Bluetooth ...... 7-45 Roadside ...... 13-5 i-2 INDEX

Brakes ...... 10-22 C Charging System Light ...... 5-17 Antilock ...... 9-26 Check Calibration ...... 5-6 Assist ...... 9-27 Engine Lamp ...... 5-17 California Fluid ...... 10-23 Ignition Fuel Requirements ...... 9-39 Parking ...... 9-27 Transmission Lock ...... 10-26 Perchlorate Materials System Messages ...... 5-34 Child Restraints Requirements ...... 10-3 Braking ...... 9-3 Infants and Young Warning ...... 10-3 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 9-15 Children ...... 3-46 Camera, Rear Vision ...... 9-34 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-29 Lower Anchors and Canadian Vehicle Owners ...... iii Fog Lamps ...... 6-5 Tethers for Children ...... 3-52 Capacities and Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-28 Older Children ...... 3-44 Specifications ...... 12-2 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-27 Securing ...... 3-58, 3-60 Carbon Monoxide Headlamps ...... 10-28 Systems ...... 3-49 Engine Exhaust ...... 9-21 High Intensity Discharge Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-50 Liftgate ...... 2-9 (HID) Lighting ...... 10-28 Circuit Breakers ...... 10-31 Winter Driving ...... 9-8 License Plate Lamps ...... 10-29 Cleaning Cargo Taillamps, Turn Signal, Exterior Care ...... 10-86 Cover ...... 4-3 Sidemarker, and Interior Care ...... 10-90 Management System ...... 4-3 Stoplamps ...... 10-28 Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Tie Downs ...... 4-3 Dual Automatic ...... 8-4 Buying New Tires ...... 10-51 Cautions, Danger, and Rear ...... 8-10, 8-11 Warnings ...... iv Clock ...... 5-8 CD Cluster, IP ...... 5-12 DVD Player ...... 7-14 Collision Damage Repair ...... 13-9 CD Player ...... 7-12 Compact Spare Tire ...... 10-77 Center Console Storage ...... 4-1 Compass ...... 5-6 Chains, Tire ...... 10-56 INDEX i-3

Compressor Kit, Tire Customer Information Drive Systems Sealant ...... 10-59 Service Publications All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-25, 9-25 Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 Ordering Information ...... 13-11 Driver Information Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Customer Satisfaction Center (DIC) ...... 5-24, 5-30 Convex Mirrors ...... 2-16 Procedure ...... 13-1 Driving Coolant Characteristics and Engine ...... 10-14 D Towing Tips ...... 9-44 Engine Temperature Gage . . . .5-14 Damage Repair, Collision ...... 13-9 Defensive ...... 9-2 Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and Drunk ...... 9-2 Warning Light ...... 5-22 Cautions ...... iv Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-7 Cooling System ...... 10-14 Data Recorders, Event ...... 13-14 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-7 Engine Messages ...... 5-35 Daytime Running Lamps/ If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-10 Courtesy Lamps ...... 6-5 Automatic Headlamp Loss of Control ...... 9-5 Courtesy Transportation System ...... 6-3 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Program ...... 13-8 Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-10 Covers Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Winter ...... 9-8 Cargo ...... 4-3 Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 6-7 Driving for Better Fuel Engine ...... 10-7 Delayed Headlamps ...... 6-3 Economy ...... 1-20 Cruise Control ...... 9-30 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Dual Automatic Climate Light ...... 5-24 Devices, Auxiliary ...... 7-33 Control System ...... 8-4 Messages ...... 5-34 Dome Lamps ...... 6-5 DVD Cupholders ...... 4-1 Door Rear Seat Entertainment Customer Assistance ...... 13-4 Ajar Messages ...... 5-34 System ...... 7-35 Offices ...... 13-4 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 DVD/CD Player ...... 7-14 Text Telephone (TTY) Locks ...... 2-7 Users ...... 13-4 Power Locks ...... 2-7 i-4 INDEX

E Engine (cont.) Fluid Overheated Protection Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-12 Electrical Equipment, Operating Mode ...... 10-20 Brakes ...... 10-23 Add-On ...... 9-54 Overheating ...... 10-18 Power Steering ...... 10-20 Electrical System Power Messages ...... 5-36 Washer ...... 10-21 Engine Compartment Pressure Light ...... 5-23 Fog Lamps Fuse Block ...... 10-31 Running While Parked ...... 9-22 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-5 Fuses and Circuit Starting ...... 9-17 Light ...... 5-24 Breakers ...... 10-31 Engine Oil Folding Mirrors ...... 2-16 Instrument Panel Fuse Life System ...... 10-10 Front Seats Block ...... 10-34 Messages ...... 5-36 Adjustment ...... 3-3 Overload ...... 10-30 Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Heated ...... 3-8 Engine Equipment, Towing ...... 9-52 Heated and Ventilated ...... 3-8 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 10-12 Event Data Recorders ...... 13-14 Fuel ...... 9-38 Check and Service Engine Extender, Safety Belt ...... 3-28 Additives ...... 9-40 Soon Lamp ...... 5-17 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 Filling a Portable Fuel Compartment Overview ...... 10-6 Container ...... 9-43 Coolant ...... 10-14 Filling the Tank ...... 9-41 Coolant Temperature Gage . . .5-14 F Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-40 Coolant Temperature Filter Gage ...... 5-13 Warning Light ...... 5-22 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 10-12 Gasoline Specifications ...... 9-39 Cooling System ...... 10-14 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Recommended ...... 9-39 Cooling System Messages . . .5-35 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 6-4 Requirements, California . . . . .9-39 Cover ...... 10-7 Flat Tire ...... 10-57 System Messages ...... 5-36 Drive Belt Routing ...... 12-3 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 10-67 Fuel Economy Exhaust ...... 9-21 Floor Console Storage ...... 4-2 Floor Mats ...... 10-93 Driving for Better ...... 1-20 INDEX i-5

Fuses General Information Heated Front Seats ...... 3-8 Engine Compartment Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-17 Fuse Block ...... 10-31 Towing ...... 9-43 High Voltage Devices and Fuses and Circuit Vehicle Care ...... 10-2 Wiring ...... 10-30 Breakers ...... 10-31 Glove Box ...... 4-1 High-Beam On Light ...... 5-23 Instrument Panel Fuse GM Mobility Reimbursement Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-7 Block ...... 10-34 Program ...... 13-5 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-7 Hood ...... 10-5 G H Horn ...... 5-5 Gages Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-28 How to Wear Safety Belts Engine Coolant Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 6-4 Properly ...... 3-18 Temperature ...... 5-14 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Fuel ...... 5-13 Headlamps I Odometer ...... 5-13 Aiming ...... 10-27 Ignition Positions ...... 9-16 Speedometer ...... 5-13 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Ignition Transmission Lock Tachometer ...... 5-13 Daytime Running Lamps/ Check ...... 10-26 Voltmeter ...... 5-14 Automatic Headlamp Illumination Control ...... 6-5 Warning Lights and System ...... 6-3 Immobilizer ...... 2-14 Indicators ...... 5-11 Delayed ...... 6-3 Infants and Young Children, Garage Door Opener ...... 5-49 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Restraints ...... 3-46 Programming ...... 5-49 High Intensity Discharge Instrument Cluster ...... 5-12 Gasoline (HID) Lighting ...... 10-28 Instrument Panel ...... 6-5 Specifications ...... 9-39 High-Beam On Light ...... 5-23 Storage Area ...... 4-1 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-2 Introduction ...... iii, 7-1 Heated and Ventilated Front Seats ...... 3-8 i-6 INDEX

J LATCH System Lights (cont.) Replacing Parts After a Fog Lamps ...... 5-24 Jump Starting ...... 10-78 Crash ...... 3-58 High-Beam On ...... 5-23 Latch, Lower Anchors and High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-2 K Tethers for Children ...... 3-52 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-15 Key and Lock Messages ...... 5-37 Liftgate Security ...... 5-23 Keyless Entry Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-9 StabiliTrak® Indicator ...... 5-21 Remote (RKE) System ...... 2-3 Lighting Tire Pressure ...... 5-22 Keyless Entry System ...... 2-2 Delayed Entry ...... 6-6 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 5-21 Keys ...... 2-2 Delayed Exit ...... 6-7 Locks Entry ...... 6-6 Automatic Door ...... 2-8 L Parade Dimming ...... 6-7 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 10-37 Lights Door ...... 2-7 Lamp Messages ...... 5-37 Airbag Readiness ...... 5-15 Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Lamps Antilock Brake System Power Door ...... 2-7 Courtesy ...... 6-5 (ABS) Warning ...... 5-21 Safety ...... 2-8 Dome ...... 6-5 Charging System ...... 5-17 Loss of Control ...... 9-5 Exterior Controls ...... 6-1 Cruise Control ...... 5-24 Lower Anchors and Tethers License Plate ...... 10-29 Engine Coolant for Children (LATCH Malfunction Indicator ...... 5-17 Temperature Warning ...... 5-22 SYSTEM) ...... 3-52 Reading ...... 6-6 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 5-23 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 3-5 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-23 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Front Seats ...... 3-5 INDEX i-7

M Messages (cont.) N Ride Control System ...... 5-38 Maintenance Navigation System Service Vehicle ...... 5-39 Records ...... 11-9 Vehicle Data Recording Tire ...... 5-39 Maintenance Schedule and Privacy ...... 13-15 Transmission ...... 5-40 Recommended Fluids and Net, Convenience ...... 4-3 Vehicle ...... 5-33 Lubricants ...... 11-7 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-15 Vehicle Reminder ...... 5-41 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Vehicle Speed ...... 5-41 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17 Washer Fluid ...... 5-41 O Manual Mode ...... 9-24 Mirrors Object Detection System Messages Automatic Dimming Messages ...... 5-37 Airbag System ...... 5-38 Rearview ...... 2-18 Odometer ...... 5-13 Anti-Theft Alarm System ...... 5-38 Convex ...... 2-16 Off-Road Battery Voltage and Folding ...... 2-16 Recovery ...... 9-5 Charging ...... 5-33 Heated ...... 2-17 Oil Brake System ...... 5-34 Manual Rearview ...... 2-18 Engine ...... 10-8 Door Ajar ...... 5-34 Outlets ...... 5-9 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Engine Cooling System ...... 5-35 Park Tilt ...... 2-18 Messages ...... 5-36 Engine Oil ...... 5-36 Power ...... 2-16 Pressure Light ...... 5-23 Engine Power ...... 5-36 Monitor System, Tire Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44 Fuel System ...... 5-36 Pressure ...... 10-44 Online Owner Center ...... 13-5 Key and Lock ...... 5-37 MP3 ...... 7-21, 7-27 Operation, Infotainment Lamp ...... 5-37 Multi-Band Antenna ...... 7-11 System ...... 7-2 Object Detection System . . . . .5-37 i-8 INDEX

Outlets Perchlorate Materials R Power ...... 5-9 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Radio Frequency Overheated Engine Phone Identification (RFID) ...... 13-16 Protection Bluetooth ...... 7-45 Statement ...... 13-16 Operating Mode ...... 10-20 Power Radios Overheating, Engine ...... 10-18 Door Locks ...... 2-7 AM-FM Radio ...... 7-6 Mirrors ...... 2-16 CD/DVD Player ...... 7-14 Protection, Battery ...... 6-8 P Reception ...... 7-11 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-17 Parade Dimming ...... 6-7 Satellite ...... 7-7 Seat Adjustment ...... 3-3 Park Reading Lamps ...... 6-6 Steering Fluid ...... 10-20 Shifting Into ...... 9-19 Rear Climate Control Windows ...... 2-20 Shifting Out of ...... 9-20 System ...... 8-10, 8-11 Pregnancy, Using Safety Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-18 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Belts ...... 3-28 Parking System ...... 7-43 Privacy Assist, Ultrasonic ...... 9-32 Rear Seat Entertainment Radio Frequency Brake ...... 9-27 System ...... 7-35 Identification (RFID) ...... 13-16 Brake and P (Park) Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...... 7-43 Program Mechanism Check ...... 10-26 Rear Seats ...... 3-9 Courtesy Transportation ...... 13-8 Over Things That Burn ...... 9-21 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-34 Proposition 65 Warning, Passenger Airbag Status Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6 California ...... 10-3 Indicator ...... 5-16 Rearview Mirrors ...... 2-18 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37 Automatic Dimming ...... 2-18 INDEX i-9

Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-6 Reporting Safety Defects Safety Belts (cont.) Recommended Fluids and Canadian Government ...... 13-13 Reminders ...... 5-15 Lubricants ...... 11-7 General Motors ...... 13-14 Replacing After a Crash ...... 3-29 Recommended Fuel ...... 9-39 U.S. Government ...... 13-13 Use During Pregnancy ...... 3-28 Records Retained Accessory Safety Defects Reporting Maintenance ...... 11-9 Power (RAP) ...... 9-17 Canadian Government ...... 13-13 Recreational Vehicle Ride Control Systems General Motors ...... 13-14 Towing ...... 10-83 Messages ...... 5-38 U.S. Government ...... 13-13 Reimbursement Program, Roadside Assistance Safety Locks ...... 2-8 GM Mobility ...... 13-5 Program ...... 13-5 Safety System Check ...... 3-28 Remote Keyless Entry Roof Satellite Radio ...... 7-7 (RKE) System ...... 2-2, 2-3 Sunroof ...... 2-22 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Scheduling Appointments ...... 13-7 Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-29 Rotation, Tires ...... 10-49 Sealant Kit, Tire ...... 10-59 Replacement Parts Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3 Seats Airbags ...... 3-43 Running the Vehicle While Adjustment, Front ...... 3-3 Maintenance ...... 11-8 Parked ...... 9-22 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Replacing Airbag System ...... 3-43 Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-8 Replacing LATCH System S Heated Front ...... 3-8 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-58 Safety Belts ...... 3-14 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5 Replacing Safety Belt Care ...... 3-28 Power Adjustment, Front ...... 3-3 System Parts After a Extender ...... 3-28 Rear ...... 3-9 Crash ...... 3-29 How to Wear Safety Belts Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-6 Properly ...... 3-18 Third Row Seat ...... 3-11 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-23 Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-76 Securing Child Restraints ...... 3-58, 3-60 i-10 INDEX

Security Spare Tire Stuck Vehicle ...... 9-10 Light ...... 5-23 Compact ...... 10-77 Sun Visors ...... 2-21 Vehicle ...... 2-13 Specifications and Sunroof ...... 2-22 Service Capacities ...... 12-2 Symbols ...... iv Accessories and Speedometer ...... 5-13 System Modifications ...... 10-3 StabiliTrak System ...... 9-28 Roof Rack ...... 4-4 Doing Your Own Work ...... 10-4 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-21 System Check Engine Soon Lamp ...... 5-17 Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 2-5 Automatic Transmission Maintenance Records ...... 11-9 Starter Switch Check ...... 10-25 Shiftlock Control ...... 10-25 Maintenance, General Starting the Engine ...... 9-17 Information ...... 11-1 Steering ...... 9-4 T Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Fluid, Power ...... 10-20 Tachometer ...... 5-13 Publications Ordering Wheel Adjustment ...... 5-2 Taillamps Information ...... 13-11 Wheel Controls ...... 5-3 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7 Storage Areas Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-39 Armrest ...... 4-1 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-14 Servicing the Cargo Cover ...... 4-3 Immobilizer ...... 2-14 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-41 Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Third-Row Seats ...... 3-11 Shifting Center Console ...... 4-1 Time ...... 5-8 Into Park ...... 9-19 Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Tires Out of Park ...... 9-20 Floor Console ...... 4-2 Buying New Tires ...... 10-51 Sidemarker and Stoplamps Glove Box ...... 4-1 Chains ...... 10-56 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Instrument Panel ...... 4-1 Changing ...... 10-67 Signals, Turn and Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Compact Spare ...... 10-77 Lane-Change ...... 6-4 Storing the Tire Sealant Designations ...... 10-39 and Compressor Kit ...... 10-66 Different Size ...... 10-53 INDEX i-11

Tires (cont.) Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-25 U If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-57 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-21 Ultrasonic Parking Assist ...... 9-32 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-46 Towing Uniform Tire Quality Inspection ...... 10-49 Driving Characteristics ...... 9-44 Grading ...... 10-53 Messages ...... 5-39 Equipment ...... 9-52 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-49 Pressure Light ...... 5-22 General Information ...... 9-43 Operation ...... 5-53 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-44 Recreational Vehicle ...... 10-83 Programming ...... 5-49 Rotation ...... 10-49 Trailer ...... 9-48 Using this Manual ...... iv Sealant and Vehicle ...... 10-83 Compressor Kit ...... 10-59 Trailer Towing ...... 9-48 Sealant and Compressor Transmission V Kit, Storing ...... 10-66 Automatic ...... 9-22 Vehicle Secondary Latch System . . . 10-76 Fluid, Automatic ...... 10-12 Canadian Owners ...... iii Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-37 Messages ...... 5-40 Control ...... 9-3 Terminology and Transportation Program, Load Limits ...... 9-10 Definitions ...... 10-40 Courtesy ...... 13-8 Messages ...... 5-33 Uniform Tire Quality Turn and Lane-Change Personalization ...... 5-42 Grading ...... 10-53 Signals ...... 6-4 Remote Start ...... 2-5 Wheel Alignment and Tire Turn Signal, Security ...... 2-13 Balance ...... 10-55 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Speed Messages ...... 5-41 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-55 Towing ...... 10-83 When It Is Time for New Vehicle Care Tires ...... 10-51 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 10-66 Tire Pressure ...... 10-43 i-12 INDEX

Vehicle Identification When It Is Time for New Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 Tires ...... 10-51 Service Parts Identification Where to Put the Child Label ...... 12-1 Restraint ...... 3-50 Vehicle Reminder Windows ...... 2-19 Messages ...... 5-41 Power ...... 2-20 Ventilation, Air ...... 8-12 Windshield Visors ...... 2-21 Wiper/Washer ...... 5-5 Voltage Devices, and Winter Driving ...... 9-8 Wiring ...... 10-30 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26 Voltmeter Gage ...... 5-14 Wipers Rear Washer ...... 5-6 W Wiring, High Voltage Warning Lights, Gages, and Devices ...... 10-30 Indicators ...... 5-11 Warnings ...... iv Cautions and Danger ...... iv Hazard Flashers ...... 6-4 Washer Fluid ...... 10-21 Washer Fluid Messages ...... 5-41 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance ...... 10-55 Different Size ...... 10-53 Replacement ...... 10-55